BEIJING—China's central bank said Tuesday it
will raise its benchmark deposit and lending rates by 0.25 percentage point
each, the first rate increase this year as the battle escalates to fend off
rising inflation.
The
rate move, effective Wednesday, signals more tightening may follow in the months
ahead if consumer prices continue to rise.
The
People's Bank of China said in a statement it will raise the one-year yuan
lending rate to 6.06% from 5.81%, and the one-year yuan deposit rate to 3.00%
from 2.75%. It
didn't give a reason.
Access
thousands of business sources not available on the free web. Learn
More
The
move comes after the PBOC announced its plan to raise benchmark lending and
deposit rates for the first time in nearly three years on Oct. 19 and once again
on Dec. 25. Those increases took effect on Oct. 20 and Dec. 26. In January, the
central bank also raised banks' deposit requirement ratio by 0.50 percentage
point in a bid to curb credit growth and rein in broader price pressures.
Analysts
have expected a rate increase, as consumer prices are widely expected to keep
rising sharply in the first quarter, driven by strong holiday demand and bad
weather. The PBOC appears to have carefully selected the timing for the rate
moves to take place on Wednesday, the first working day after the week-long
Lunar New Year holiday.
The
U.S. dollar rose immediately after the PBOC announcement, but has given up most
of those gains, and against the euro it was recently fetching $1.3647, after
earlier falling to $1.3620 following the news.
China's
consumer-price index rose 4.6% from a year earlier in December, slowing from
November's 5.1% increase, which was the fastest rate in more than two
years.
However, the PBOC remains uncomfortable with price pressures and some analysts
expect inflation could rise by as high as 6.0% in certain months in the first
half from year-earlier levels.
PBOC
Gov. Zhou Xiaochuan warned recently that the central bank must be vigilant on
inflation and may need to tighten reserve requirements further to address rapid
capital inflows.
Speaking
to Dow Jones Newswires on the sidelines of meetings in Kyoto, Mr. Zhou pointed
out that Chinese price growth slowed slightly in December, but he said it was
stronger than many had forecast and signaled it had more room to climb.
"Inflation
is still higher than many people expected. It may be still going up a little, so
we should keep vigilant on that," Mr. Zhou said in the interview on Jan 30.
—Victoria
Ruan
Much
of the $30 billion U.S. timber industry is still depressed because of weakness
in the housing market, but some companies have found relief in a nontraditional
customer: China.
U.S.
timber exports to China are suddenly surging, especially from mills around the
Pacific Northwest, giving a boost to companies like Weyerhaeuser
Co. and Plum
Creek Timber Co. Helping to spur the increase: One of China's biggest timber
sources—Russia—increased tariffs on its wood exports in 2007, leading Chinese
buyers to turn increasingly to the U.S. and Canada for wood amid the country's
construction boom.
Jake
Stangel for The Wall Street Journal
"Everybody
in the Northwest is talking about China," said Dan Fulton, chief executive of
Weyerhaeuser, a timber company in Federal Way, Wash.
On
Friday, Weyerhaeuser said it had swung to a fourth-quarter profit from a loss a
year earlier. It noted that a tripling of its Chinese log exports in 2010 helped
offset a 10% drop in its total logging volume in the same
period.
Mr.
Fulton said the Chinese are mostly using wood for nonresidential purposes such
as crates and pallets.
The
export surge to China comes at a critical time for the U.S. timber industry.
After being fueled by the nationwide housing boom for much of the last decade,
it was hit by the property bust in 2008.
U.S.
lumber production peaked at 40.5 billion board feet in 2005 and plunged to 23.4
billion in 2009, according to Western Wood Products Association and Southern
Forest Products Association estimates.
To
cope with the decline in domestic demand, many timber companies slashed costs by
closing mills, among other moves. In all, roughly 35% of the U.S. timber
industry's lumber mills remain closed, said Stephen Atkinson, a
forest-products analyst at the Bank of Montreal.
While
exports to China aren't a long-term solution for the U.S. timber industry—the
trend hasn't spurred many mills to hire new workers or expand capacity—they are
a bright spot that is helping to stave off further declines and cuts.
"It's
a step in the right direction," said Steve Chercover, an analyst at D.A.
Davidson & Co. in Portland, Ore.
Timber
demand from China began rising in 2007 when Russia imposed higher tariffs on its
logs, and demand was particularly strong last year, said Hakan Ekstrom,
president of the research firm Wood Resources International
LLC.
Overall,
the number of U.S. logs shipped to China shot up more than 10 times from 256,000
cubic meters in 2007—or less than 1% of the total logs produced in the region—to
an estimated 2.4 million in 2010, or about 7% of the region's total log
production, according to Wood Resources.
And
prices for wood products are continuing to climb. Prices for hemlock logs
destined for sawmills in the U.S. Northwest jumped 43% to $66 a board foot in
2010 from $46 in 2009, according to Wood Resources. The export surge also
doesn't include wood from other regions. Prices for southern pine, for example,
rose just 4.8% in the period, to $65 from $62.
View
Full Image
Jake
Stangel for The Wall Street Journal
The
benefits are greatest for U.S. timber companies with operations in the Pacific
Northwest, where the access to China is easiest.
The
West, including Washington, Oregon, Idaho and California, accounted for 44% of
all U.S. timber production in 2009, compared with 50% for the
South,
according to estimates by the Western Wood Products Association and the Southern
Forest Products Association.
In
addition to Weyerhaeuser, Plum Creek and Rayonier
Inc. have large operations in the Northwest. At Jacksonville, Fla.-based Rayonier,
officials said they plan to increase their harvest level for logs "10% to 15%"
this year from 2010 because of continued strong export demand driven mainly by
China.
And
Seattle-based Plum Creek said it expects that 7% of the logs destined for
sawmills from its forests in Oregon during the first quarter will be exported to
China, up from "nominal" volume in the fourth quarter.
"As
you start to see a return to housing demand in the future," there is likely to
continue to be an export opportunity, added David Lambert, Plum Creek's chief
financial officer. Last week, the company reported that earnings more than
doubled in the fourth quarter on a 38% jump in revenue. It also cited a firming
of lumber prices, starting in December on the West Coast, as a sign the
company's prospects will continue to improve in 2011.
Angela
Merkel wants the nations of Europe to get competitive. But the German Chancellor
would rather get there without any of these nations competing with each other.
Instead, she and French
President Nicolas Sarkozy on Friday unveiled a Competitiveness Pact for Europe
designed to make the rest of Europe look more like Germany.
Under
the proposals, Europe would harmonize its retirement ages, corporate tax regimes
and labor-relations policies. The
rest of Europe was rightly skeptical, if not always for the right
reasons.
Germany
has had a good year, with growth of 3.6% in 2010 while the rest of the EU
stagnated or worse. Its
unemployment rate is comparatively low and its public finances relatively
benign. Berlin also holds the purse strings on the euro zone's ever-expanding
bailout requirements, and the Franco-German proposal was offered with the
implicit warning that if the euro zone's peripheral states can't live within
their means, the bailout party might just come to an end.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
No one
disputes the need for reform on a stagnant, overspending
Continent. The
question is how best to accomplish it. The euro zone was conceived as a
great economic laboratory, in which member states would compete for business and
economic growth without the distorting effects of currency devaluations. But
that competition inevitably means that, at any given point in time, some
economies will do better than others. Not everyone can be Germany. Not everyone
wants to be, either.
Yet
that doesn't mean the rest of the euro zone is doomed to economic decline. Spain
may never be the industrial-exporting powerhouse that Germany is, but Germany is
unlikely to match Spain's advantages as a tourist destination. Each of these
comparative national advantages is a strength for Europe as a whole. By the same
token, it's less likely that every European state will suffer economically at
the same time if each of them pursues a competing models of growth.
It
wasn't all that long ago that Germany was the sick man of
Europe.
And Berlin's economic
model continues to have significant flaws, including taxes that are too high, a
tax code that is too complex and a labor market that is
over-regulated. If Mrs. Merkel wants the rest of Europe to do
better, she would do better to furnish an example of what continuous reform can
achieve than to lock her peers into a formula of "harmonization" that can only
lead to stagnation. A single market does not require a single economic model.
Printed
in The Wall Street Journal, page 11
Freer trade ought to be an issue on which House
Republicans and the White House can agree, but both sides seem determined to
make this harder than it needs to be. Only in Washington,
kids.
President Obama continues to drag his feet on seeking
approval in Congress for the U.S. trade deals with Colombia and Panama, which
Speaker John Boehner wants to combine with the South Korean pact for a single
House vote. In his mea minima culpa
address to the Chamber of Commerce on Monday, Mr. Obama even resorted to the
slippery words "as we pursue trade agreements with Panama and Colombia."
Huh? The Colombia deal was first signed in 2006
and renegotiated in 2007 after Democrats took Congress. Our Colombian sources
tell us the Administration won't even say how it wants to "pursue" yet another
rewrite. Perhaps Republicans should ask U.S. trade rep Ron Kirk when he makes a
rare appearance before Congress today.
Meanwhile, Republicans seem all too ready to
extend something called Trade Adjustment Assistance, a package of federal
programs to retrain workers hurt by imports, mostly in manufacturing, where U.S.
employment is now rising. TAA received $1.8 billion last year and is due to
expire Saturday. Ways and Means
Chairman Dave Camp (R., Mich.) is supporting a bill that ties TAA to an
extension of the Andean Trade Preference Act.
View Full Image
Associated Press
Mr.
Camp claims that tying the two issues is the only way to get Democrats to
support the three big trade pacts and the Andean deal, which reduces or
eliminates duties on imports from allies like Colombia. That is odd logic. If TAA and the Andean deals were
separated, the Senate could vote on their respective merits and show who really
supports fiscal prudence and free trade, and who doesn't. Senator Jon Kyl (R.,
Az.) supports this approach.
The
danger is that TAA is turning into one more open-ended entitlement. It cost
$406.6 million in 2001 but would cost $2.4 billion this year if it's extended to
include add-ons from the 2009 stimulus. Those include TAA assistance to laid-off
government workers.
Mr. Camp's bill would extend TAA through June,
which his aides say will only cost a couple hundred million dollars. Ways and
Means deputy staff director Sage Eastman told us Mr. Camp supports TAA because
it's a "well-established program" that does an "important job retraining
employees to deal with the complexities of international trade." In a follow-up
email, he cited metrics Republicans put in place "to assure better program
results, accountability, and cost-effectiveness."
There is little, if any, empirical support for
these claims. The Department of Labor doesn't analyze whether re-employed
workers would have found new jobs without TAA help. A 2008 American University study found that
TAA helps workers find new jobs but at much lower wages—and concluded the
program is of "dubious value." TAA also provides assistance for trade-related
layoffs but not for those laid off because of technological change or
productivity gains.
House leaders had planned a vote on Mr. Camp's
bill yesterday but pulled it from the floor amid conservative concerns. We doubt
tea partiers want to read that Republicans extended stimulus benefits in one of
their first votes. In his effort to win over Democrats who will oppose trade
bills despite TAA, Mr. Camp is complicating the job of winning Republican
votes. Far better to junk the political
bells and whistles and move the Andean trade bill and the other agreements for
up-or-down votes as soon as possible.
Tokyo
As Japanese follow Egypt's uprising, they may
also ponder how the evolution of Japan's democracy has taken another detour as
the initial euphoria surrounding the Democratic Party's rise to power has
dissipated. Since its victory in Lower House elections in August 2009, the DPJ
has stumbled badly. It lost its top leader to corruption charges and watched its
first prime minister, Yukio Hatoyama, resign after just a year in office. Its
public support evaporated.
The DPJ victory was due to the will of the
Japanese people to elect a new party to lead them after more than a half-century
of Liberal Democratic Party rule. Many observers hoped this was the beginning of
a true two-party system in Japan, one in which parties would be forced to be
more responsive to the desires of the Japanese voter.
Yet just a year and half later, Prime Minister
Naoto Kan continues to make public missteps, most recently when he admitted he
was unaware that Standard and Poor's had downgraded Japanese government debt.
His cabinet's approval rating in December was just 21%, and his latest gaffe
will do him no favors.
Part of
the problem for Japanese leaders since 2007 has been the lack of a principled
opposition party. After the DPJ took
power in the Upper House in July of that year, it acted solely to stymie LDP
policies and hamstring progress on budget issues, reform, and restructuring.
Since taking a plurality of seats in the same house in July 2010, the LDP has
threatened to act the same way, and next month's budget battles will show
whether the LDP has decided to be as obstructionist as was the DPJ. Yet with Japan still teetering near
deflation and its public debt approaching 200% of GDP, radical reforms are
needed to prevent the country's economy from further, possibly catastrophic,
weakening.
A third disturbance to Japan's political system
stems from the ongoing saga of former DPJ leader Ichiro Ozawa. Mr. Ozawa has
long been under investigation for fundraising irregularities and last week
finally was indicted by Tokyo prosecutors. Prime Minister Kan has tried to get
Mr. Ozawa to quit the party, ostensibly to stop dragging down the party's
approval rating. Yet Mr. Ozawa remains very popular with DPJ rank and file
parliamentarians, many of whom he recruited into the party.
This remains a threat to Mr. Kan, should the
premier's position weaken any further. Mr. Ozawa, who lost a bid for party
leadership late last year, is reviled by many Japanese, and his continuing
ability to evade justice, despite his indictment, is so far in many Japanese
eyes a blot on the ideal of impartial rule of law.
The result of the several factors above is a
deep and abiding cynicism among Japan's citizens. The electoral system is rigged to
overwhelmingly favor rural voters, with the result that Japan's agricultural
sector is hopelessly protected from competition and highly inefficient.
Recent court rulings in Japan that the electoral system is unconstitutional have
so far produced no real move for reform. The two main political parties remain
in a deadlock over moving forward on policies to cut government spending and
develop sustainable growth policies. Meanwhile, Japanese have watched China
surpass them as the world's second-largest economy, with an equal mix of concern
and disinterest.
No one should think that Japan is anywhere
close to massive public uprising, which is rare in any case in most developed
countries. Even demonstrations of the kind seen in Great Britain over the
raising of university fees, or the more serious ones in Greece over cuts in
public spending, have not happened in Japan since the student uprisings of 1968.
In the 1970s, Japanese bore recession, high prices, and shortages with relative
equanimity, and since 1990, for nearly a
generation, they have lived through a stagnant economy, the loss of corporate
lifetime employment, and the steady aging of society.
But Japanese sense they are nearing a turning
point. The phrase is undoubtedly overused, but a week talking with Japanese
politicians, businessmen, academics and ordinary citizens reveals a powerful
current of unease roiling society. True, many seem resigned to fall into what
some Japanese academics call "middle power" status, but the majority of those in
leadership roles recognize the country faces significant risks if it continues
on the same path.
Corporate leaders, in particular, understand the danger
of continued political paralysis, demographic decline, and inward-looking
youth. The need to do something to
change current trends is perceived by nearly everyone I talked with, yet an
instinctive Japanese conservatism keeps things from going on the boil.
In the short term that may be a good thing, as
it attests to the general stability in Japanese society. However, over a longer
period, such fatalism and conservatism can wind up eroding public trust in
democracy's ability to solve problems, even if the stumbling block may be the
peculiarities of Japan's particular form of democracy. Such paralysis has led in
the past to a radical remaking of Japan's political and social systems,
something that all should be wary of.
Japanese have the luxury of not having to take
to the streets to try to change their system. However, another generation of
stagnation and the inherent strengths of that democracy may well be put to test,
albeit in a less confrontational way than today in Cairo.
Mr. Auslin is director of Japan studies at
the American Enterprise Institute and a columnist for WSJ.com. Follow him on
Twitter at @michaelauslin.
FRANKFURT—Germany's current account surplus in 2010
rose to €129.9 billion ($177.09 billion), or 5.2% of estimated national
output, according to figures released Wednesday by the Federal Statistics
Office, Destatis.
The surplus is about €10 billion more than the
previous year's, and reflects a recovery that has been overwhelmingly driven by
the export sector. Destatis said that exports rose 18.5% on the year to €951.9
billion, while imports rose 20% to €797.6 billion. The merchandise trade surplus for the
year totaled €154.3 billion, or 6.1% of gross domestic
product.
Germany's trading partners often see its
persistent external surpluses as proof of an unbalanced growth model, and the
U.S. and various European Union members have repeatedly urged it to cut the
surplus by boosting domestic demand. The current account surplus is well above
the upper limit of 4% of gross domestic product suggested last year by the U.S.
to the Group of 20 industrialized and developing countries.
German authorities, by contrast, see the
surplus as the result of the country's competitiveness, saying there is no state
policy to prioritize exports over the domestic economy.
The surplus has been a particularly sensitive
topic in the last 18 months, as the rapid recovery in Germany has only slowly
trickled down to its trading partners in the euro zone. German imports from the euro zone grew
only 17% last year, compared with a 25% increase in imports from countries
outside the EU, but Germany's surplus with its 15 partners in the single
currency area was virtually flat on the year at just over €38 billion.
On a month-to-month basis, the current account
surplus widened to €17.6 billion in December from a revised €12.9 billion in
November. Economists polled ahead of time had predicted a surplus of only €14.0
billion.
by C.
Fred Bergsten | February 8th, 2011 | 03:49 pm
http://www.piie.com/realtime/?p=2012
|
There
are encouraging signs that a breakthrough may have been achieved in the
long-running debate over the exchange rate of China’s currency, the renminbi.
Its real rate against the dollar is now rising at an annual rate of 10 to 12
percent, which if continued would complete the needed correction of 20 to 30
percent over two to three years, and
official US reactions suggest that assurances that the adjustment will continue
may have been received. This movement appears to derive from
effective US pressure, increasing expressions of concern about the issue from
other countries (especially a number of major emerging markets) and, most
importantly, changes in economic conditions in China
itself.
The
nominal exchange rate of the renminbi has now appreciated by about 3.7 percent
against the dollar since China announced last June that it would let the rate
start moving upward again.
During this same period, Chinese inflation has accelerated and is running
substantially above that of the United States (which is less than 2 percent).
Different indexes
produce different results and all of the official numbers probably underestimate
the actual pace of upward price movements in that
country. It is safe to say, however, that the
real exchange rate of the renminbi has risen by at least 5 percent against the
dollar over the past seven months, producing a real appreciation against the
dollar at an annual rate of at least 10 percent and perhaps as much as 12
percent.
China
continues to intervene against the dollar to limit its appreciation, however,
and the dollar has declined against most other currencies during this same
period. Hence the trade-weighted average exchange rate of the renminbi has not
appreciated by much. This "real effective exchange rate," or REER, should be the
focus of our attention since the goal should be a sharp reduction in China’s
global current account surplus rather than solely its bilateral surplus against
the United States.
We
must recognize, however, that the Chinese themselves continue to focus
almost wholly on the dollar rate and that US officials, and
especially Congressmen, often do so as well. We must also recognize that
calculation of REERs is technically complex, because agreements would have to be
reached on appropriate measures of inflation in both China and the rest of the
world (the "real" component) as well as on the weighting of other currencies
(the "effective" component); it is much simpler, especially in working out
international agreements on the issue, to focus on the nominal bilateral
rate.
It is also true the dollar may rise as well as fall over the coming period, and
that, if recent history is any guide, the Chinese will "ride it up" just as they
have recently "ridden it down." But lasting adjustment will not be
achieved until the REER for the renminbi, as well as its bilateral rate against
the dollar, has appreciated adequately and
permanently.
What
is a reasonable goal? In testimony before the Senate Banking Committee last
September, Secretary of
the Treasury Tim Geithner implicitly endorsed an objective that I had proposed
shortly before: that China replicate, over the next two to three years, the real
effective appreciation of 20 to 25 percent that it permitted between 2005 and
2008. This implies a somewhat higher appreciation, of perhaps 30 percent,
against the dollar. We thus need assurance that the renminbi will rise against
the dollar by about 10 percent annually, the pace that has now eventuated since
last June.
Why
has China moved now? First, the United States has clearly escalated its pressure
in a series of private conversations over the past six months while respecting
China’s obsession with avoiding the appearance of capitulating to public
admonitions. President Obama reportedly placed highest priority on the currency
issue during his extensive bilateral conversation with President Hu Jintao
around the G-20 summit in Seoul in early November. This took place after the US
mid-term elections so it could not be interpreted by the Chinese as "simply
playing domestic politics in the United States." China was clearly taken aback
by the strong US criticism of a number of their policies over the past year,
ranging from their naval activities in the South China Sea to their passivity
regarding North Korea to a range of new trade and industrial policy issues, and
recognized that resolving the currency issue was a key element to restoring
comity in the overall relationship, which is of great importance to
them.
It is
not difficult to imagine that an implicit or explicit deal was struck at the
private dinner between the two Presidents on the first day of Hu’s visit to
Washington in mid-January: China will continue to let its exchange rate rise at
the needed pace while the United States will avoid public commentary on the
issue. The deafening silence from the US side throughout the visit, which has
continued through subsequent events such as the World Economic Forum in Davos,
supports such speculation. So does the subsequent Treasury report on foreign
exchange issues, released on February 6, which could only exonerate China from
designation as "manipulating" its currency on the basis of such an expectation.
The two governments may not yet have created a fully functioning G-2, of the type
I proposed over five years ago to provide an informal steering committee for
the world economy, but the two Presidents have met eight times over the past two
years and routinely discuss the entire range of global as well as bilateral
issues; a resolution of the currency conflict would mark a major success for
that process.
It is
noteworthy that the actual jumps in the renminbi since last June correlate
closely with episodes of US pressure: in early September in the run-up to major
hearings on the issue in both the House and Senate, in early October when the
Senate was considering whether to take up the China currency bill that the House
passed on September 30, in early November prior to the G-20 summit, and from
mid-December through mid-January as President Hu prepared to travel to
Washington.
A
second factor was the increased expression of concern over the renminbi issue by
other countries, especially key emerging markets. France, the new chair of the
G-20, has been extremely pointed on the topic behind closed doors. Central bank
governors from Brazil and India have spoken publicly on it, and private
criticism from those countries, and very sharply from others such as Mexico, has
recently increased. Of particular importance may be the growing entreaties from
other Asian countries, including a number of China’s neighbors, who have seen
their exchange rates rise considerably more than China’s over the past half
year.
Conditions
inside China are presumably the most important factor in the authorities’
decision to let the renminbi rise significantly. Inflation has replaced growth
as the leading concern for economic policy and a stronger currency in a very
open economy like China’s is one of the most effective instruments to counter
surging prices (and for the central government to impose its will on
often-recalcitrant provisional governors). Growth itself continues at near
double-digit levels and, with the high probability of reasonably robust
expansion in the US and world economies for 2011 and beyond, the authorities can
now be confident that China will not suffer a relapse even if its trade surplus
declines a bit. They also observe that their economy continued to grow
prodigiously throughout the earlier period of renminbi appreciation in 2005–08,
tempering fears that the inevitable adjustments will be excessively painful.
China’s evident desire to increasingly internationalize the renminbi may also
tilt it toward reducing its intervention and letting the exchange rate move
toward an equilibrium level.
The
Chinese authorities have of course reiterated their intent to rebalance their
economy, away from exports and the underlying investment in capital-intensive
industries, for a number of years and have made commitments to the G-20 to do
so. They have indeed imbedded that concept in the new five-year indicative plan
that is scheduled to begin next year. They have apparently, and correctly,
concluded that this is the perfect time to accelerate the adjustment process
with inflation the new priority at home while unemployment remains of paramount
concern in the United States and Europe, their two main trading partners.
It is
of course impossible to know how durable any such agreement might turn out to
be. The United States and the world as a whole will have to monitor renminbi
developments closely and regularly. The US government will have to continue its
private pressure and the Congress will have to maintain the prospect of renewed
legislative initiatives if progress falters. In doing so, however, everybody
must recognize that the rate will not rise monotonically because, as they have
done since last June, the Chinese will want to keep speculators guessing by
engineering periodic depreciations for a few days or even longer.
We
must also have no illusion that the Chinese are letting market forces determine
the rate. They will continue to intervene heavily and simply manipulate it to a
stronger level that is both more beneficial to their own economy and more
compatible with global equilibrium. In light of the gradual pace of
appreciation, and the lags of two to three years between currency moves and
trade results, we must also recognize that China will continue to run sizable
(if falling) external surpluses for at least another five years (and thus keep
buying more Treasury bills, albeit hopefully at a declining rate).
The
postulated outcome, a rise of 20 to 30 percent in the renminbi over two to three
years, would have major positive effects. China’s global current account surplus
would drop by $300 billion or so from the rising path that it would otherwise be
on, and retreat well within the unofficial norm of 4 percent of GDP that has
been discussed by the G-20 and endorsed by some Chinese officials. The US
external deficit would drop by $50 billion to $100 billion, creating perhaps
500,000 new and high-paying jobs (mainly in export industries) in this country.
We know that currency changes produce these powerful results because the earlier
rise of the renminbi during 2005–08 and the 25 percent fall of the dollar during
2002–07, along with the global recession, produced declines (with the usual
lags) of fully one half in both countries’ imbalances by 2009 (before they
started rising again last year because the currency corrections halted or
reversed). The world’s only major currency misalignment would be largely
corrected, and the outlook for world growth and global finance would become much
stronger and much more sustainable.
Asia
has been a big winner from the development of global manufacturing supply
chains. Japan and the four tigers—Hong Kong, Singapore, South Korea and
Taiwan—showed how cheaper shipping could create opportunities for factories far
from the intended market. As supply chains have grown more complex, the benefits
have spread. Components now travel from Thailand, the Philippines, Malaysia
and Taiwan to a factory in China, where they're assembled before hitting the
shelves of an Apple store in New York as a finished
iPhone.
Even
as the manufacturing supply chains continue their evolution, a new question
confronts Asia: How to profit from increasingly sophisticated supply chains in
services? Despite all
the political hype in the West about the ills of outsourcing and the perceived
ubiquity of overseas customer-service call centers, services supply chains are
still in their infancy.
Call
centers are arguably among the lowest-hanging fruit in the services world. They
require only phone lines, computers hooked up to the Internet and
English-speaking workers with relatively basic educational attainment. But
already outsourcing centers are bounding up the value chain: programming
software, reviewing legal documents, processing expense reports and the like.
The Philippines is home to a growing movie-animation business. China is skipping
the call-center phase (poor English skills are a debilitating problem) and
jumping right into providing research and development
services.
We're
heading for a day when a Malaysian architect will sketch out a new office tower
for London, a Philippine architect will prepare detailed renderings, and a
Chinese engineer will assess the structural soundness of the designs. Or a
specialist firm in Bangalore will administer health benefits for a Kansas
company. Indeed, such things already are happening on a modest
scale.
Asia
seems well-situated to capitalize on the lengthening of services supply chains.
Of the 10 most
promising services- outsourcing destinations recently identified in a survey
from consultancy A.T. Kearney, seven are in Asia. India, predictably, tops the list,
followed by China. Malaysia, Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam and the Philippines
are the rest, with Egypt, Mexico and Chile rounding out the top of the
class. That survey measures future potential. A study last year
from IBM examining actual investments found the Philippines edging out India to
attract more business-service investment such as call centers (measured by job
creation) than any other country.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
But
nothing is inevitable. Investments in infrastructure,
pro-trade policies and the right regulation and taxation at home positioned some
Asian countries to start taking their profitable places in global manufacturing
supply chains. Yet the advantages have always been relative.
And as some economies
have worsened their business climates over time, others have been happy to pick
up the slack by improving theirs.
How
this competition will evolve is anyone's guess, but already it's possible to
make a few observations. One is that the field is still wide open. Having been a
goods-exporting powerhouse does not necessarily translate into services prowess.
China is an exporting
dynamo, but many other countries in the A.T. Kearney top 10 are not. The skills
and infrastructures required for manufacturing and services are different enough
that one won't necessarily lead naturally to the
other.
That's
particularly apparent on the infrastructure front. Ask experts what a government
needs to do to develop a services- outsourcing industry, and the first answer is
usually "provide more reliable electricity" or "lay fiber-optic cable." True,
but more important will be the human intangibles. Educating a sufficiently
skilled work force—no small task in itself—is only the
start.
Manufacturing
supply chains applied modern transportation technologies to a millennia-old
principle that if someone in a neighboring village can make a good more
efficiently than you can, you should buy it from him. Service supply chains derive a new
principle—that you no longer need to be geographically near the person providing
you a business service—from modern communications technologies.
Now countries need to figure out how they fit into this trend, and how to profit
from it.
Mr.
Sternberg edits the Wall Street Journal Asia's Business Asia
column.
For 16
years prior to Ronald Reagan's presidency, the U.S. economy was in a tailspin—a
result of bipartisan ignorance that resulted in tax increases, dollar
devaluations, wage and price controls, minimum-wage hikes, misguided spending,
pandering to unions, protectionist measures and other policy
mistakes.
In the
late 1970s and early '80s, 10-year bond yields and inflation both were in the
low double digits. The "misery index"—the sum of consumer price inflation plus
the unemployment rate—peaked at well over 20%. The real value of the S&P 500
stock price index had declined at an average annual rate of 6% from early 1966
to August 1982.
For
anyone old enough today, memories of the Arab oil embargo and price
shocks—followed by price controls and rationing and long lines at gas
stations—are traumatic. The U.S. share of world output was on a steady course
downward.
Then
Reagan entered center stage. His first tax bill was enacted in
August 1981. It included a sweeping cut in marginal income tax rates, reducing
the top rate to 50% from 70% and the lowest rate to 11% from
14%. The House vote was 238 to 195, with 48 Democrats on the
winning side and only one Republican with the losers. The Senate vote was 89 to
11, with 37 Democrats voting aye and only one Republican voting nay. Reaganomics
had officially begun.
President
Reagan was not alone in changing America's domestic economic agenda.
Federal Reserve
Chairman Paul Volcker, first appointed by Jimmy Carter, deserves enormous credit
for bringing inflation down to 3.2% in 1983 from 13.5% in 1981 with a
tight-money policy. There were other heroes of the tax-cutting
movement, such as Wisconsin Republican Rep. Bill Steiger and Wyoming Republican
Sen. Clifford Hansen, the two main sponsors of an important capital gains tax
cut in 1978.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
What
the Reagan Revolution did was to move America toward lower, flatter tax rates,
sound money, freer trade and less regulation.
The key to Reaganomics
was to change people's behavior with respect to working, investing and
producing. To do this, personal income tax rates not only decreased
significantly, but they were also indexed for inflation in 1985. The highest tax
rate on "unearned" (i.e., non-wage) income dropped to 28% from 70%. The
corporate tax rate also fell to 34% from 46%. And tax brackets were pushed out,
so that taxpayers wouldn't cross the threshold until their incomes were far
higher.
Changing
tax rates changed behavior, and changed behavior affected tax
revenues.
Reagan understood that lowering tax rates led to static revenue losses. But he
also understood that lowering tax rates also increased taxable income, whether
by increasing output or by causing less use of tax shelters and less tax
cheating.
Moreover,
Reagan knew from personal experience in making movies that once he was in the
highest tax bracket, he'd stop making movies for the rest of the year. In other
words, a lower tax rate could increase revenues. And so it was with his tax
cuts. The highest 1% of
income earners paid more in taxes as a share of GDP in 1988 at lower tax rates
than they had in 1980 at higher tax rates. To Reagan, what's been called the
"Laffer Curve" (a concept that originated centuries ago and which I had been
using without the name in my classes at the University of Chicago) was pure
common sense.
There
was also, in Reagan's first year, his response to an illegal strike by federal
air traffic controllers. The president fired and replaced them with military
personnel until permanent replacements could be found. Given union power in the
economy, this was a dramatic act—especially considering the well-known fact that
the air traffic controllers union, Patco, had backed Reagan in the 1980
presidential election.
On the
regulatory front, the number of pages in the Federal Register dropped to less
than 48,000 in 1986 from over 80,000 in 1980. With no increase in the minimum
wage over his full eight years in office, the negative impact of this price
floor on employment was lessened.
And,
of course, there was the decontrol of oil markets. Price controls at gas
stations were lifted in January 1981, as were well-head price controls for
domestic oil producers. Domestic output increased and prices fell. President
Carter's excess profits tax on oil companies was repealed in 1988.
The
results of the Reagan era? From December 1982 to June 1990,
Reaganomics created over 21 million jobs—more jobs than have been added since.
Union membership and man-hours lost due to strikes tumbled. The stock market
went through the roof. From July 1982 through August 2000, the S&P 500 stock
price index grew at an average annual real rate of over 12%. The unfunded
liabilities of the Social Security system declined as a share of GDP, and the
"misery index" fell to under 10%.
Even
Reagan's first Democratic successor, Bill Clinton, followed in his
footsteps. The negotiations for what would become the North American Free Trade
Agreement began in Reagan's second term, but it was President Clinton who pushed
the agreement through Congress in 1993 over the objections of the unions and
many in his own party.
President
Clinton also signed into law the biggest capital gains tax cut in our nation's
history in 1997. It effectively eliminated any capital gains tax on
owner-occupied homes. Mr. Clinton reduced government spending as a share of GDP
by 3.5 percentage points, more than the next four best presidents
combined.
Where Presidents George H.W. Bush and Bill Clinton slipped up was on personal
income tax rates—allowing the highest personal income tax rate to eventually
rise to 39.6% from 28%.
The
true lesson to be learned from the Reagan presidency is that good economics
isn't Republican or Democrat, right-wing or left-wing, liberal or conservative.
It's simply good economics. President Barack Obama should take heed and not
limit his vision while seeking a workable solution to America's tragically high
unemployment rate.
Mr.
Laffer is the chairman of Laffer Associates and co-author of "Return to
Prosperity: How America Can Regain Its Economic Superpower Status" (Threshold,
2010).
APNews
Sign
up for Townhall Alerts Sign-Up
A new drilling technique is opening up
vast fields of previously out-of-reach oil in the western United States, helping
reverse a two-decade decline in domestic production of
crude.
Companies
are investing billions of dollars to get at oil deposits scattered across North
Dakota, Colorado, Texas and California. By 2015, oil executives and analysts
say, the new fields could yield as much as 2 million barrels of oil a day _ more
than the entire Gulf of Mexico produces now.
This
new drilling is expected to raise U.S. production by at least 20 percent over
the next five years. And
within 10 years, it could help reduce oil imports by more than half, advancing a
goal that has long eluded policymakers.
"That's
a significant contribution to energy security," says Ed Morse, head of
commodities research at Credit Suisse.
Oil
engineers are applying what critics say is an environmentally questionable
method developed in recent years to tap natural gas trapped in underground
shale. They drill down and horizontally into the rock, then pump water, sand and
chemicals into the hole to crack the shale and allow gas to flow
up.
Because
oil molecules are sticky and larger than gas molecules, engineers thought the
process wouldn't work to squeeze oil out fast enough to make it economical. But
drillers learned how to increase the number of cracks in the rock and use
different chemicals to free up oil at low cost.
"We've
completely transformed the natural gas industry, and I wouldn't be surprised if
we transform the oil business in the next few years too," says Aubrey McClendon,
chief executive of Chesapeake Energy, which is using the
technique.
Petroleum
engineers first used the method in 2007 to unlock oil from a 25,000-square-mile
formation under North Dakota and Montana known as the
Bakken.
Production there rose
50 percent in just the past year, to 458,000 barrels a day, according to Bentek
Energy, an energy analysis firm.
It was
first thought that the Bakken was unique. Then drillers tapped oil in a shale
formation under South Texas called the Eagle Ford. Drilling permits in the
region grew 11-fold last year.
Now
newer fields are showing promise, including the Niobrara, which stretches under
Wyoming, Colorado, Nebraska and Kansas;
the Leonard, in New
Mexico and Texas; and the Monterey, in
California.
"It's
only been fleshed out over the last 12 months just how consequential this can
be," says Mark Papa, chief executive of EOG Resources, the company that first
used horizontal drilling to tap shale oil. "And there will be several additional
plays that will come about in the next 12 to 18 months. We're not done
yet."
Environmentalists
fear that fluids or wastewater from the process, called hydraulic fracturing,
could pollute drinking water supplies. The Environmental Protection Agency is
now studying its safety in shale drilling. The agency studied use of the process
in shallower drilling operations in 2004 and found that it was
safe.
In the
Bakken formation, production is rising so fast there is no space in pipelines to
bring the oil to market. Instead, it is being transported to refineries by rail
and truck. Drilling companies have had to erect camps to house
workers.
Unemployment
in North Dakota has fallen to the lowest level in the nation, 3.8 percent _ less
than half the national rate of 9 percent. The influx of mostly male workers to
the region has left local men lamenting a lack of women. Convenience stores are
struggling to keep shelves stocked with
food.
The
Bakken and the Eagle Ford are each expected to ultimately produce 4 billion
barrels of oil. That would make them the fifth- and sixth-biggest oil fields
ever discovered in the United States. The
top four are Prudhoe Bay in Alaska, Spraberry Trend in West Texas, the East
Texas Oilfield and the Kuparuk Field in Alaska.
The
fields are attracting billions of dollars of investment from foreign oil giants
like Royal Dutch Shell, BP and Norway's Statoil, and also from the smaller U.S.
drillers who developed the new techniques like Chesapeake, EOG Resources and
Occidental Petroleum.
Last
month China's state-owned oil company CNOOC agreed to pay Chesapeake $570
million for a one-third stake in a drilling project in the Niobrara. This
followed a $1 billion deal in October between the two companies on a project in
the Eagle Ford.
With
oil prices high and natural-gas prices low, profit margins from producing oil
from shale are much higher than for gas. Also, drilling for shale oil is not
dependent on high oil prices. Papa says this oil is cheaper to tap
than the oil in the deep waters of the Gulf of Mexico or in Canada's oil
sands.
The
country's shale oil resources aren't nearly as big as the country's shale gas
resources. Drillers have unlocked decades' worth of natural gas, an abundance of
supply that may keep prices low for years. U.S. shale oil on the other hand will
only supply one to two percent of world consumption by 2015, not nearly enough
to affect prices.
Still,
a surge in production last year from the Bakken helped U.S. oil production grow
for the second year in a row, after 23 years of decline. This during a year when
drilling in the Gulf of Mexico, the nation's biggest oil-producing region, was
halted after the BP oil spill.
U.S.
oil production climbed steadily through most of the last century and reached a
peak of 9.6 million barrels per day in 1970. The decline since was slowed by new
production in Alaska in the 1980s and in the Gulf of Mexico more recently. But
by 2008, production had fallen to 5 million barrels per
day.
Within
five years, analysts and executives predict, the newly unlocked fields are
expected to produce 1 million to 2 million barrels of oil per day, enough to
boost U.S. production 20 percent to 40 percent. The
U.S. Energy Information Administration estimates production will grow a more
modest 500,000 barrels per day.
By
2020, oil imports could be slashed by as much as 60 percent,
according to Credit Suisse's Morse, who is counting on Gulf oil production to
rise and on U.S. gasoline demand to fall.
At
today's oil prices of roughly $90 per barrel, slashing imports that much would
save the U.S. $175 billion a year. Last year, when oil averaged $78 per barrel,
the U.S. sent $260 billion overseas for crude, accounting for nearly half the
country's $500 billion trade deficit.
"We
have redefined how to look for oil and gas," says Rehan Rashid, an analyst at
FBR Capital Markets. "The implications are major for the
nation."
___
Associated
Press writer James MacPherson contributed reporting from Stanley,
N.D.
The
outlook for global grain supplies and food prices grew more precarious Wednesday
as the U.S. Agriculture
Department said it expects U.S. corn supplies to fall to the near-record low
level set 15 years ago.
Red-hot
prices aren't cooling the appetite for U.S. grain as in the past, which means
U.S. supplies are continuing to be drained at a rapid rate to make ethanol fuel,
fatten livestock and meet demand overseas.
"We're
just not seeing prices ration demand," said Luke Chandler, head of agricultural
commodity markets research at Rabobank. "The markets have changed in a
structural way due to ethanol. ... Any relief will take considerable
time."
View
Full Image
Bloomberg
News
According
to USDA projections released Wednesday, the 12.4 billion bushels of corn
harvested by U.S. farmers last fall will dwindle to just 675 million bushels by
Aug. 31, when a new harvest begins to replenish inventories.
That
ending stocks number, which is off 9% from the USDA's January projection, is
extraordinarily low in the eyes of food executives because it represents just 5%
of annual use, matching the stocks-to-use ratio set in 1996, which was the
lowest recorded by the USDA for America's biggest crop since the Dust Bowl era,
when the U.S. stocks-to-use ratio fell to 4.5% in 1937.
Access
thousands of business sources not available on the free web. Learn More
In
trading at the Chicago Board of Trade Wednesday, the corn futures contract for
March delivery jumped 24.25 cents a bushel, or 3.6%, to settle at $6.98 a
bushel.
While the USDA left its wheat and soybean projections largely unchanged, prices
of these commodities rose in sympathy with corn.
With
Tuesday's gains, prices of corn futures contracts have climbed 97% since June;
wheat is up 107% and soybeans are up 56%.
The
USDA increased its one-month-old projection of how much of the recent U.S. corn
harvest will end up as ethanol by 50 million bushels to 4.95 billion bushels, or
40% of the harvest.
While
high grain costs are pinching many food companies, U.S. ethanol makers are generating
profits in part because Washington is mandating that gasoline blenders use 12.6
billion gallons of biofuel this year, up from the 2010 mandate of 12 billion
gallons.
Washington's
support of the ethanol industry is intended to reduce U.S. dependence on foreign
oil. But one reason the ethanol industry's appetite for corn is continuing to
expand is that it is putting biofuel in foreign cars.
An
even steeper rise in sugarcane prices is depressing exports of sugar-derived
ethanol from Brazil, opening markets for the U.S. industry, which saw its
exports triple in 2010 to 350 million gallons, according to the Renewable Fuels
Association, a Washington trade group.
Evidence
of the ethanol industry's expanding appetite for corn increased tensions between
it and the food industry. "The fact that more U.S. corn is being exported in the
form of ethanol at a time when corn supplies are already low is simply
indefensible," said a statement issued by Tyson
Foods Inc., the Springdale, Ark., meat giant. "We've got to get our energy
and agriculture policies in sync."
The
Obama administration defended its ethanol policy Wednesday. At a public
appearance with other cabinet members, Agriculture Secretary Tom Vilsack said he
doesn't think the ethanol industry's appetite for corn is raising food
costs.
"I'm
not concerned about it," he said. "I think there is going to be enough corn for
food, for feed, for fuel and for export opportunities."
Still,
grain analysts are having a hard time comprehending how grain consumption can
continue at these high levels, and not just because of ethanol's appetite.
Analysts say the cheap
dollar is helping to insulate export demand for U.S. commodities, which is also
being helped by production problems in farm belts around the
globe.
The
USDA said Wednesday it expects U.S. wheat export volume to soar 48% this year in
the wake of the drought that decimated Russian wheat farms last summer, slashing
exports from the Black Sea region.
Likewise,
rising U.S. livestock
prices are discouraging many farmers from shrinking the size of their herds,
keeping up their demand for grain. U.S. pork exports are up in part because
South Korea's effort to eradicate an outbreak of foot-and-mouth disease on its
pig farms is forcing it to buy more foreign
pork.
A
drought in China is raising concerns about the condition of the wheat crop there
but the USDA won't try to assess the size of the potential harvest there until
its May report.
China
is the world's biggest producer and consumer of wheat but it is far from clear
how any significant drop might impact international
markets.
The Chinese government
has a policy of maintaining enormous grain stockpiles as insurance against any
bad harvests.
Indeed,
the USDA projected Wednesday that China will control 49% of the world's combined
corn reserves, and 33% of the world's total wheat reserves, this
year.
—Ryan
Tracy and Ben Lefebvre contributed to this article.
Write
to Ian
Berry at ian.berry@dowjones.com
IKENNE,
Nigeria—After driving two hours—skirting truck-size potholes, fording a flooded
town and dodging a body—Pieter Swanepoel arrives at a dilapidated farm about 50
miles from Lagos, Nigeria.
He has
reached the launching pad for Zambeef Products PLC's $10 million expansion into
Africa's most populous country. A few hundred yards from where the South African
accountant stands, neat rows of soybeans grow and a new meat-processing facility
buzzes with activity where once there was a collection of derelict buildings.
Jane
Hahn/Getty Images for the Wall Street Journal
"There
was sweet blow-all in terms of infrastructure," he says.
Under
Mr. Swanepoel's leadership over the last two years, Zambeef has built an
efficient supply chain and opened a handful of bustling retail stores in one of
Africa's toughest but most promising markets. His goal is to turn the Zambian
meat-and-produce company into Africa's Coca-Cola for meat, with Zambeef's Master
Meats brand in shops and market stalls across the continent.
With
annual revenue of $162 million, Zambeef is a bite-size example of companies
small and large expanding in Africa, transforming the world's next
billion-person market in similar ways to how earlier economic booms changed
China and India.
While
U.S. and European companies are waking up to the continent's accelerating
growth, scores of African companies like Zambeef also are expanding.
Telecommunications company MTN Group Ltd. has scooped up 116 million subscribers
in 21 African countries on the continent from its headquarters in South Africa.
Nigeria-based Dangote Cement PLC has acquired land and opened plants in Ghana,
Cameroon and Ethiopia. Togo-based Ecobank Transnational Inc. set up branches in
30 African countries, doubling its presence in five years.
While
the economies of U.S., Europe and Latin American contracted in 2009, Africa's
grew. The International Monetary Fund in October forecast that growth in the 47
countries of sub-Saharan Africa will reach 5.5% this year. That growth is
creating legions of consumers.
Around
10 million Nigerians moved into the middle-income bracket,
meaning they could buy more than just necessities, in the past five years,
according to an estimate by London-based private-equity firm Actis LLP.
Nigeria's estimated $9 billion market for red-meat products is the continent's
second biggest, after South Africa, according to a recent study sponsored by the
British government.
Zambeef
expects that as the middle class in this country of some 150 million people
grows, so, too, will the number of people shopping in Western-style stores. The
company hopes to lure customers used to buying meat in open-air markets by
offering clean, packaged products while charging only slightly more than the
markets. While a pound of beef might cost around $4.10 at a Lagos open-air
market, Zambeef might charge about $4.75.
Multinationals
also have high hopes for Nigeria. "We see Africa, with its one billion
inhabitants, as a continent of limitless possibilities," Nestlé
SA Chief Executive Paul Bulcke said last week as he opened an $80 million
factory in the same state as Zambeef's farm.
No
one, however, is discounting the perils of investing in a continent rife with
corruption, short on dependable infrastructure and heavy with unstable
governments, as Northern Africa has shown in recent weeks.
Mr.
Swanepoel's experience as Zambeef's managing director in Nigeria shows that
doing business in Africa will be just as messy as in other emerging markets. To
deal with an unreliable power supply, Zambeef runs its equipment here on its own
diesel-powered generators 24 hours a day at a cost of tens of thousands of
dollars a month. As he travels among Zambeef's 11 stores and plants, Mr.
Swanepoel (pronounced SWAH-nuh-pole) spends several hours a day stuck in Lagos
traffic jams.
"A lot
of the time you say to yourself, 'My god, how can we make this work?,' " Mr.
Swanepoel says. "But eventually you figure the puzzle out. In Nigeria, you need
logic and lots of patience. A bottle of good wine doesn't hurt,
either."
Multinational
corporations are racing to make the most of Africa's burgeoning middle class.
With reporters on the ground there, a Wall Street Journal series examines the
changes.
Zambeef's
road to Nigeria began in 2009, after Shoprite Holdings Ltd. had expanded into
the country from the supermarket chain's base in South Africa. Zambeef had been
supplying Shoprite stores in South Africa and Zambia, and the chain wanted to
use Zambeef as a supplier and to staff Shoprite butcher counters in Nigeria.
Zambeef jumped at the offer to work with an established customer.
Mr.
Swanepoel, meanwhile, was working as finance manager for Shoprite in Zambia,
where he worked with Zambeef executives.
"At
that stage, me and my wife weren't interested in working in South Africa, we
wanted a different challenge," says Mr. Swanepoel, the son of a South African
ostrich farmer. "They said, 'Are you up for Nigeria?' And I said, 'OK.'
"
Zambeef
has invested around $2 million in Nigeria and plans to invest another $8 million
over the next eight years to hire staff, open more Master Meats shops and use
the Ikenne farm as a hub to supply neighboring countries. The
company in Nigeria records about $90,000 in sales a week to restaurants, hotels,
Shoprite stores and from Zambeef's own outlets. Zambeef predicts revenue will
more than double by year-end.
"What
Zambeef has been able to do in Nigeria in a very short time frame is nothing
short of a miracle," says Gerhard Fritz, Africa operations manager for Shoprite,
which isn't related to ShopRite of the U.S.
Zambeef's
expansion hasn't been easy. Since Nigeria lacks a sufficient manufacturing base,
the company has had to import most of its equipment from Zambia or South Africa,
with shipments taking about 80 days.
Getting
a business license took Mr. Swanepoel nine months in Nigeria; when Zambeef
started operations in Ghana, a license was issued in two weeks.
And
while Nigeria's official language is English, the cattle traders Mr. Swanepoel
works with speak Arabic, so he hired a university professor of linguistics to
translate.
To
establish good will, he and other Zambeef executives attended a ceremony in
which a local governor was made a chief. "A smile and a nod go a long way," says
Mr. Swanepoel, who is fond of Montecristo minicigars. "They're not going to
trust you if you come in like a cowboy swaying into town."
To
secure its land in Ikenne, Zambeef entered a 25-year lease with Ogun state. Mr.
Swanepoel surveyed the old dairy farm and saw milk-processing equipment buried
under bushes and trees.
"The
more brush we cleared, the more buildings we discovered," he says, peering into
an abandoned room stacked floor to ceiling with never-used milk cartons bearing
the Ogun State Dairy logo.
The
farm now hums with several hundred head of cattle, pigs and chickens and
eventually will have about 1,600 head and several thousand pigs. Zambeef also
grows corn, soybeans and pineapple and employs about a dozen local residents on
the farm's payroll of 85 people, Mr. Swanepoel says.
"Zambeef
is like an answered prayer for us," says Yosola Akinbi, the economic adviser to
Ogun's governor. "By the time they came on board, the farm was virtually dead.
So it's good that this company is doing this and bringing it back to
life."
Ms.
Akinbi and other officials are trying to make it easier for Zambeef to do
business, hoping other companies will follow. The state plans to spend $26
million to construct a cargo airport by 2015 so companies can avoid Lagos's
often-chaotic international airport. The federal government recently moved
toward opening the country's fickle state-run power grid to private
investors.
After
fighting through traffic, Mr. Swanepoel ends a recent day at a Zambeef facility
in Lagos where a dozen employees chop and package beef and pork. An empty lot
beside the factory is covered in brackish sludge with a lily pad in the middle.
He
brightens. "Imagine that growing here," he says.
By
David Oakley
http://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/a04f8e08-3472-11e0-9ebc-00144feabdc0,s01=1.html#axzz1DYs16hhh
Published:
February 9 2011 17:58 | Last updated: February 9 2011
17:58
Portugal’s
cost of borrowing hit a euro-era high on Wednesday amid growing concerns that
Lisbon will have to turn to bail-out funds to revive its stagnating
economy.
Hedge
funds were selling Portuguese debt after purchasing bonds at a syndication of
five-year bonds just 24 hours earlier, brokers said.
Investor
worries are also rising that policymakers will fail to introduce the necessary
reforms to beef up the eurozone bail-out
fund.
Portuguese
10-year bond yields jumped to 7.35 per cent – the
highest since the launch of the euro in January 1999 and a level regarded as
unsustainable for Lisbon’s struggling economy.
Richard
McGuire, rates strategist at Rabobank, said: “Once again we’re back into this
lull where they [EU policymakers] have promised something and they haven’t given
details. I think the market will become increasingly concerned about this,
exactly as they did about packages for Greece and
Ireland.”
A
leading investor said: “Portuguese debt costs are in danger of rising further
and further as there are no buyers of the country’s debt.”
Some
European policymakers would like to see Portugal opt for bail-out loans, which
offer rates of about 6 per cent and are considered the best way to deal with the
country’s banking and economic problems. There are also hopes among some
strategists that the rates offered on bail-out loans will be reduced to
encourage Lisbon to accept financial help.
The
country’s problems are highlighted by fund managers, such as Pimco, which are no
longer prepared to buy the country’s bonds because of fears over high debt
levels.
Pimco
is switching out of eurozone debt and into emerging market bonds because of the
higher yields and higher potential returns offered in these markets.
Lisbon
needs to repay €9.5bn ($13bn) in maturing bonds by the end of June, which many
strategists say the country will struggle to raise.
Significantly,
the European Central
Bank has been the only major
buyer of Portuguese debt in recent
months. However, the latest ECB figures show that the bank has
not bought any government bonds in the past two weeks, which explains the drift
higher in Portuguese yields.
Strategists
say a summit of European leaders in March will determine whether Lisbon will
have to follow Greece and Ireland in seeking emergency support. One fund manager
said: “We are at a key moment in the eurozone crisis and Portugal is on the
frontline. We will know soon whether Lisbon will have to accept a bail-out or
not. That is the next test for the eurozone.”
Copyright The
Financial Times Limited 2011. You may share using our article tools. Please
don't cut articles from FT.com and redistribute by email or post to the
web.
One of Asia's most inflation-plagued economies,
Vietnam, devalued its currency 8.5% Friday to help arrest mounting economic
problems.
View Full Image
Reuters
But analysts say Hanoi's Communist policy
makers instead risk triggering a new and potentially uncontrollable round of
price rises.
Inflation is ringing alarm bells across
numerous emerging economies amid rising food and fuel costs, and Vietnam is one
of the main trouble spots. Years of loose interest rate policies and
state-subsidized lending have ramped up its economic growth to China-like levels
in a relatively underdeveloped country that analysts say is ill-equipped to
handle it.
That is driving up prices for many basic
commodities and sparking a series of currency devaluations that have erased
one-fifth of the value of Vietnam's dong since mid-2008. Consumer prices jumped
more than 12% in January compared with a year earlier and could rise further
this month once the full impact of the Lunar New Year and Friday's devaluation
is felt.
But Vietnam's economic planners have shown
little inclination to get tough on inflation, despite anti-inflationary talk at
the ruling Communist Party's twice-a-decade Congress last month. Devaluing the
currency to pump up exports risks exacerbating the
problem.
Rather than risk choking off the supply of new
jobs for a young and growing work force by raising interest rates, Vietnam is
instead continuing to focus on growth—it's aiming at 7.5% gross domestic product
growth—while treating inflation as a secondary issue, economists say. This year,
and for the next five years, the Communist Party's policy-making Central
Committee is targeting inflation at 7% annually—the same as 2010, when inflation
actually surpassed 11%.
Still, Vietnam risks making a bad inflation
problem worse. Without higher interest rates or other measures to help contain
price rises, economists fear that inflation will accelerate further after
Friday's move because it leads to higher costs for key imported goods,
especially refined oil products.
Friday's move "will adversely impact
inflation," says Prakriti Sofat, a regional economist with Barclays Capital in
Singapore. She estimates that one percentage point decline of the Vietnamese
dong versus the dollar adds about 0.15 percentage points to
inflation.
This suggests Friday's devaluation could add
1.28 percentage points to the current rate, although Ms. Sofat notes that some
of the impact has already leaked into the consumer price index because of the
widespread use black-market foreign exchange rates, where the dong has long
traded at lower levels. Barclays now expects inflation to hit 13.5% by March and
exceed 15% by June.
Vietnam is almost entirely out of step with the
rest of Asia, where concern about rising fuel and energy prices is nudging many
central banks to push up rates after a rapid recovery from the global economic
slump. China increased interest rates for the third time in four months Tuesday.
Thailand's finance minister, Korn Chatikavanij, said in a recent interview that
rapid prices were one of his main concerns, following a series of rate
increases.
Many countries also have allowed their
currencies to gradually appreciate to help absorb the impact of inflation—a move
that makes it cheaper to import items such as food and fuel. Malaysia's ringgit
is trading at around 13-year highs against the U.S. dollar and the Thai,
Philippine and Singapore currencies have all seen sharp rises over the past two
years.
Vietnam, on the other hand, is regarded by some
policy makers in the region as a cautionary tale of what can happen if monetary
brakes aren't applied quickly enough.
"The underlying economic concerns are yet to be
addressed, meaning that depreciation pressures may persist," says Sherman Chan,
an economist with HSBC in Hong Kong. Those problems include a large trade
deficit and inefficient state enterprises that dominate much of the economy.
With inflation rising sharply in recent months,
ordinary Vietnamese have switched investments from dong to U.S. dollars or gold,
the price for which is around 5% higher in Vietnam than on the international
market because of the perceived stability of the precious metal. This has helped
add to the downward pressure on the dong, to the extent that some companies,
including Ford Motor Co., have said they have sometimes struggled to secure
enough foreign currency to pay for imports.
Friday's devaluation, which pushed down the
official rate for the dong to 20,693 dong to the U.S. dollar from 18,932 dong,
was aimed at narrowing the gap between the official rate and the black market
rate for the dollar, which was at about 21,320 dong prior to the devaluation. In
theory this should make it easier for firms to get hold of foreign
currencies.
The country's central bank, the State Bank of
Vietnam, said in a statement that the move would help boost exports and rein in
Vietnam's trade deficit, which has also weighed on the currency. Weaker
currencies make a nation's exports more competitive
abroad.
The move is also likely aimed at Vietnam's
dwindling currency reserves. State media have reported that Vietnam's
international reserves had fallen to "more than $10 billion" by the end of 2010
compared with $16 billion at the end of 2009 and $26 billion in
2008.
The cost of insuring against another default or
restructuring of Vietnam's debts jumped higher after Friday's devaluation. The
spread on Vietnam's five-year credit default swaps widened 20 basis points from
385 to 395 basis points on Thursday.
Economists say Vietnam needs to act more
aggressively to address the critical flaws in its economy—especially in its
inefficient but politically sensitive state enterprises—if it's to escape a
deeper crisis. Many commentators blame much of the current inflationary pressure
on billions of dollars in cheap loans handed out to state-owned enterprises,
which then used some of the funds to launch failed projects or speculate in real
estate or the country's financial markets. Others branched out into industries
they didn't fully understand or were caught short by the extent of the 2008's
global economic slump.
State-run shipbuilder Vinashin, formally known
as Vietnam Shipbuilding Industry Group, came to the brink of bankruptcy last
summer after amassing $4.4 billion in debts and prompting Moody's Investors
Service and Standard & Poor's to downgrade Vietnam's sovereign debt. In
December, the situation worsened when Vinashin defaulted on a $60 million loan
repayment on a $600 million syndicated loan.
"In my view, (Vietnam's policies) would be more
effective if they implement some kind of state-owned sector reform," said Ms.
Chan at HSBC.
The old bromide that citizens elect presidents
for protection from other people's congressmen was reversed last November when a
Congress was elected for protection from the president. This week House
Republicans have been debating how to cut the ballooning budget. After ramming
through an expansion of federal spending to levels not approached since World
War II, President Obama is now calling for still more spending, with a renewed
emphasis on infrastructure, that he claims will create jobs and economic
growth.
Let's put this in perspective: With the
Congressional Budget Office (CBO) now projecting a federal budget deficit this
year of $1.5 trillion, Mr. Obama is on course to add as much debt in one term as
all 43 previous presidents combined. Not surprisingly, the rating agency
Standard & Poor's is warning of a Treasury downgrade.
Yes, the president
is calling for a freeze on nondefense discretionary spending (18% of the
budget). But this would leave that spending more than 20% higher than already-
elevated 2008 levels, where Republicans would like to return. The freeze also
cements in place a huge expansion of government originally sold as a temporary,
emergency response to the economic and financial crisis.
Mr. Obama's Budget Director Jacob Lew asserts
that the president has made tough choices, pointing to $775 million of proposed
cuts—but that's one-tenth of 1% of nondefense discretionary spending. The Obama
administration and its supporters dubiously claim higher spending will quickly
strengthen the recovery and generate jobs, and that any "draconian" cuts would
derail the recovery. Higher spending, deficits and debt are future problems,
they argue, and even then higher taxes (especially on "the rich") won't harm the
economy.
But government spending generally does little
to boost the economy. Exhibit A is the failed 2009 stimulus bill, the
president's American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA).
The strongest case for stimulus is increased
military spending during recessions. But infrastructure spending, as the
president proposes, is poorly designed for anti-recession job creation. As
Harvard economist Edward Glaeser has shown, the ARRA's transportation spending
was not directed to areas with the highest unemployment or the largest housing
busts (and therefore the most unemployed construction workers). Indeed, last
September Wendy Greuel, the City of Los Angeles controller, shocked the country
when she revealed that the $111 million in ARRA infrastructure money her city
received created only 55 jobs—that's a whopping $2 million of federal stimulus
per job created.
Why is this so?
Modern, large-scale public infrastructure projects use heavy equipment and are
less labor-intensive than they were historically (WPA workers digging ditches
with shovels in the 1930s). Federal transportation stimulus spending was $4
billion in 2009, leaving two problems with claims of "shovel-ready" projects:
shovels and ready.
View Full Image
Chad Crowe
The nation
certainly has public investment needs, but federal infrastructure spending
should be based on rigorous national cost-benefit tests. Most local officials
are happy to have the rest of the country pay for spending on virtually any
project, however modest the local benefits. Even so, several states have
rejected high-speed rail subsidies as requiring unwise state spending despite
the subsidies. California's estimates, for example, have
soared.
Moreover, how will we pay for all this new
spending? The CBO's 10-year projection sees the possibility of the debt-to-GDP
ratio rising to an astounding 100%. Several recent studies (detailed on these
pages in my "Why the Spending Stimulus Failed," Dec. 1, 2010) conclude that: 1)
such high debt would severely damage growth, so fiscal consolidation is
essential; 2) fiscal consolidation is likely to be far more effective on the
spending than the tax side of the budget; and 3) substantially higher tax rates
and spending cause permanent drops in income that are many times larger than the
temporary fall caused by the recession. Thus, spending control is vital before
debt levels or tax increases risk severely damaging growth for a
generation.
In the 1980s and '90s, federal spending was
reduced by more than 5% of GDP to 18.4% in 2000—a level sufficient to balance
the budget at full employment and allow for lower tax rates. It was a remarkable
period of growth, and there's no reason we can't repeat that success. In
addition to rolling back ObamaCare and rolling up remaining TARP and stimulus
funds, spending control should include these major
reforms:
• Consolidate, eliminate, defederalize
and, where feasible, voucherize with flexible block grants. I
pointed out in 2007 that 42% of federal civilian workers were due to retire in
the coming decade. Replacing half of them (with exceptions for national security
and public safety) with technology could improve services and save hundreds of
billions of dollars. Beyond the savings, it would make necessary services more
efficient. For example, the federal government's many separate job-training
programs should be consolidated and voucherized to enable citizens to obtain
commercially useful training.
• A dopt successful business practices
where possible. For example, consolidating IT
infrastructure, streamlining supply chains, using advanced business analytics to
reduce improper payments, and switching from expensive custom code to
standardized software applications could save more than $1 trillion over a
decade while upgrading and improving federal support and information
services.
• Gradually move from wage to price indexing of
initial Social Security benefits. This would eliminate the entire projected Social
Security deficit without cutting anyone's benefits or raising anyone's taxes.
Also, raise the retirement age over several decades, preserve early retirement
and disability, and strengthen support for the poorest. On Medicare, former
Clinton Budget Director Alice Rivlin and House Budget Committee Chairman Paul
Ryan propose gradually moving to fixed government contributions to purchase
insurance, for large savings and more informed care.
The immense growth of government spending and
soaring public deficits and debt are the major sources of systemic economic
risk, here and abroad, threatening enormous costs by higher taxes, inflation or
default. The problem is not merely public debt. A much higher ratio of taxes to
GDP trades a deficit problem for sluggish growth. In recent decades, the large
advanced economies with the highest taxes have grown most slowly. And the
high-tax economies did not have smaller budget deficits. Rather, higher taxes
merely led to higher spending.
Elected officials
too often ignore long-run costs to achieve short-run benefits. But government
policies can neither revoke the laws of arithmetic nor circumvent the laws of
economics. The time to start reducing spending is now.
Mr. Boskin is a professor of economics at
Stanford University and a senior fellow at the Hoover Institution. He chaired
the Council of Economic Advisers under President George H.W. Bush.
The likely sale of New York Stock Exchange
parent NYSE Euronext to Deutsche Börse of Frankfurt, Germany, is playing as a
blow to America's capitalist pride, and understandably so. It's painful at first
blush to imagine ownership of the famous symbol of American financial markets
transferred out of New York City. Yet
the merger is itself a story of inevitable capitalist change and how no country
or institution can take its dominance for granted.
The
merger would continue the long-term consolidation of global financial trading,
as new technology has upset old business models and leapt over geographic
boundaries. The Big Board long ago lost its monopoly on
trading listed stocks to Nasdaq and electronic exchanges. The result has been
lower prices for customers wanting to buy and sell stocks, though perhaps at the
cost of some stability in the markets, as orders are routed across dozens of
trading platforms with varying rules.
Then last decade, the NYSE became a stock
company to raise capital to expand, reaching abroad to buy Euronext in Paris and
grab a share of the exploding derivatives market. NYSE Euronext has evolved to
the point where it now collects only 3% of its earnings from U.S. stock trading.
View Full Image
Getty Images
A Deutsche/NYSE combination would create a more
formidable competitor for other leading exchanges, such as Chicago's CME
Group. The German exchange operator is a leader in
European interest-rate futures, and combined with NYSE's European assets it
would match the CME Group's futures dominance in the U.S. Deutsche Börse is also
a major player in options trading and with the acquisition will lead in U.S.
market share. NYSE Euronext has developed valuable technology and has a
well-regarded management team.
The combination
could offer efficiencies of scale and technology that neither firm can achieve
on its own. NYSE Euronext's
competitive weakness has been evident in its share price, which is down 60%
in the last four years. If the merger succeeds competitively, we doubt its
shareholders will care if the headquarters is in Frankfurt or New York.
The merger is
nonetheless one more lesson in how easily capital, both financial and human, can
relocate. It's no coincidence that the heavily regulated equity business has
languished or moved out of the U.S., while lightly regulated derivatives markets
have boomed in the United States and elsewhere.
In the early 1990s, American exchanges played
host to half of the world's new public companies. Last year, according to Dealogic, U.S.
exchanges hosted 171 initial public offerings worth a total of $45 billion. But
this U.S. deal-making was dwarfed by the action overseas, where 1,295 companies
went public with a total value of $237 billion. The iconic NYSE now lags behind
two Asian exchanges in IPO volume. This is partly the result of more rapid
growth in developing economies, but it used to be that foreign companies wanted
to float their shares in the U.S. Now they're as happy in Hong
Kong.
U.S.
over-regulation is certainly to blame here, especially the 2002 Sarbanes-Oxley
law and its multimillion-dollar compliance burden on public companies. The
Securities and Exchange Commission's own exhaustive 2009 survey of U.S. and
foreign firms showed that the burden of complying with Sarbox remains a major
deterrent to going public in the United States. Yet the agency still hasn't made
a serious effort to pare these burdens.
If the merger proceeds, the temptation in
Washington will be to fret about foreign ownership of U.S. financial assets. But
far more constructive would be some reflection about Washington's contribution
to sending these assets and trading offshore. The Dodd-Frank law requires
mountains of new rules that will further burden U.S. financial players, not
least in the new derivatives regime emerging from the Commodity Futures Trading
Commission. We would not be surprised if the NYSE Euronext managers view the
Deutsche Börse merger as a potential refuge for its derivatives business if CFTC
Chairman Gary Gensler realizes all of his regulatory ambitions.
For
most of the last century, America could count on the size of its economy and
quality of its technology to give it a competitive edge. No more. If we want the
U.S. to be home to the next great financial institution, or even to keep the
ones we have, our politicians need to make America a more inviting place to
trade and do business.
SJ FEBRUARY 11, 2011
Boosting exports is great. But it still isn't
enough to fix the nation's trade deficit.
December trade figures due from the Commerce
Department on Friday are likely to show U.S. exports within spitting distance of
an all-time high.
As of
November, the value of goods and services sold to other countries stood at
roughly $160 billion, less than 4% below the previous July 2008
high.
That is good news, as exports are one of the
cheapest, easiest and most politically palatable ways for a nation to boost
growth. They also help generate jobs at a time when the U.S. economy needs
it.
View Full Image
Bloomberg News
They are vital enough that countries like China
keep their currencies artificially low and exports cheap even as it stirs
domestic inflation.
And
while U.S. politicians stick to the mantra of a strong dollar policy, it is a
weaker one that will help the Obama administration in its goal to double exports
in five years.
Still, any export rebound isn't matching the
surge in imports. Since May 2009, these have jumped 31%, while exports have
risen about 27%. As a result, the
trade deficit, that familiar scourge, is widening
again.
It
is expected to hit about $40 billion in December, from a low of about $25
billion in May 2009.
The
gap largely reflects the twin Achilles' heels of the U.S. economy: imported oil
and imported Chinese goods.
Excluding those components, the U.S. actually would have managed a brief trade
surplus at one point last year, notes Capital Economics. Alas, there is little
hope of breaking free from their grasp anytime soon.
In fact, the better U.S. economic growth, the
stronger demand for fuel and consumer products is likely to
be.
That complicates things. Barclays Capital chief U.S. economist
Dean Maki expects the trade gap will shave about a percentage point off
gross-domestic-product growth this year, leaving it at about
3.1%.
"We tried a narrowing trade deficit for a while
and we didn't really like it," he notes, referring to the global recession. "We
seem to prefer stronger growth" even if it widens the trade
gap.
And if oil prices really soar, leading to, say,
$4-a-gallon gasoline, that would sap consumer purchasing power and further
undercut growth.
The trade deficit is a slumbering dragon that
easily could be awakened.
Write to Kelly Evans at kelly.evans@wsj.com
SINGAPORE—China's central bank fixed the yuan's
exchange rate at a record against the dollar Wednesday, setting the tone for a
broad rise in Asian currencies as authorities aim to quell rising inflation
pressures.
Central banks in South Korea and Malaysia were
again selling their currencies for dollars to keep them from rising too quickly,
traders said, showing authorities are taking care not to damage their export
industries crucial to the region's economic growth.
Hours after raising interest rates to cool the
economy, the People's Bank of China set its parity rate for the dollar at 6.5850
yuan, down from the Feb. 1 close of 6.5938 yuan in the over-the-counter market
and that day's fixing rate of 6.5860 yuan. China's markets reopened Wednesday
after being closed since last week for Lunar New Year holidays, and the currency
ended over-the-counter trading unchanged from the Feb. 1 level.
View Full Image
Agence France-Presse/Getty Images
China's currency is now up 3.7% since the PBOC
ended the yuan's two-year peg to the dollar in mid-June. Trading in yuan
derivatives offshore show investors now expect the dollar to fall to
6.4270/6.430 yuan in the coming year, compared with the 6.4493/6.4728 yuan
implied by one-year nondeliverable forwards before the Lunar New Year holidays.
Other Asian currencies, which have marked
modest gains so far this year, continued to rise Wednesday. With China playing
such a large role in the region's economy, other Asian nations watch Beijing's
foreign-exchange policy closely, seeking to ensure that their own currencies
don't rise so much that their exporters become uncompetitive.
The U.S. currency hit a 13-year low against the
Taiwan dollar, and slipped against the Thai baht. It was firmed against the
Korean won, and the Bank of Korea was suspected of buying dollars, Seoul traders
said. The dollar edged higher against the Malaysian ringitt, and two local
dealers said Bank Negara Malaysia defended the dollar at Tuesday's closing level
of 3.0330 ringgit.
"China's rate hike should be good for Asian
currencies, but the Malaysian ringgit isn't rising because Bank Negara is at the
3.0330 level," said one dealer.
Interest-rate increases put upward pressure on
a nation's currency because higher rates draw foreign funds seeking higher
yields.
The PBOC raised one-year lending and deposit
rates by 0.25 percentage point each late Tuesday, to 6.06% and 3.0%
respectively, the third increase since October, underscoring policy makers'
discomfort with percolating price pressures across the economy. Since the start
of 2010, the PBOC has also raised the ratio of deposits that banks must hold in
reserve seven times.
Inflation has been picking up in the region,
fueled by fast economic growth and soaring prices of food and commodities. In
China, consumer prices are expected to keep rising in the first quarter on
strong holiday demand and bad weather. The consumer price index rose 4.6% from a
year earlier in December, less than November's 5.1% rise, but the central bank
appears to be uncomfortable with price pressures and some analysts expect
inflation could rise by as much as 6% in the first half of the year.
The PBOC was the latest central bank in Asia to
tighten monetary policy in recent months. Authorities are gradually moving to
remove monetary stimulus that helped spur economic recoveries from the global
financial crisis but is now adding to inflationary pressures.
Central banks such as Bank Indonesia have
signaled that stronger currencies will be a tool in the inflation fight, and
investors appear to be buying into that notion.
The PBOC sets a daily central parity rate for
the yuan, allowing the tightly managed local currency to move up to 0.5% either
way. Yuan/ringgit and yuan/ruble can as much as 5%, while other currencies are
allowed to move as much as 3%.
—Jean Jung in Shanghai, Aaron Back in Beijing, Min-Jeong
Lee in Seoul, Lorraine Luk in Taipei, and Elffie Chew in Kuala Lumpur
contributed to this article.
Write to Arran Scott at arran.scott@dowjones.com
Rising
China Bests a Shrinking Japan
By
CHESTER
DAWSON in Tokyo and JASON
DEAN in Beijing
China
passed Japan in 2010 to become the world's second-largest economy after the
U.S., a historic shift that has drawn mixed emotions in the two Asian powers:
resignation tinged with soul-searching in long-stagnant Japan, pride but also
caution in an ascendant China wary of shouldering new global
responsibilities.
WSJ
Assistant Managing Editor John Bussey is joined by Beijing Bureau Chief Andrew
Browne and Tokyo Bureau Chief Jacob Schlesinger to discuss China overtaking
Japan as the world's #2 economy.
The
Japanese government made official the long-expected flip Monday morning in
Tokyo, reporting that the economy shrank at a 1.1% annual rate for the last
three months of the year, a period when China's gross domestic product surged
9.8% from a year earlier. With those
figures, Japan's full-year GDP was $5.47 trillion—about 7% smaller than the
$5.88 trillion China reported in January.
Both
still remain considerably smaller than the American economy. Japan and China
combined are still worth less than the U.S.'s 2010 GDP of $14.66
trillion.
But the news marks the end of era. For nearly two generations, since overtaking
West Germany in 1967, Japan stood solidly as the world's No. 2 economy. The new
rankings symbolize China's rise and Japan's decline as global growth
engines.
For
the U.S., while Japan was in some ways an economic rival, it also has been a
geopolitical and military ally. China, however, is a potential challenger on all
fronts.
China's
ascent has been the main source of popular legitimacy for the ruling Communist
Party. But Beijing worries that the mantle of economic titan comes with unwanted
obligations for a country still in many ways poor. "China Surpassing Japan to
Become World's Second Biggest Economy—But Not the Second Strongest," said the
headline on a recent article on the website of the People's Daily, the party's
flagship newspaper.
The
Long Rivalry
China
passed Japan in 2010 to become the world's second-largest economy after the U.S.
Compare the two economies over the past 50 years.
In
Japan, the moment is seen as another marker of an extended weakening. "It's only
natural that Japan would be overtaken considering China's ballooning GDP and
larger population," Tokyo Gov. Shintaro Ishihara told reporters recently. The
outspoken nationalist was once the proud voice of a cocky nation, co-authoring
the bubble-era 1989 book, "The Japan That Can Say 'No.'" Now, he talks about his
country's standing with a tinge of sadness. "It's just unfortunate that various
other signs of Japan's decline stand out so much against that
backdrop."
The
complex reactions in both countries reflect the fact that China still lags
behind Japan in many respects—and the reality that their growing interdependence
makes them partners as much as rivals.
A
Historical Shift
Take
a look at major events in Japan and China over the past
decades.
Reuters
China's
per capita income is still only a tenth of Japan's. The World Bank estimates
that more than 100 million Chinese citizens—nearly the size of Japan's entire
population—live on less than $2 a day. Robin
Li, chief executive of Chinese Internet search giant Baidu
Inc. notes: "There's still the undeniably awkward fact that China still has yet
to produce an enterprise with truly global influence commensurate with China's
rising power," such as Toyota
Motor Corp. or Sony
Corp.
As
many Japanese business leaders note, Japan's economy would have been even weaker
without exports to China and an influx of Chinese tourists. China surpassed the U.S. as Japan's
largest trading partner in 2009. "I expect China's GDP to be double
Japan's" in about eight years, said 53-year-old Masayoshi Son,
spokesman for a new generation of Japanese leaders as CEO of Softbank
Corp., which has managed to grow amid the country's decline. China's rise also
presents an opportunity: "If more Japanese companies also viewed this situation
as something positive, Japan's economic prospects would also brighten up."
Japan's
economy minister Kaoru Yosano on Monday welcomed the Chinese ascendancy to No.
2. "For a neighbor country like us, it is something to celebrate that the
Chinese economy is making a leap forward," the minister said. He called China's
expansion "one of the cornerstones for simultaneous growth in the
region."
Still,
there are clear strains, with historical tension lingering from Japan's brutal
wartime occupation, and China flexing newfound muscle against a weakened
neighbor. The recent defining moment: last fall's standoff over disputed islands
near Taiwan, ending in Japan's sudden release of an arrested Chinese fishing
captain under pressure from Beijing, despite video evidence that the captain had
violently charged a Japanese coast guard vessel.
The
contrasting outlooks of an ascendant China and a declining Japan was evident in
Nielsen Co.'s latest international consumer confidence survey of 52 countries
released last month. Chinese consumers were among the most optimistic, with a
"confidence index" of 100, compared with the global average of 90. Japan's
consumers tied with Romania's for fourth most pessimistic, with an index of 54.
(Americans stood between the two, with an index of 81.)
For
Beijing, being No. 2 means, among other things, new clout. China has trumpeted
its willingness to use its $2.85 trillion hoard of foreign-exchange reserves to
help stabilize struggling countries such as Greece by purchasing their bonds.
Officials have chastised Washington for monetary policies they say could
endanger the value of China's massive holdings of U.S. government
debt.
But
Beijing also suspects that developed countries want to use its rise to foist on
it greater responsibilities in areas like carbon-emissions reduction and
currency policy. When China's GDP passed Japan's on a quarterly basis last
summer, official media outlets ran commentaries rebutting what they called
"China responsibility theories" in the West exaggerating the country's global
role. The theories, one Chinese expert told the Xinhua news agency, "are
fabricated to slow down and check China's development."
More
At
home, the rise to No. 2 complicates the Communist Party's national narrative,
steeped in a sense of victimhood at the hands of foreign powers—not least 1930s
Japan—that China is now overtaking. Party leaders are aware that China's image
as an economic powerhouse risks calling attention to the shortcomings of a
country both powerful and poor.
So
the government takes credit for China's economic accomplishment while playing it
down. When the National Bureau of Statistics reported China's 2010 GDP last
month, director Ma Jiantang was asked about the looming No. 2 milestone. The
rise "is the result of hard struggle and continuous progress of the Chinese
people under the leadership of the Communist Party," he said—adding that China
remains one of the world's poorer countries on a per capita
basis.
The
official ambivalence is mirrored in China's public reaction. "There might be
people feeling thrilled about this, but I'm not one of them," said Zheng Maohua,
a 65-year-old retired government official in Beijing. The GDP landmark "can't
reflect the true situation of this society," which he described as "rich
country, poor people."
In
the 1980s and 1990s, Japan faced the same pressures China now fears, of global
demands to shoulder extra responsibilities. China's official rise to Asia's top
economy takes the spotlight off Tokyo. While still the oldest liberal democracy
in East Asia and a cornerstone of the U.S. defense umbrella, Japan no longer
faces the same pressure from Western peers to exercise "checkbook diplomacy" or
open its markets—even though Japan's trade surpluses with the U.S. remain high.
Some
Japanese elites are wistful for those demands. "Some of us look back to the era
of Japan-bashing with nostalgia," says Takatoshi Ito, an economics professor at
Tokyo University and a former top finance ministry official. "We were frustrated
back then, but ignored is worse than being bashed."
View
Full Image
For
others, the debate is on to define Japan's role and image for the era of No. 3.
One influential Japanese ruling-party politician, Renho, who uses only one name,
touched a nerve last year with her book titled "Do We Have to Be No. 1?" It
encouraged Japanese to take comfort in the notion that Japan need not be a
leader in everything—or anything—to be considered
successful.
Japan
now is more focused on different, less-quantitative, ways of defining success.
Its influence abroad remains extensive, and in some ways has grown. But it is
more low-key, less directed in contentious areas of strategic technology and
more in the realm of cultural diplomacy.
The
notion of Japan as a center of creativity and innovation—in
hybrid-engine-powered cars or 3-D videogames—contrasts with its image 20 years
ago as a copycat that mimicked design and technology pioneered elsewhere, and
then outpowered the original makers with superior manufacturing. That label is
now attached more to China.
The
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry—once famous for crafting an industrial
policy that helped Japan's manufacturers rule the world— has a new Creative
Industries Promotion office designed to spread the appeal of anime cartoons,
manga comics and Japanese videogames. "We see it as a matter of quality over
quantity," said Motohisa Ikeda, a vice minister for trade, noting Japan's
enduring prowess as a maker of high-value-added goods. "Japan is still a wealthy
nation in many senses of the word."
—
Loretta Chao in Beijing
and Juro Osawa in Tokyo contributed to this
article.
Massive
Population Lifts Nation's Growth
By
BOB
DAVIS
BEIJING—China's rise as the world's second-largest
economy highlights a new postindustrial reality: Population counts as much as
productivity in determining economic power.
Since
the industrial revolution, that hasn't been the case. The productivity of
workers in the U.S., Britain, Germany and Japan not only made those countries
rich, but it also made them the world's largest economies despite having far
smaller populations than China and India.
China's
rapid growth over the past 30 years has pulled hundreds of millions of Chinese
out of poverty and turned China into the world's factory floor. But China's
per capita gross domestic product is still just $4,300, according to the
International Monetary Fund. It is largely because of the country's population
of 1.3 billion that China is moving to the top ranks of economic powers.
The
Long Rivalry
China
passed Japan in 2010 to become the world's second-largest economy after the U.S.
Compare the two economies over the past 50 years.
On
Monday, it formally surpassed Japan when Japan reported its 2010
GDP.
Look
at the arithmetic. China has 11 times Japan's population. That is enough to
propel it ahead of Japan in the GDP rankings, despite a per capita income
of little more than one-tenth the level of Japan.
China
passed Japan in 2010 to become Asia's biggest economy, and the world's
second-largest. WSJ's Jake Lee talks to Economics Reporter Alex Frangos about
the two country's and what this historic shift means for
Asia.
For
China to leap ahead of the U.S., which has one-fourth China's population, China
needs to boost its per capita GDP to slightly more than one-fourth U.S.
levels. Currently, China's per capita
income is one-eleventh the level of the U.S.
"For
the first time, you have this odd combination—one of the world's largest
economies is also one of the world's poorest economies," said Qu Hongbin, an
HSBC analyst in Hong Kong.
Whether
China eventually passes the U.S. depends on how long China can continue growing
much more rapidly than the U.S. Arvind Subramanian, an economist at the Peterson
Institute for International Economics, a Washington think tank, figures this
will occur around 2030, though others are cautious. Harvard economist Kenneth
Rogoff said it is tough to predict because many poor countries trip up along the
way, often because of banking crises.
More
Coverage
In
the 1980s, economists predicted Japan would overtake the U.S., but as its
economy has stagnated it has fallen further behind the U.S. since
1990.
It
is extraordinarily difficult for poor countries to climb into the top ranks of
world economic powers. The IMF
classifies 33 economies as "advanced." Of those, only four non-European
economies—Singapore, South Korea, Taiwan and Hong Kong—were poor before World
War I. Another, Israel, didn't exist in 1914. One country that would
have been considered advanced back then, Argentina, no longer makes the grade
because of decades of economic and political
mismanagement.
The
IMF classifies seven nations as "major" advanced economic powers—the U.S.,
Canada, Britain, Germany, France, Italy and Japan—meaning they are rich in
per-capita terms and are important economic powers.
All would have been on a similar list before the assassination of Archduke
Ferdinand.
WSJ
Assistant Managing Editor John Bussey is joined by Beijing Bureau Chief Andrew
Browne and Tokyo Bureau Chief Jacob Schlesinger to discuss China overtaking
Japan as the world's #2 economy.
China
is classified as an "emerging and developing" nation—again reflecting its
duality as a poor nation when measured in terms of individuals, and a rich one
when all those individuals are added together.
The
industrial revolution pushed European nations and, somewhat later, Japan to the
top of the economic heap. They added to their wealth by colonizing China, India
and other nations in Asia and Africa for their resources, labor and markets. "If
you were the biggest, strongest economy and you weren't the richest, you'd
rectify that by conquering the others and taking their wealth," said Mr. Rogoff.
Toward
the end of the 19th century, Britain and Germany were the world's largest
economies. But by 1900, the U.S. had become No. 1, said
H.W. Brands, a U.S. historian and professor at the University of Texas at
Austin, as the country's greater population, natural resources and industrial
productivity propelled it ahead of individual European nations. "There was a
vogue for thinking in terms of a westering trend in economic history and how the
center of gravity of the world economy was moving across the Atlantic from
Europe to America," he said.
A
Historical Shift
Take
a look at major events in Japan and China over the past
decades.
Reuters
Now,
the fast-growing Asian nations are pushing that center of gravity to the
east.
China's rise to No. 2 matters a lot, even if many of its people remain poor.
That is because it has become one of the world's largest traders, creditors and
markets for commodities. Its buying and lending decisions shape markets
globally. "GDP and size matters in crude superpower terms," said Mr.
Subramanian. "It shows what resources you can bring to the
table."
The
economic power rankings are determined by converting a country's GDP into
dollars at market exchange rates. That is seen as the best indicator, because it
suggests what a country or its companies could buy in the international market,
whether it is steel or stealth aircraft parts.
There
is another GDP measure, called purchasing power parity, or PPP. In that
calculation, adjustments are made to reflect the difference in prices for goods
and services in different countries. A haircut may cost $1 in Beijing and $10 in
Boston, though the differences between the two countries may be much less if you
compare the cost of a haircut to a worker's paycheck. Essentially, PPP numbers
try to reflect the differences in costs of living and tend to boost the economic
rankings of poorer nations. By that measure, China passed Japan as No. 2 in
2001, according to International Monetary Fund statistics. Mr. Subramanian
calculates that China's GDP as measured by purchasing power has already edged
ahead of the U.S.'s, though the IMF doesn't expect that to happen before
2016.
View
Full Image
Reuters
College
graduates wait to enter a job fair in Yantai, in Shandong province, as police
watch over the crowd.
To
William Easterly, a New York University development economist, all the
rankings are "a little bit absurd," because they simply reflect the different
sizes of the population. "If you have a larger economy because you have a
larger population," he said, "you could say, 'Why did it take you so long' " to
catch up? By comparison, India, with a population almost as large as China's,
has only started gaining on rich countries since the early 1990s, as a result of
economic reforms there.
But
Arthur Kroeber, managing director of GaveKal Dragonomics Research in Beijing,
said the No. 2 ranking may have an important psychological effect in China,
where many continue to view the country as poor and believe it bears little
responsibility for international affairs. In trade negotiations and
international financial summitry, for instance, China often plays a peripheral
role. The U.S. and Western Europe generally continue to set the global agenda.
"When you're the No. 2 country in the world, you can't make the argument any
longer" that China can be a follower, Mr. Kroeber said."From an economic
diplomacy standpoint, there's no place to hide."
More
and more, China is asserting its economic power, he noted, by agreeing to
finance infrastructure and other projects in Africa, Latin America and Central
Asia in exchange for a secure stream of oil, food and
coal.
Although
the U.S. views some of these deals with alarm because it worries that China may
lock up natural resources that should be freely traded, it has also been working
hard to get the IMF and World Bank to change their voting schemes to give China
a larger voice. As the No. 2 economic power, U.S. officials say, China should
play a big role in any revamping of the global economic system, so it feels it
has a stake in the outcome.
Write
to Bob
Davis at bob.davis@wsj.com
Is the United States in decline? Many Americans
think so, and they are not alone. A recent Pew poll showed that pluralities in
13 of 25 countries believe that China will replace the U.S. as the world's
leading superpower. But describing the future of power as inevitable American
decline is both misleading and dangerous if it encourages China to engage in
adventurous policies or the U.S. to overreact out of fear.
How would we know if the declinists are correct
or not? First, one must beware of misleading metaphors of organic decline.
Nations are not like humans with predictable life spans.
After Britain lost its American colonies at the
end of the 18th century, Horace Walpole lamented Britain's reduction to "as
insignificant a country as Denmark or Sardinia." He failed to foresee that the
industrial revolution would give Britain a second century of even greater
ascendancy. Rome remained dominant for
more than three centuries after the apogee of Roman power.
It is also chastening to remember how wildly exaggerated
were American estimates of Soviet power in the 1970s and of Japanese power in
the 1980s. Today some confidently
predict the 21st century will see China replace the U.S. as the world's leading
state, while others equally confidently argue that the 21st century will be the
American century. A fair assessment is difficult because there is always a range
of possible futures.
On American power relative to China, much will
depend on the often underestimated uncertainties of future political change in
China. China's size and high rate of economic growth will almost certainly
increase its relative strength vis-a-vis the U.S. This will bring it closer to
the U.S. in power resources, but doesn't necessarily mean that it will surpass
the U.S. as the most powerful country.
Even if China suffers no major domestic
political setback, many current projections are based simply on GDP growth. They
ignore U.S. military and soft-power advantages, as well as China's geopolitical
disadvantages in Asia. America is more likely to enjoy favorable relations with
its neighbors, allies like Europe and Japan, as well as India and
others.
My best estimate
is that, among the range of possible futures, the more likely is one described
by Lee Kuan Yew as China giving the U.S. "a run for its money," but not passing
it in overall power in the first half of this century.
Looking back at
history, the British strategist Lawrence Freedman notes two features that
distinguish the U.S. from the dominant great powers of the past: American power
is based on alliances rather than colonies, and it is associated with an
ideology that is flexible and to which America can return even after it has
overextended itself. Looking to the future, Anne-Marie Slaughter of Princeton
argues that America's culture of openness and innovation will keep it central in
an information age when networks supplement, if not fully replace, hierarchical
power.
On the question of
absolute rather than relative American decline, the U.S. faces serious problems
in areas like debt, secondary education and political gridlock. But solutions
exist. Among the possible negative futures are ones in which the U.S. overreacts
to terrorist attacks by closing inwards and thus cuts itself off from the
strength that it obtains from openness.
But there are answers to major American
problems that preoccupy us today, such as long-term debt (see the
recommendations of recent deficit commissions) and political gridlock (for
example, changes in redistricting procedures to reduce gerrymandering). Such
solutions may remain forever out of reach, but it is important to distinguish
situations where there are no solutions from those that could in principle be
solved.
America is likely to remain more powerful than
any single state in the coming decades. At the same time, we will certainly face
a rise in the power resources of many others—both states and nonstate actors. We
will also face an increasing number of issues to which solutions will require
power with others as well as power over others. Our capacity to maintain
alliances and create networks will be an important dimension of our hard and
soft power.
Rather than succumb to self-fulfilling
prophecies of inevitable decline, we need a vision that combines domestic
reforms with smart strategies for the international deployment of our power in
an information age.
Mr. Nye is a professor at Harvard and
author of "The Future of Power" (Public Affairs, 2011).
When we set aside the carnations and candy
hearts, Valentine's Day is fundamentally about reproduction. The event
flourished during a sexual period very different than our own. But despite
appearances of traditional morality, parish and similar records show that at the
turn of the last century between one-third and one-half of all marriages
occurred during a pregnancy.
On Valentine's Day, the infant
Cupid—infant!—informs a potentially indifferent or recalcitrant male that he is
"the one." More elegant than the old shotgun, Cupid's arrow points to the male
presumed to be the father of the oncoming or projected child.
Whatever the seeming frivolity of the day, it
pivots on very serious business: The choice of a mate with whom to carry on the
next generation of the species.
It's the female who makes the fundamental
choice. The peacocks may flail their gorgeous feathers, but it's the dull peahen
who decides which of the posturing lot is healthiest and most likely to provide
the necessary goods and services to support the trying matter of bearing and
raising offspring.
Same with humans.
Exclude romantic sentiment for a moment: The applicant for a woman's hand in
marriage had better have some promise of resources—"prospects" in the
terminology of Victorian novels and public television drama. The principal
function of kinship systems is to protect the bond between mother and child from
the vagaries between males and females. Assets help, which is why in our
catch-as-catch-can-society it became an effective strategy for a female of a
certain class to expect a guarantee of a man's commitment in the form of an
utterly useless asset called the engagement ring. The current norm is that the
male must convert two months of after-tax income into this special property for
his fiancée.
Be my Valentine—with back
up.
The biological bottom line is that it is the
woman's responsibility to secure an acceptable long-term partner. Her stakes
could not be higher. Marriage as an institution has largely been a means of
protecting her (and often restricting her, too). And while marriage is by no
means a romantic walk on the beach, it gets children raised and life goes
on.
Then
why the astonishing fact that 40% of babies born in the industrial world are to
unmarried women? Of course, many such
children are the result of loving and stable relationships; formal marriage need
not be the core of raising kids. Still, the figure is dazzling. Why is it so
high?
One
reason is that many men are "unwilling to commit." But the likelier explanation
is that 40% of women do not think the candidates available to them are worth the
time and trouble. The ever-increasing disparity between females and males in
terms of education and achievement has curtailed the available choices for
affluent, well- educated females.
Our
system increasingly favors females. In
countless American colleges, the first day of classes involves a rape
seminar—largely to please the lawyers, no doubt—which stigmatizes men as
potential predators and women as victims. The back of every women's bathroom
door at Colby College provides a list of things to do surrounding rape;
first-year females at Brown are given a whistle to use when rape
threatens.
Historically, women prefer to marry men who are
slightly older and wealthier than they are, if for no other reason than to have
an available breadwinner during the five to eight years the average mother
withdraws partially or entirely from the labor force. And 85% of women have children, which
explains the factoid that women earn 77% to the male dollar. It's accurate only
in the literal sense, since women are forgoing annual increases for significant
years or electing to take part-time jobs to raise
kids.
Women can control their reproductive lives,
which is as it should be. But to coin a phrase, men are becoming alienated from
the means of reproduction, which presumably no one wants.
Is there anything to be done to reverse this
trend? A good first step is for women to ease up on the patriarchy yammer,
especially when it comes to romance: Ideology has no place in the nation's
bedrooms.
For their part, men need to appreciate that
female partners view relationships as of greater consequence and meaning than
men do. And it's robust, timely and essential that they do so. These days, Cupid
needs longer than a day (and night).
Mr. Tiger, a professor of anthropology at
Rutgers, is the author of "The Decline of Males" (St. Martins, 2000) and, with
Michael McGuire, of "God's Brain" (Prometheus Books, 2010).
It is
almost a decade since China joined the World Trade Organization. Back then, China imported "global order": it absorbed
pre-existing, mainly U.S.-designed policies, rules and institutions. It acted
rather like a small or medium-sized economy that could only adapt to the
international terms of trade. Now China is one of the Big Three, alongside the
U.S. and European Union. It is the world's second-largest economy and its
leading exporter of goods. It is also the biggest post-crisis contributor to
global growth.
In line with its growing economic size, Beijing
wants to influence international prices and shape global rules. But that will
require significant changes in the ways Beijing thinks about economic policy,
and Beijing has resisted those changes to date. This creates uncertainty and
instability for China and the rest of the world, and has implications for other
leaders looking to China to play a constructive role in global economic matters.
Global trade issues best reveal China's policy
shift, and also its policy dilemma. China's membership of the WTO has been a
resounding success. Access to
the WTO's rules-based system and dispute-resolution process has defused manifold
tensions and smoothed China's rapid integration into the global economy. Beijing
also has negotiated bilateral or regional free-trade agreements such as the one
with the Association of Southeast Asian Nations.
View Full Image
AFP/Getty
Images
But
China also has been a conspicuously passive and marginal player in the Doha
Round of talks to further liberalize global trade. Its default position is still to react, leaving
other big players to take initiatives. And its FTAs tend to be fairly weak. Whereas, for instance, South Korea's FTAs
with the U.S. and EU represent comprehensive liberalization in trade between
major partners, Beijing's pact with Asean only eliminates tariffs; it hardly, if
at all, tackles regulatory barriers to trade in goods and services, investment
and public procurement. Other Chinese FTAs, such as its agreement with Pakistan,
don't even eliminate most tariffs.
Meanwhile, China's historic opening to the world economy
has stalled since about 2006. There has been paltry unilateral liberalization
beyond China's WTO commitments. The leadership of President Hu Jintao and
Premier Wen Jiabao is much more cautious than that of their predecessors Jiang
Zemin and Zhu Rongji. Anti-liberalization interests—some ministries, regulatory
agencies and resurgent state-owned enterprises (SOEs)—have grown more powerful.
Despite, or perhaps because of, China's growing clout, it is unwilling to open
markets unilaterally and haggles hard over reciprocal concessions.
Beijing's stalled liberalization is also of a piece with
greater industrial-policy intervention, aimed to promote a core of about 50
SOEs, mainly in "strategic" manufacturing and resource-based sectors, and a
handful of state-owned banks that dominate the financial
system. China's response to the
global financial crisis—a supercharged fiscal and monetary stimulus—bolstered
the public sector and state power at the expense of the far-less-subsidized
private sector. Beijing's frequent
recourse to command-and-control mechanisms such as price controls to fight
inflation makes market reform harder.
Protectionist trade policy and dirigiste industrial
policy meet at several junctions.
Export restrictions—most conspicuously
on rare-earth metals—have increased. Tax incentives, subsidies and price
controls, as well as administrative "guidance" on investment decisions, are used
to favor domestic goods over imports. China-specific standards, such as on
third-generation mobile phones, can create high compliance costs for foreign
enterprises. Services barriers, notably in financial and telecommunication
services, have come down very slowly, if at all.
Foreign-investment
restrictions have been tightened in a range of sectors where SOEs operate, such
as iron and steel, petrochemicals, coal, biofuels, news websites, audiovisual
and Internet services. Discriminatory government procurement, in the guise of
promoting "indigenous innovation," favors domestic companies. Joint-venture and
technology-transfer requirements on foreign companies promote national champions
in high-speed rail, electric cars and renewable-energy sectors. Finally,
"investment nationalism" extends to China's Go Out policy: Resource-based SOEs
in particular are buying up foreign assets with cheap capital provided by
state-owned banks.
The
problem is that this policy mix is incompatible with global economic leadership
at a time when China has little choice but to become a global leader. Beijing
can't expect its trading partners to accept indefinitely a flood of Chinese
exports without opening its own market to their goods. Hence it is in China's
own interests to restrain industrial-policy activism and its protectionist
spillover. And it should proceed with "WTO-plus"
reforms that move beyond the letter of its accession commitments. It
could further reduce applied import tariffs, especially on industrial goods. It
should reverse export controls on raw materials and agricultural commodities.
China's more substantial challenge is to tackle
high trade-related domestic regulatory barriers in goods, services, investment
and public procurement. These measures should be hitched firmly to domestic
reforms to improve the business climate and to "rebalance" the economy—to make
it more consumption- and less investment-oriented, with more freedom for the
private sector and less public-sector control.
Most of this wish list is not on Beijing's
agenda. Leaders are not minded to curtail industrial policy and proceed with
reforms beyond their WTO commitments. The latter would mean not merely
liberalizing product markets but also reforming highly controlled markets for
factors of production like land and capital and for energy inputs like oil,
water and electricity. Those lie at the heart of domestic economics and
politics. The reforms China most needs now cut to the core of the Communist
Party-government-public sector nexus and its grip on power. It is unlikely to
happen soon.
The story is not necessarily as grim as might
at first appear. Earlier liberalization has left China so deeply integrated into
global supply chains that it can't afford to move too far backward on reforms,
and Beijing increasingly can't afford to stand still either as it endeavors to
deliver steadily rising prosperity. But until it finds a way to break this
impasse, China will be limited in its ability to exercise meaningful global
leadership. This fact calls for some humility from Chinese leaders who otherwise
appear increasingly assertive on the world stage, and for realism from foreign
leaders who wish China would exercise a greater leadership role at international
forums like the International Monetary Fund, the WTO and the
G-20.
Mr. Sally is director of the European
Centre for International Political Economy and on the faculty of the London
School of Economics.
Where
and What Is U.S. Trading Internationally?
The
Commerce Department reported
today that U.S. trade rebounded strongly in 2010. The following charts
detail who we’re trading with, and what we’re trading.
White
House Expects Deficit to Spike to $1.65 Trillion
By
DAMIAN
PALETTA and COREY
BOLES
WASHINGTON—The White House projected Monday that the
federal deficit would spike to $1.65 trillion in the current fiscal year,
the largest dollar amount ever, adding pressure on Democrats and Republicans to
tackle growing levels of debt.
The
projected deficit for 2011 is fueled in part by a tax-cut extension that
President Barack Obama and Republican lawmakers brokered in December, two senior
administration officials said. It would
equal 10.9% of gross domestic product, the largest deficit as a share of the
economy since World War II.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
Willow
Wimbush, left, and Nancy Harris, work on copies of the Appendix of the fiscal
2012 federal budget on Thursday at the U.S. Government Printing Office in
Washington.
More
The
new estimate is part of Mr. Obama's proposed budget for fiscal year 2012, which
becomes public Monday morning.
Mr.
Obama is proposing $3.73 trillion in government spending in the next fiscal
year, part of a plan that includes budget cuts and tax increases that
administration officials believe will sharply bring down the federal deficit
over 10 years.
The
deficit would decline in fiscal year 2012 to $1.1 trillion, or 7% of gross
domestic product, under Mr. Obama's plan, as a year-long payroll tax holiday and
an extension of federal jobless benefits expired, administration officials said.
By 2017, the budget plan says, the deficit would be shaved to $627 billion, or
3% of gross domestic product.
Senior
administration officials said the new budget would address concerns about the
country's long-term fiscal challenges while spending more money on education and
research programs that the administration says are needed to boost economic
growth.
But
Mr. Obama's plan is likely to be rewritten by Republicans who control the House,
as proposed spending cuts in his budget fall short of the reductions
congressional Republicans are seeking.
View
Full Image
Getty
Images
Barack
Obama is proposing $3.73 trillion in government spending in the next fiscal
year.
Even
before turning to Mr. Obama's plan for fiscal year 2012, which begins Oct. 1,
lawmakers are battling over levels of government spending for the remainder of
fiscal year 2011, which House lawmakers will debate this
week.
"We're
very eager to work with Republicans to cut spending and reduce our deficit," a
senior administration official said Sunday night.
At
$1.65 trillion, the administration's projection for the 2011 deficit is
significantly larger than the $1.48 trillion estimated by the non-\partisan
Congressional Budget Office a few weeks ago. In fiscal year 2010, the deficit
was $1.29 trillion.
White
House officials believe their budget proposal would shave $1.1 trillion off of
accumulated federal deficits over 10 years, which they believe would push levels
of federal spending into a healthier balance.
That
would be less than the $4 trillion in reductions the White House's
deficit-reduction commission proposed in December, but it's still a level
administration officials believe is achievable and sustainable.
The
budget wouldn't do much, though, to arrest a future spike in the projected costs
of Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security. Mr. Obama has said he's open to
making changes in these programs, but he wants cooperation from Republicans
before he will begin.
The
savings in the budget come from a combination of spending cuts and increases in
revenue. A five-year freeze on non-defense discretionary spending would save
more than $400 billion over 10 years, the administration
says.
The
White House, in its plan for 2012, reduces certain programs to save an
additional $33 billion. This includes more than $2 billion in cuts to travel,
printing, supplies and other overhead costs. The plan also would cut more than
$1 billion in grants to large airports and $950 million to revolving funds for
state water treatment plants, among other things.
The
proposed budget seeks to prevent many middle-class Americans from being
subjected to the Alternative Minimum Tax, which would raise their tax bills, for
three years starting in fiscal 2012. To cover the cost, the administration would
put new limits on the ability of the wealthiest earners to utilize tax
deductions to lower their tax burden, among them deductions for charitable
contributions and mortgage interest.
The
Alternative Minimum Tax was designed to ensure that wealthier earners do not use
deductions to avoid most or all taxes. Lawmakers in both parties want to find a
long-term solution that limits its growing reach into middle-class households.
But Republicans are unlikely to agree to what, in effect, is a tax increase on
wealthier Americans to pay the cost of doing so..
The
budget will also propose averting scheduled reductions in payments to doctors
who treat Medicare patients for the next two fiscal years, at a cost of $62
billion over 10 years. To cover the cost, savings would be found by making
improvements in the health care delivery system that weren't detailed by
administration officials.
The
White House will propose cutting 12 tax breaks to oil, gas and coal companies,
which it projected will raise $46 billion in revenue over 10
years.
The
budget calls for $148 billion in overall spending on research and development,
which includes $32 billion in biomedical research at the National Institutes of
Health. It would create 20 new Economic Growth Zones, providing tax incentives
meant to attract investors and employers in hard-hit economic areas.
The
tax deal agreed to by the president and congressional Republicans in December
extended all current tax rates for two years, continued an expanded federal
jobless benefits program for a year, and exempted most Americans from having to
pay payroll taxes for a year. When it was signed into law, it was estimated the
compromise would cost more than $850 billion over the next
decade.
Write
to Damian
Paletta at damian.paletta@wsj.com
and Corey Boles at corey.boles@dowjones.com
Information
technology and economic change: The impact of the printing
press
Jeremiah
Dittmar http://www.voxeu.org/index.php?q=node/6092 |
Despite
the revolutionary technological advance of the printing press in the 15th
century, there is precious little economic evidence of its benefits. Using
data on 200 European cities between 1450 and 1600, this column finds that
economic growth was higher by as much as 60 percentage points in cities
that adopted the technology. “Printing,
lately invented in Mainz, is the art of arts, the science of sciences.
Thanks to its rapid diffusion the world is endowed with a treasure house
of wisdom and knowledge, till now hidden from view. An infinite number of
works which very few students could have consulted in Paris, or Athens or
in the libraries of other great university towns, are now translated into
all languages and scattered abroad among all the nations of the world”.
--Werner Rolewinck (1474) The
movable type printing press was the great revolution in Renaissance
information technology and arguably provides the closest historical
parallel to the emergence of the internet (see the recent column on this
site, van Zanden 2010). The
first printing press was established around 1450 in Mainz, Germany.
Contemporaries saw the technology ushering in dramatic changes in the way
knowledge was stored and exchanged (Rolewinck 1474). But what was the
economic impact of this revolution in information technology? By lowering
the cost of disseminating ideas, did the explosion of print media erode
the importance of location? A
puzzle Historians
argue that the printing press was among the most revolutionary inventions
in human history, responsible for a diffusion of knowledge and ideas,
“dwarfing in scale anything which had occurred since the invention of
writing” (Roberts 1996, p. 220). Yet economists have struggled to find any
evidence of this information technology revolution in measures of
aggregate productivity or per capita income (Clark 2001, Mokyr 2005).
The historical data thus present us with a puzzle analogous to the famous
Solow productivity paradox – that, until the mid-1990s, the data on
macroeconomic productivity showed no effect of innovations in
computer-based information technology. New
city-level data In
recent work (Dittmar 2010a), I examine the revolution in Renaissance
information technology from a new perspective by assembling city-level
data on the diffusion of the printing press in 15th-century Europe. The
data record each city in which a printing press was established 1450-1500
– some 200 out of over 1,000 historic cities (see also an interview on
this site, Dittmar 2010b).The research emphasises cities for three
principal reasons.
Figure
1 summarises the data and shows how printing diffused from Mainz
1450-1500. Figure
1. The
diffusion of the printing press The
association between printing and city growth City-level
data on the adoption of the printing press can be exploited to examine two
key questions:
I
find that cities in which printing presses were established 1450-1500 had
no prior growth advantage, but subsequently grew far faster than similar
cities without printing presses. My work uses a difference-in-differences
estimation strategy to document the association between printing and city
growth. The estimates suggest early adoption of the printing press was
associated with a population growth advantage of 21 percentage points
1500-1600, when mean city growth was 30 percentage points. The
difference-in-differences model shows that cities that adopted the
printing press in the late 1400s had no prior growth advantage, but grew
at least 35 percentage points more than similar non-adopting cities from
1500 to 1600. Diffusion
of the new technology Printing
presses were not set down at random across European cities. Cities that
adopted the printing press 1450-1500 subsequently enjoyed unusual
dynamism. Did printers simply pick locations that were already bound for
growth? This question can be addressed by exploiting supply-side
constraints that limited the diffusion of the technology over the infant
industry period. The
movable type printing press was developed by Johannes Gutenberg and his
business partners in Mainz, Germany around 1450. Printing was from the
outset a for-profit enterprise. But over the period 1450-1500, technical
barriers limited entry on the supply side. The
key innovation in printing – the precise combination of metal alloys and
the process used to cast the metal type – were trade secrets. The
underlying knowledge remained quasi-proprietary for almost a century. The
first known “blueprint” manual on the production of movable type was only
printed in 1540. Over the period 1450-1500, the master printers who
established presses in cities across Europe were overwhelmingly German.
Most had either been apprentices of Gutenberg and his partners in Mainz or
had learned from former apprentices. Thus a limited number of printers
brought the technology from Mainz to other cities. The
restrictions on diffusion meant that cities relatively close to Mainz were
more likely to receive the technology other things equal. Printing presses
were established in 205 cities 1450-1500, but not in 40 of Europe’s 100
largest cities. Remarkably, regulatory barriers did not limit diffusion.
Printing fell outside existing guild regulations and was not resisted by
scribes, princes, or the Church (Neddermeyer 1997, Barbier 2006, Brady
2009). An
instrumental-variable approach Historians
observe that printing diffused from Mainz in “concentric circles” (Barbier
2006). Distance from Mainz was
significantly associated with early adoption of the printing press, but
neither with city growth before the diffusion of printing nor with other
observable determinants of subsequent growth. The geographic pattern
of diffusion thus arguably allows us to identify exogenous variation in
adoption. Exploiting distance from Mainz as an instrument for adoption, I
find large and significant estimates of the relationship between the
adoption of the printing press and city growth. I find a 60 percentage
point growth advantage between 1500-1600. The
importance of distance from Mainz is supported by an exercise using
“placebo” distances. When I employ distance from Venice, Amsterdam,
London, or Wittenberg instead of distance from Mainz as the instrument,
the estimated print effect is statistically
insignificant. Positive
spillovers Cities
that adopted print media benefitted from positive spillovers in human
capital accumulation and technological change broadly defined. These
spillovers exerted an upward pressure on the returns to labour, made
cities culturally dynamic, and attracted migrants. In
the pre-industrial era, commerce was a more important source of urban
wealth and income than tradable industrial production. Print media played
a key role in the development of skills that were valuable to merchants.
Following the invention printing, European presses produced a stream of
math textbooks used by students preparing for careers in business. The
first known printed mathematics text is the Treviso Arithmetic
(1478). It begins: “I
have often been asked by certain youths...who look forward to mercantile
pursuits, to put into writing the fundamental principles of
arithmetic...Here beginneth a Practica, very helpful to all who have to do
with that commercial art.”1 The
first Portuguese arithmetic (1519) opens in similar
fashion: “I
am printing this arithmetic because it is a thing so necessary in Portugal
for transactions with the merchants of India, Persia, Ethiopia, and other
places.”2 These
and hundreds of similar texts worked students through problem sets
concerned with calculating exchange rates, profit shares, and interest
rates. Broadly,
print media was also associated with the diffusion of cutting-edge
business practice (such as book-keeping), literacy, and the social ascent
of new professionals – merchants, lawyers, officials, doctors, and
teachers. Local
effects in a world with trade Cities
with printing presses enjoyed special advantages. Two key factors explain
the localisation of positive spillovers.
Information
technology, cities, and capitalism The
printing press was one of the greatest revolutions in information
technology. The impact of the printing press is hard to identify in
aggregate data. However, the diffusion of the technology was associated
with extraordinary subsequent economic dynamism at the city level.
European cities were seedbeds of ideas and business practices that drove
the transition to modern growth. These facts suggest that the printing
press had very far-reaching consequences through its impact on the
development of cities. References Acemoglu,
Daron, Simon Johnson, and James Robinson (2005), “The
Rise of Europe: Atlantic Trade”, American Economic Review,
95:546-579. Bairoch,
Paul (1988), Cities and Economic Development, Chicago; University
of Chicago. Barbier,
Frédéric (2006), L’Europe de Gutenberg: Le Livre et L'Invention de la
Modernité Occidentale, Belin. Brady,
Tom (2009), German Histories in the Age of Reformations, 1400-1650,
Cambridge University Press. Clark,
Gregory (2001), “The Secret History of the Industrial Revolution”, UC
Davis working paper.. Dittmar,
Jeremiah (2010a), “Information Technology and Economic Change: The Impact of
the Printing Press”, forthcoming at Quarterly Journal of
Economics. Dittmar,
Jeremiah (2010b), “Information technology and economic change: The impact of
the printing press”, VoxEU.org interview by Romesh Vaitilingam, 1
October. Eisenstein,
E (1979), The Printing Press as an Agent of Change: Communications and
Cultural Transformations in Early-Modern Europe, Cambridge University
Press. Febvre,
Lucien and Henri Martin (1958), L’Apparition du Livre, Albin
Michel. Glaeser,
Edward and Albert Saiz (2003), “The Skilled City”, NBER Working Paper No.
10191. Mokyr,
Joel (2005), “The Intellectual Origins of Modern Economic Growth”,
Journal of Economic History, 65(2):285-351. Neddermeyer,
Uwe (1997), “Why were there no riots of the scribes?”, Gazette du livre
médiéval, 31:1-8. Roberts,
John (1996), A History of Europe, Penguin. Rolewinck,
Werner (1474), Fasciculus Temporum (Cologne), quoted in Febvre and
Martin (1958). Swetz,
F (1987), Capitalism and Arithmetic: The New Math of the 15th
Century, La Salle, IL; Open Court. van
Zanden, Jan Luiten (2010), “Before the
Great Divergence: The modernity of China at the onset of the industrial
revolution”, VoxEU.org, 26 January. 1
Reproduced in Swetz (1987), p. 40. 2
Cited in Swetz (1987), p. 25.
|
FEBRUARY 12, 2011 http://econlog.econlib.org/archives/2011/02/maos_great_fami.html
Mao's
Great Famine and
Depraved Indifference
In Mao's
Great Famine, Frank Dikötter joins the elite club of historians who live
up to their duty to impose "the
undying penalty which history has the power to inflict on wrong." On
purely literary terms I still prefer Jasper Becker's Hungry
Ghosts, but Dikötter's archival work on the Great Leap Forward is
unsurpassed. His bottom line: The standard horrific body count of
20-30 million deaths from starvation is grossly understated. The true
death toll is much higher - and open violence was an important secondary cause
of death:
[A]t
least 45 million people perished above a normal death rate during the famine
from 1958 to 1962... [I]t is likely that at least 2.5 million of these victims
were beaten or tortured to death.
One
highlight:
Obsfucation
was the communist way of life. People lied to survive, and as a
consequence information was distorted all the way up to the Chairman. The
planned economy required huge inputs of accurate data, yet at every level
targets were distorted, figures were inflated and policies which clashed with
local interests were ignored. As with the profit motive, individual
initiative and critical thought had to be constantly suppressed, and a permanent
state of siege developed.
But
how can we convict Mao of mass murder if he was caught in a web of his
subordinates' lies? The answer is simple: Mao's explicit policy of "kill
the messenger (after calling him a 'rightist')" makes the whole tragedy an
open-and-shut case of what lawyers call depraved
indifference murder:
To
constitute depraved indifference, the defendant's conduct must be so wanton, so
deficient in a moral sense of concern, so lacking in regard for the life or
lives of others, and so blameworthy as to warrant the same criminal liability as
that which the law imposes upon a person who intentionally causes a
crime.
If
I were prosecuting Mao, I'd further cover my bases by pointing out that he gave
explicit orders to literally enslave hundreds of millions, then invoke the felony murder
rule. However you slice it, Mao was a monster - and it's high time for
China to tear down his remaining posters and replace them with monuments to his
victims.
FEBRUARY 12, 2011 http://econlog.econlib.org/archives/2011/02/maos_great_fami.html Mao's
Great Famine and
Depraved Indifference
|
|||
|
In Mao's
Great Famine, Frank Dikötter joins the elite club of historians who live
up to their duty to impose "the
undying penalty which history has the power to inflict on wrong." On
purely literary terms I still prefer Jasper Becker's Hungry
Ghosts, but Dikötter's archival work on the Great Leap Forward is
unsurpassed. His bottom line: The standard horrific body count of
20-30 million deaths from starvation is grossly understated. The true
death toll is much higher - and open violence was an important secondary cause
of death:
[A]t
least 45 million people perished above a normal death rate during the famine
from 1958 to 1962... [I]t is likely that at least 2.5 million of these victims
were beaten or tortured to death.
One
highlight:
Obsfucation
was the communist way of life. People lied to survive, and as a
consequence information was distorted all the way up to the Chairman. The
planned economy required huge inputs of accurate data, yet at every level
targets were distorted, figures were inflated and policies which clashed with
local interests were ignored. As with the profit motive, individual
initiative and critical thought had to be constantly suppressed, and a permanent
state of siege developed.
But
how can we convict Mao of mass murder if he was caught in a web of his
subordinates' lies? The answer is simple: Mao's explicit policy of "kill
the messenger (after calling him a 'rightist')" makes the whole tragedy an
open-and-shut case of what lawyers call depraved
indifference murder:
To
constitute depraved indifference, the defendant's conduct must be so wanton, so
deficient in a moral sense of concern, so lacking in regard for the life or
lives of others, and so blameworthy as to warrant the same criminal liability as
that which the law imposes upon a person who intentionally causes a
crime.
If
I were prosecuting Mao, I'd further cover my bases by pointing out that he gave
explicit orders to literally enslave hundreds of millions, then invoke the felony murder
rule. However you slice it, Mao was a monster - and it's high time for
China to tear down his remaining posters and replace them with monuments to his
victims.
The
government didn't orchestrate this monetary reform; in fact it resisted most of
the way. But Cambodians voted with their wallets, shunning the Cambodian riel
and demanding dollars.
This
is no doubt due to the country's tragic history, which made its people
especially aware of the mischief governments can play with currencies and
property rights. The same Khmer Rouge that killed one-quarter of the population
in the late 1970s also abolished money and title to land. Though the riel came
back into circulation in 1979, people preferred to use the Thai baht initially
and then, once international aid poured into the country in the early 1990s, the
dollar.
View
Full Image
AFP/Getty
Images
The
use of the dollar has soared since then, accounting for 90% of the currency in
circulation today and 97% of banking deposits. Most banks don't even lend in
riel.
This
has brought the country a level of monetary stability it couldn't have achieved
on its own. The Asian Development Bank notes that while inflation averaged 56%
from 1990-98, it declined to 3.5% for most of last decade—a period the dollar
took over.
That
in turn created the foundation for greater investor confidence. The financial
sector deepened, and foreign direct investment rose to $3.5 billion in 2007 from
$38 million in 1990.
Now
Cambodia faces an important decision as it prepares to start up a stock market
in July. Last month, regulators convened a public workshop to decide whether to
denominate stock prices in riel, dollars or both.
Not
only would riel listings add costs and confusion in a largely dollarized
economy, it would create an additional risk for international investors, driving
them away. Instead, Cambodia could use the exchange opening as an opportunity to
embark on formal dollarization.
In a
neighborhood where governments debase their fiat money—Vietnam devalued the dong
by 8.5% last week—Phnom Penh would stand out all the more by making a commitment
to stick with the dollar. A
stable unit of account for investment as well as trade after all was one key to
Hong Kong's transformation from shanty towns to financial center in a single
generation. Cambodia
also shares Hong Kong's low, flat income tax and few barriers to trade and
investment.
The
country faces significant problems that Hong Kong never had though, including an
autocratic ruler who has undermined civil liberties and the rule of
law. But
mitigating these shortcomings is part of the reason Cambodians use the dollar in
the first place, and the fact that their savings cannot be held captive will
gradually strengthen their ability to demand change from their government.
Cambodia is providing a
fascinating case study in the power of dollarization to promote development in
even the most devastated and poverty-stricken of
countries.
Printed
in The Wall Street Journal, page 9
Axel
Weber said on Friday that he'll step down as President of the German Bundesbank.
To hear him tell it, his hawkish views disqualified him from getting the top job
at the European Central Bank later this year. This turn of events should worry
Germans and every European interested in low inflation and a stable
euro.
Mr.
Weber told Der Spiegel in an interview published Monday that his opposition to
the ECB's bond purchases from ailing euro-zone countries "might not have always
fostered acceptance of me with some governments." As a result, "since May of
last year I have been aware that this would adversely affect a potential [ECB
president] candidacy. During this time my conviction to not seek this important
office has matured."
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
Mr.
Weber has publicly criticized the ECB for buying distressed sovereign bonds to
shore up their prices, warning last year that this move was fraught with
"substantial stability risks."
While the bank's exercise does not seem to have done much to ease the pressure
on Greek or Irish sovereign debt, it has left the ECB deeply entrenched in
fiscal policy and undermined its independence.
Mr.
Weber also says he was isolated at the ECB governing council. "The [ECB]
president has a special position, but if he supports a minority opinion on
important questions then the credibility of this office suffers," Mr. Weber
explained. Unlike the U.S. Federal Reserve, where the chairman can often push
through his views, the ECB president governs by consensus.
Governments
in Athens, Dublin or Madrid may be cheering that they won't have to deal with
Mr. Weber at the helm of the ECB. But his isolation at the governing council and
his premature departure suggest a worrisome philosophical shift at the European
Central Bank. As a precondition for joining the single currency 12 years ago,
Germany rightfully insisted that the Bundesbank's commitment to price stability
would also become the European Central Bank's mantra. Mr. Weber's departure is a
loss for the euro zone.
In the
past year, the euro zone has abandoned the no-bailout clause that once anchored
the Continent's single currency, has enmeshed the central bank in buying the
bonds of its most spendthrift members, and now has no room for a bank president
who would have the currency stay true to its founding
principles. A
euro zone that Mr. Weber doesn't feel comfortable leading is one that should
make anyone with a stake in the success of the single currency
nervous.
Printed
in The Wall Street Journal, page 11
Axel
Weber said on Friday that he'll step down as President of the German Bundesbank.
To hear him tell it, his hawkish views disqualified him from getting the top job
at the European Central Bank later this year. This turn of events should worry
Germans and every European interested in low inflation and a stable
euro.
Mr.
Weber told Der Spiegel in an interview published Monday that his opposition to
the ECB's bond purchases from ailing euro-zone countries "might not have always
fostered acceptance of me with some governments." As a result, "since May of
last year I have been aware that this would adversely affect a potential [ECB
president] candidacy. During this time my conviction to not seek this important
office has matured."
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
Mr.
Weber has publicly criticized the ECB for buying distressed sovereign bonds to
shore up their prices, warning last year that this move was fraught with
"substantial stability risks."
While the bank's exercise does not seem to have done much to ease the pressure
on Greek or Irish sovereign debt, it has left the ECB deeply entrenched in
fiscal policy and undermined its independence.
Mr.
Weber also says he was isolated at the ECB governing council. "The [ECB]
president has a special position, but if he supports a minority opinion on
important questions then the credibility of this office suffers," Mr. Weber
explained. Unlike the U.S. Federal Reserve, where the chairman can often push
through his views, the ECB president governs by consensus.
Governments
in Athens, Dublin or Madrid may be cheering that they won't have to deal with
Mr. Weber at the helm of the ECB. But his isolation at the governing council and
his premature departure suggest a worrisome philosophical shift at the European
Central Bank. As a precondition for joining the single currency 12 years ago,
Germany rightfully insisted that the Bundesbank's commitment to price stability
would also become the European Central Bank's mantra. Mr. Weber's departure is a
loss for the euro zone.
In the
past year, the euro zone has abandoned the no-bailout clause that once anchored
the Continent's single currency, has enmeshed the central bank in buying the
bonds of its most spendthrift members, and now has no room for a bank president
who would have the currency stay true to its founding
principles. A
euro zone that Mr. Weber doesn't feel comfortable leading is one that should
make anyone with a stake in the success of the single currency
nervous.
Printed
in The Wall Street Journal, page 11
Last
week George Osborne
told the British parliament what he has been able to extract from British
bankers: They have promised to pay smaller bonuses to their staff, to pay more
taxes, and to lend more to "regional" businesses.
The
chancellor's speech had a triumphal tone, yet it displayed an alarming ignorance
of how banks benefit society and what went wrong before the crisis. Mr. Osborne
is moving the relationship between the government and the banking sector in
precisely the wrong direction.
Start
with his claim that, by getting large British banks to increase the capital they
have committed to the "Business Growth Fund" to £2.7 billion from £1.5 billion,
they will make "an additional £1.2 billion contribution to society."
The idea that, when
banks lend, the benefit to society is equal to the amount lent is
absurd. Banks are merely conduits between borrowers and lenders.
That "additional" £1.2 billion is a transfer from people who lend to banks to
people who borrow from them. There is no £1.2 billion contribution to
society.
Banks
contribute to society by facilitating transfers between lenders and
borrowers.
Their branches, call centers and websites allow lendable funds to be collected
and dispersed. By pooling lenders' funds, banks relieve someone who wants to
borrow a given amount for a given period from going to the trouble of finding
someone who wants to lend the same amount for the same period. Most
importantly, the scale
of lending done by banks means they can afford to develop credit-assessment
skills that individual lenders cannot. Lending that is intermediated by banks is
thus better directed toward sound borrowers.
These
are the services that bank customers pay for, and the means by which banks
benefit society. Alas, politicians who think that banks benefit society by the
simple act of lending are inclined to become hostile to banks' credit-assessment
standards. If only the standards were lower, more of that lovely lending would
happen.
View
Full Image
European
Pressphoto Agency
One
way to make banks lower their credit standards is to set targets for lending to
the "deserving." In America before the crisis, the supposed deserving were poor
people who wanted to own expensive homes. Now,
in Britain, the deserving are regional businesses whose commercial prospects are
too poor to allow them to borrow. Some say that "perfectly good" businesses
cannot now find willing lenders. This is implausible. Why would profit-seeking
banks not lend to perfectly good businesses?
When
governments force or subsidize banks to lend where they otherwise would not,
they are harming society. The money has better alternative uses. That £1.2
billion "contribution to society" engineered by Mr. Osborne is in fact an
assault on society, as was the politically directed lending to poor American
home buyers.
But
this waste is only the start of the problem. Bankers who do Mr. Osborne's
bidding—who pay their staff what he says they should, who lend to his favored
borrowers, who pay his special taxes without fighting him in the courts—can
surely expect his protection in hard times. If Mr. Osborne directs their actions
then he cannot let them fall when those actions result in losses.
Indeed,
despite his stated desire to ensure that no bank is "too big to fail," Mr.
Osborne made it clear last week that his public-spirited friends now have little
to fear. In return for their obedience, "the Government commits to the success
of a strong, resilient, stable and globally competitive financial services
sector," he said. British bankers can be confident that, if they are good
children, and comply with new capital regulations, they will always be bailed
out. Mr. Osborne has increased the moral hazard in the banking
system.
When
Mr. Osborne became shadow chancellor, he gave the impression of favoring a
market economy. Since becoming chancellor, however, he has changed his position.
He now favors the
economic system of fascist states in the 1930s, in which capital is privately
owned but its use is directed by politicians. Under this system, a business's
prospects depend on its relationship with the
government. Business people start thinking not
about what consumers want but about what politicians want. I
predict that, keen to signal that they are in tune with the government's agenda,
many British business people will soon be talking about the Big
Society.
In
last week's statement to parliament, Mr. Osborne said that the British had been
let down by "those entrusted by us to regulate bankers and run our economy." If
he had stuck to his old liberal principles he would have complained that no one
should have been entrusted to "run the economy" in the first place. But now he
likes the idea. This is understandable; running the economy must be thrilling
for those who do it. But, given the corruption and inefficiency of crony
capitalism, it is not so thrilling for the rest of us.
Mr.
Whyte is a management consultant and author of "Crimes Against Logic," (McGraw
Hill, 2004).
President
Obama has reached out to the business community with talk of lowering the
corporate tax rate and improving the tax treatment of profits earned abroad by
American companies. That would certainly be an important improvement in our tax
system. Unfortunately, his desire to use the elimination of "loopholes" to avoid
any loss of corporate tax revenue means that he cannot possibly go far enough in
reducing corporate tax rates.
The
U.S. corporate tax rate is 35% at the federal level and 39% when the average
state corporate tax is included. The average rate in the other industrial
countries of the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) is
just 25%. Only Japan has as high a rate.
Eliminating
every loophole in the taxation of domestic corporate profits identified by the
administration's own Office of Management and Budget would raise less than $60
billion of extra revenue in 2011, enough to lower the combined federal-state
corporate rate to 35%. The U.S rate would still be higher than in every other
country but Japan, and a full 10 percentage points higher than the average in
other industrial OECD countries.
This
high corporate tax rate causes a misuse of our capital stock. More specifically,
the high rate drives capital within the U.S. economy away from the corporate
sector and into housing and other uses that do not increase productivity or
raise real wages. And because interest payments by companies are deductible in
calculating taxable profits, the high tax rate induces firms to use too much
debt to finance their operations, increasing risks for them and the U.S.
economy.
Moreover,
the difference between the U.S. corporate tax rate and the lower rates abroad
encourages U.S. firms to locate production in foreign countries and discourages
foreign firms from producing in the U.S. unless absolutely necessary. The result
is less capital at home, reduced productivity, and therefore lower real wages.
Our
high corporate tax rate also makes the cost of capital higher for American firms
than for their foreign competitors, forcing them to charge higher prices on
American products. That
makes U.S. producers less able to compete in global markets or with imports to
the U.S. from abroad.
View
Full Image
Getty
Images
All
this is compounded by the unusual way in which U.S. firms are taxed on overseas
incomes. Firms in every country pay taxes on the profits they earn at home and
pay taxes to foreign governments on the profits they earn abroad. Generally,
however, foreign firms pay only a small token tax if they bring their after-tax
profits back to their home country.
But
that's not how it works for American firms. Our companies must pay the
difference between the U.S. tax rate and the tax that they have already paid.
For example, French and American firms that invest in Ireland pay a corporate
tax of only 12.5% to the Irish government. The French firm can then bring its
after-tax profit back to France by paying less than 5% on those repatriated
profits while an American firm would have to pay the 22.5% difference between
our 35% corporate tax and the 12.5% Irish tax.
The
extra tax that American firms must pay when they repatriate foreign profits
encourages those firms to leave profits abroad, investing those funds to expand
foreign operations instead of bringing that money back to invest in new plants
and equipment at home. The extra tax paid by U.S. firms when repatriating
profits also raises the effective cost of capital to American firms operating in
other countries, making them less able to compete in those markets. That shrinks
their scale of global production, reducing the cost savings that would result
from spreading domestic R&D and other fixed costs over a larger volume of
sales.
American
firms are also at a disadvantage in obtaining new technology by acquiring
high-tech firms abroad. Because of the high cost of capital of U.S. firms,
foreign firms can often afford to pay more in bidding to acquire those firms and
their technology.
Fortunately,
shifting the U.S. method of taxing foreign profits to the "territorial" method
used by all other industrial countries would have little adverse effect on
corporate tax revenue. According to the 2010 Report on Tax Reform Options of the
President's Economic Recovery Advisory Board, the Treasury estimates that a
territorial system might cost only $130 billion over 10 years but could be
structured in a way that actually raises revenue. Even the $130 billion estimate
ignores the favorable revenue effect of the resulting increase in profitable
corporate investment in the U.S.
The
other harmful effects of the corporate tax could be reduced by bringing the U.S.
rate into line with those in other industrial countries. The increased flow of
capital to the U.S. and the increased productivity of American firms would
generate new tax revenue that would offset some of the direct revenue loss
caused by a lower corporate tax rate. And since the increased stock of capital
in the U.S. would raise productivity and wages, closing personal tax loopholes
to make up the remaining revenue loss could still leave individual taxpayers
with a higher after-tax income.
President
Obama has recognized the importance of reforming the corporate tax system.
Passing such legislation this year would help to stimulate the recovery as well
as improve our long-run growth prospects.
Mr.
Feldstein, chairman of the Council of Economic Advisers under President Ronald
Reagan, is a professor at Harvard and a member of The Wall Street Journal's
board of contributors.
Woody Allen made "Bananas" in 1971 about a
South American banana republic, but as a slapstick comedy it's hard to beat this
week's $8.6 billion judgment against
Chevron by a provincial court in Ecuador. The only thing more preposterous
than the case is that the plaintiffs want more.
The
suit, filed in an Ecuadorian court in Lago Agrio in 2003, charges that Texaco
(since merged with Chevron) failed to clean up oil spills from wells it drilled
in the 1970s, and thus should be liable for as much as $113 billion. The fact
that Texaco cleaned up its sites and was released from liability by the
government of Ecuador and state oil company PetroEcuador didn't stop the
plaintiffs, led by attorney Steven Donziger, from concocting a case through
legally dubious tactics.
Consider the tale of Richard Cabrera, an
ostensibly "neutral" expert for the Ecuadorian court tasked with writing a
report to estimate the potential cost of environmental damages for which Chevron
could be held accountable, a figure he ventured at $27 billion. (The figure was
later inflated further.) Chevron has produced evidence that his findings were
shaped in collaboration with Stratus, a Colorado-based environmental consulting
firm that was working for the plaintiffs.
Exhibit B is a vast archive of shady remarks in
clips and outtakes from "Crude," a documentary on the case that captures potential misconduct by both the
plaintiffs and the government of Ecuador. At one point in the film, Mr. Donziger
calls all Ecuadorian judges corrupt and notes that "The only language that I
believe this judge is going to understand is one of pressure, intimidation and
humiliation. And that's what we're doing today."
View
Full Image
Getty
Images
In the
U.S., four federal courts have already said there is evidence that the behavior
of the plaintiffs amounted to fraud.
While many corporate defendants settle to avoid headline risk, Chevron has
fought back, most recently with a RICO suit against the attorneys and
consultants who have been its tormentors.
According to Chevron's complaint in federal
court in New York, the plaintiffs falsified evidence in an attempt to extort a
settlement. Egged on by American NGOs that know they can't prevail in U.S.
court, the plaintiffs' PR campaign targeted investors with scare tactics about
Chevron's potential foreign liability. They demanded investigations by the
Securities and Exchange Commission and reached out to the Department of Justice
and New York Attorney General Andrew Cuomo to intervene on their behalf. Mr.
Cuomo obliged, writing a letter to Chevron CEO David O'Reilly in May
2009.
Last Tuesday, New York federal district judge
Lewis Kaplan issued a temporary restraining order that bars the RICO defendants,
including Mr. Donziger, from collecting monetary damages anywhere in the world.
An arbitration panel at the Hague
followed on Wednesday, instructing the Ecuador government to bar enforcement of
any judgment pursuant to its Bilateral Investment Treaty with the
U.S.
There's more at stake here than one company's
bottom line. The Ecuador suit is a form
of global forum shopping, with U.S. trial lawyers and NGOs trying to hold
American companies hostage in the world's least accountable and transparent
legal systems. If the plaintiffs prevail, the result could be a global
free-for-all against U.S. multinationals in foreign
jurisdictions.
Chevron has no assets in Ecuador and the stock
market gave the judgment a collective yawn on Monday, suggesting that few
investors expect the plaintiffs will ever pocket the far-fetched billions
bestowed by the Ecuador court. We hope the company's refusal to surrender to
lawyers in league with a banana republic sends a message to other aspiring
bounty hunters.
President Obama
recently used his weekly radio address to insist that the U.S. can out-compete
any other nation on Earth if only we "unlock the productivity" of American
workers. But the president's advocacy of productivity—getting more or better
value for each hour worked—as the key to competitiveness may fall on deaf ears
in some quarters. Longstanding
misconceptions continue to undermine rational debate on productivity. Here are a
few of the most pervasive.
•
Productivity is not a priority. The U.S. relies more than ever on
productivity gains to drive GDP growth. Productivity generated 80% of total GDP
growth in recent years compared with 35% in the 1970s. Now, due to our country's
shifting demographics, we'll have to do even better.
In the past, productivity gains and an
expanding labor force made equal contributions to economic growth. But this is
changing as baby boomers retire and the number of women entering the work force
levels off. If labor-force growth slows as projected and productivity increases
at the average 1.7% annual rate posted since 1960, annual GDP growth will fall
to 2.2% from its historic average of 3.3%. Americans on average would experience
slower gains in living standards than did their parents and grandparents. To
prevent this, productivity growth needs to increase to an annual rate of 2.3%—a
rate not achieved since the 1960s.
•
Productivity is a job killer. Many
Americans suspect that productivity is a job-destroying exercise. They point to
the period since 2000, when the largest productivity gains in the U.S. came from
sectors, such as electronics and other manufacturing, that have seen large job
cuts. But when looking across the economy overall, as opposed to the ups and
downs of individual sectors,
productivity and jobs nearly always increase together. More than two-thirds of the years since
1929 have seen gains in both. It is simply untrue that there is a trade-off
between productivity and jobs in a dynamic economy.
•
Productivity is only about efficiency, and is designed to bolster corporate
profits. Productivity can come either from efficiency gains
(i.e., reducing inputs for given output) or by increasing the volume and value
of outputs for any given input (for which innovation is a vital driver). The
U.S. needs to see both kinds of productivity gains to experience a virtuous
growth cycle in which increases in value provide for rises in income that, in
turn, fuel demand for more and better goods and services.
View Full Image
Associated
Press
In the second half of the 1990s, the U.S. saw
productivity gains come from both sources. Two sectors—large-employment retail,
and semiconductors and electronics—collectively contributed 35% to the
acceleration in productivity during this period and, at the same time, added
more than two million new jobs. In contrast, the largest productivity gains
since 2000 have come from sectors that experienced substantial employment
reductions. The challenge for the U.S. is to return to the balanced productivity
growth of the previous decade.
•
Productivity is just for laggard sectors and
companies. Not so. As a critical component of competitiveness,
rising productivity is essential to the overall health and wealth of the U.S.
economy and to its ability to compete globally. Even the best-performing
companies and sectors still have headroom to boost productivity by emulating the
best practices of others and developing new innovations of their own. Even a
productive sector like retail, for instance, can broaden its use of lean
techniques from the stockroom to the storefront and continue to innovate.
It is true that the opportunity for gains may
be larger in industries like health care that today have relatively low
productivity. Our hospitals, without the driver of competition, have only just
begun to embrace efficient practices and lean techniques in the purchase and
delivery of services. Clearly, the public sector—at all levels—also needs to
become more efficient. Boosting public-sector productivity will be critical to
reducing the U.S. budget deficit without simply slashing public services.
•
Productivity gains have reached their limits. Some say that economic
development and technological innovation in the U.S. have plateaued and that our
productivity engine is running out of steam. We disagree. Our research suggests that the private
sector can deliver three-quarters of the productivity gains that the U.S. needs
to match historic growth rates simply by applying best practices across the
economy and tapping into the next wave of innovation.
But to obtain the last one-quarter of what's
required, federal, state and local governments need to tackle economy-wide
barriers that have long hampered productivity growth—including our deteriorating
infrastructure and the abiding burden of red tape. Government should also see to
it that companies with a strong record of innovation have access to the talent
and the right incentives to expand their U.S.-based operations. Working
together, the public and private sectors can set a new global standard for
productivity and competitiveness, while ensuring that future generations enjoy
gains in living standards similar to those their parents experienced.
Mr. Manyika is director of the McKinsey Global Institute
in San Francisco. Mr. Malhotra is chairman of the Americas, McKinsey & Co.
in New York.
WSJ econ blog Feb
16, 2011
5:00 AM
By
Justin Lahart
Without a big productivity boost, the U.S. may
be heading for decades of stagnation.
Productivity has long been a major part of
America’s economic success. From 1960
to 2008, gross domestic product grew at an average annual rate of 3.3%. About
half of that was due to an expanding labor force, as baby boomers started
punching the clock and as more women went to work. The other half came from
productivity growth — workers making more, and better, goods per
hour.
But the leading edge of the baby boom
generation has reached retirement age this year, and women’s participation in
the labor force has plateaued, note researchers at McKinsey
& Co.’s business and economics research arm in a
report released Wednesday. As a result, the contribution to economic growth
from a growing labor force will amount to only 0.5% a year over the next
decade.
“We’re no longer getting the lift from
expanding the labor force so all the lift has to come from productivity gains to
keep the engine going,” said McKinsey Global Institute director
James Manyika.
Without speedier productivity growth, the
economy could be decidedly lackluster. Say it grows at its historic annual rate
of 1.7%. With labor force growth of just 0.5%, that would make for GDP growth of
just 2.2% a year — a full percentage point below the 50-year
average.
Slower growth would slow gains in living
standards. It would make the U.S. a less attractive place to invest — bad news
for the dollar, for stocks and for bonds (and therefore interest rates). It
would make the nation more prone to recession. And it would make the nation less
able to care for those retiring boomers.
Mr. Manyika is hopeful that U.S. can boost its
productivity. There is plenty of room
for more efficiency in large sectors like health care, and even in places that
have seen large productivity gains in the past several years, like wholesale
trade, there are plenty of firms that have yet to embrace new technology and
management practices.
But
there are also some big hurdles. For one, investment in research and development
has flagged in recent years. And even
before the downturn, business spending on new equipment and software was growing
at a slower pace than in years past.
What’s
more, the type of productivity gains that companies have emphasizing lately have
more to do with trying to save money — reducing their dependency on workers —
than on making higher quality and more advanced products that improve people’s
lives. That drive for efficiency can boost productivity over the short run, “but
it’s not a sustainable way to drive productivity,” said Mr. Manyika.
Nokia proves the case for index
funds. If you had the bright idea
of making the company a core holding when it was on top of the mobile world, you
probably want to kick the dog now.
The company is trying to rescue itself with its
smart phone tie-up with Microsoft, and anyone who thinks the game is over should
refer to paragraph one. The game
isn't over. Chances are good that Apple and Google, today's dominant players,
will also miss a beat at some point, in Apple's case perhaps through control
freakery, in Google's because of creepiness with personal
data.
That said, discount some of the strategy
babble. "We're the swing factor," Nokia's Stephen Elop told The Journal this
week. "We can swing it to Android or swing the industry over to create a third
ecosystem."
"Ecosystem" is the meme of the day, as if we're
reliving the Wintel versus Apple battle of the early PC era. Apple, of course,
gave birth to the new meme by centering its mobile experience on "apps," really
just mobile web bookmarks, albeit ones requiring programmers to use Apple's
proprietary interface rather than the universal interface of a
browser.
It made sense when Apple did it, as the pudding
has proved. Others have followed. But even Google, owner of today's
fastest-growing "ecosystem," seems to have recurrent doubts and an urge to
restore the browser to centrality in mobile computing, as with its new app store
accessible from the Web.
View Full Image
Associated
Press
And
now we learn that Apple itself is contemplating a move downmarket with cheaper
phones and a greater reliance on the cloud, steps that at least open the door to
a shift away from app-centricity. The appeal of the cloud, after all, is access
to your data from any device at hand. Meanwhile, moving memory and processing to
the cloud, and out of the app, would free Apple to build less capability into
its handsets, making them—voila—cheaper.
So
though Microsoft and Nokia speak of creating a "third ecosystem" and saving the
world from an Apple-Google duopoly, their deal should perhaps be seen less
ambitiously. They've found a way to keep busy in the mobile space, making use of
their existing assets, including Nokia's industrial design and mapping prowess,
and everything Microsoft has to offer, including Bing, Xbox Live and
Office.
Have no doubt their early efforts will be
guided by the "ecosystem" meme. Have no doubt, either, that their partnership is
liable to be rethought in a hurry as the marketplace and technology
evolve.
In fact, all involved could do worse than stew
a bit in the lessons of Nokia's rise and fall.
Nokia,
a 150-year old Finnish conglomerate, blossomed as a mobile player at a time
when, by the consensus of Silicon Valley bien pensants, Europe was
whipping America's derrière in mobile. Nokia was on the ground floor as
a designer of GSM, the mobile standard whose uniform adoption by Europe's
governments was so envied in the 1990s by America's tech
leaders.
Bill Joy, the Sun Microsystems guru, spoke for
many when he complained at the time that America suffered from "too much
competition," thanks to too many wireless companies promoting too many rival
standards. We were ceding wireless leadership to the Europeans and Japanese, he
warned.
He was right, in a way. Competition is messy and wasteful, but it
also chivvies companies to discover or invent opportunity. And from nowhere,
when the mobile broadband opportunity was finally ripe, came two American
companies, Apple and Google, to seize most of the value.
Though some resist the knowledge, our "too much competition" is exactly what
created the opening for Apple to go to market with a $600-plus, feature-rich,
exquisitely engineered smartphone (which AT&T would subsidize for its
customers).
The
competitive neediness of Verizon and other AT&T rivals, in turn, created the
opportunity for Google's Android, which in turn revived Motorola and lifted
Samsung and HTC into global handset brands to rival Nokia.
Nokia once thought it wasn't important to be a
player in the U.S. market, with its cacophony of conflicting standards. It's
paying for that mistake now. Four years
after the iPhone was introduced, Nokia still hasn't delivered a version of its
Symbian operating system that holds a candle to its competitors. As one
critic recently put it, "Symbian needs more keystrokes to do less than the
iPhone and Androids even after a yearlong revamp."
The
lesson for the new Nokia and everyone else is an old one: Nobody knows anything,
and there's no substitute for messy, wasteful competition as a finder of
solutions to problems we didn't even know we needed solutions for. Whether the
mobile world will settle into one nonproprietary or many proprietary ecosystems
is far from decided.
WSJ econ blog Feb
15, 2011
12:55 PM
By
Brenda Cronin
Brazilian Finance Minister Guido
Mantega on Tuesday
renewed his attack on the Federal
Reserve’s most recent
program of quantitative easing, saying the policy had goosed global flows of hot
capital and heightened the global problems of rising commodity prices and
inflation.
Last
year, Mr. Mantega warned that falling currencies — including the U.S. dollar,
due to the Fed’s plan to buy up to $600 billion of Treasurys — had triggered a
currency war. On Tuesday, the finance minister renewed his opposition to the
Fed’s program — at one point correcting his interpreter to
specify “quantitative easing” and not just “monetary
policy.”
He said that strong capital flows will continue
to pour into emerging markets unless central banks in developed countries shape
monetary policies that allow “alternative investments” to attract new
capital.
In a Tuesday conference call with reporters
before the meeting of the Group of 20 finance ministers in Paris, Mr. Mantega
said food inflation in Brazil had increased early this year but there are signs
that “political and economic measures by the government to mitigate demand,”
will have an effect on slowing the rise in prices.
“Commodity prices will fall naturally once the
market restabilizes itself,” Mr. Mantega said, but for now, their rise
represents a significant concern for the global economy.
Issues on the agenda for the finance ministers’
meeting this week include getting a handle on rising commodity prices,
addressing global economic imbalances as well as flows of hot money to
developing economies and reforming the international financial
system.
Although Brazil also has taken China to task
for not letting its currency rise faster, Mr. Mantega said that his country had
no plans to join with the U.S. in pushing Beijing for a more rapid
appreciation.
Indeed, Brazil is “just as concerned about the
U.S. economy,” and the relatively weak dollar, he said. He did note that as the
health of the U.S. economy continues to improve, the commodity-price costs could
ease.
The finance minister also blamed the U.S. — and
other developed markets — for playing a role in rising commodity prices. The problem, Mr. Mantega said, isn’t solely
due to increased demand, unfavorable weather and natural disasters, such as last
summer’s drought in Russia. Agricultural subsidies in the developed world, and
higher prices for fertilizer made by advanced economies also are factors, he
said. One solution Mr. Mantega offered: encouraging production of agricultural
commodities in developing, low-income countries. And one sure way to make the situation
worse: any type of price controls or restrictions, which the finance minister
characterized as the equivalent of shooting one’s self in the
foot.
“Developed countries should remove subsidies and lift
trade barriers to products of emerging countries,” he said. “Also, developed
countries should provide new investment opportunities to prevent capital
supplies from increasing commodity prices.”
The Group of 20 nations sees rising commodity
prices, potential overheating in emerging economies and sovereign-debt woes in
advanced ones as key risks to the global recovery, according to a draft
document.
The group's policy priorities are
budget-cutting, freer exchange rates and structural changes, report says.
The early draft of a communiqué to be released
Saturday, seen by Dow Jones Newswires, says the big industrial and developing
powers have agreed on a "limited set" of indicators to gauge large economic
imbalances, but it shows the indicators have yet to be decided.
The G-20 vows "coordinated policy action" to
ensure "sustainable and balanced growth" for a global economy where recovery is
"progressing in line with our expectations but is still uneven," according to
the draft prepared for a Paris meeting of G-20 finance ministers starting
Friday.
"While most advanced economies are seeing
modest growth and persisting high unemployment, emerging economies are
experiencing more robust growth, some with signs of overheating," the draft
says. "Downside risks remain, including ongoing tensions on sovereign-debt
markets in advanced economies, inflationary pressures—together with significant
capital inflows in emerging economies—creating risks of asset bubbles, and
rising commodity prices raising concerns for growth sustainability and food
security."
The G-20 will develop guidelines to assess the
imbalances before its next meeting, in April, the draft says.
The issue of global imbalances has proven
contentious at past G-20 meetings, with the U.S. urging major "savers" such as
China, Germany and Japan to do more to spur domestic consumption rather than
building their economies around exports. The issue takes on added importance as
the sluggish U.S. recovery means American consumers can no longer be counted on
to drive global growth.
The U.S. floated the idea last year of
informally targeting a cap on current-account imbalances at 4% of gross domestic
product, but China and Germany objected.
Exchange rates also are likely to figure
prominently, with the U.S. and emerging powerhouses like Brazil saying China
deliberately undervalues its currency to benefit its exporters. China,
meanwhile, accuses the U.S. of using easy monetary policy to devalue the dollar,
which also serves as the world's main reserve currency.
The draft acknowledges that "tensions and
vulnerabilities are clearly apparent" in the international monetary system, and
calls for improvements "to ensure systemic stability and avoid large
fluctuations of both exchange rates and capital flows."
The draft envisions the Paris meeting leading
to a work plan for strengthening the monetary system, including measures to
manage capital flows and global liquidity. It also says the group will discuss
reports on the monetary system and capital controls by the International
Monetary Fund and World Bank, among others.
The draft also expresses concern about the
impact of commodity-price volatility, tasking G-20 deputies with crafting an
action plan. The group says it will ask the IMF and others to recommend steps to
curtail excessive volatility in gas and coal prices, according to the draft
communiqué.
Copyright 2011 Dow Jones
& Company, Inc. All Rights Reserved
This copy is for your personal, non-commercial
use only. Distribution and use of this material are governed by our Subscriber
Agreement and by copyright law. For non-personal use or to order multiple
copies, please contact Dow Jones Reprints at 1-800-843-0008 or
visit
More In Business
Mr.
Singh's Lament
India's
prime minister suggests the buck doesn't stop with
him.
India's
Congress-led government has been besieged by allegations of graft since the
middle of 2010. But Prime Minister Manmohan Singh tacitly suggests it's not fair
to hold him responsible when he has little control over his own coalition
government. That was the message of an hour-long television interview aired on
Wednesday.
Asked
what he was doing when Andimuthu Raja—the former telecom minister who belongs to
a southern Indian party that's part of this coalition—allegedly perpetrated a
$40 billion scam selling telecom spectrum, the prime minister responded, "In a
coalition government, you can suggest your preferences but you have to go by
what the leader of that particular coalition party ultimately insists." Mr.
Singh says the buck does not stop with him: "I did not feel I was in a position
to insist [on] auctions" instead of the first-come, first-serve way in which
spectrum licenses were sold.
It's
no secret that Mr. Singh has been India's weakest prime minister from the moment
he took office.
This was evident not merely from errant coalition partners, but also ministers
of his own Congress Party. For instance, Environment Minister Jairam Ramesh has implemented his own
activist agenda despite Mr. Singh's warning that environmentalism shouldn't
become a new avatar of the old license-permit raj.
Mr.
Ramesh, Mr. Raja and many others understand that at the end of the day they are
answerable only to the Congress
President Sonia Gandhi. When the party won parliamentary polls in 2004, it
was Mrs. Gandhi, a member of the Nehru-Gandhi dynasty that has dominated Indian
politics since independence, who anointed Mr. Singh to the top post.
But
it's more than embarrassing when the leader of the world's most populous
democracy throws his hands up at the hijinks of his own ministers.
Accountability is clearly breaking down.
India cannot be taken seriously on the world stage when its prime minister
doesn't have the power to speak on the country's behalf. How much longer will
the Gandhi family rule from behind the curtain?
Printed
in The Wall Street Journal, page 9
India:
Twenty Years Later
Economic
opening, starting in 1991, may have created wealth in India. But it hasn't
created a political constituency for reform.
The
Indian government's annual budget statement later this month will mark close to
20 years since India finally turned its back on most of the economic policies
that had placed it on the edge of an abyss in the early months of 1991.
The
dramatic liberalization of that year and further policy changes by governments
in the late 1990s were a smashing success in some ways—India has a far more
stable economy and is far more prosperous than before. But the failure to push
reforms over the past six years, along with the shortcomings of past reforms,
tell us a lot about why liberal economic policies have little political
resonance in India.
Say
what you will about the quality of reforms, India has come a long way since
1991. Back then a profligate government, an uncompetitive and heavily protected
economy, high tax rates, an overvalued exchange rate, and sudden capital flight
had brought India within 15 days of an embarrassing default on its international
loans. In response, the government cut tariffs, did away with industrial
licensing and opened the economy up to foreign investment. Though New Delhi is
battling similar problems today—a large budget deficit and a wide current
account deficit, for instance—the Indian economy is on a much firmer footing
thanks to the discipline imposed by those reforms.
These
reforms are paying off not only at a macro level but also for individual poor
households. Average dollar incomes have more than tripled since 1991. Diets have
improved and more proteins are being consumed. School enrollment has soared.
Human development indicators increased more in the first decade of the current
century than they did in the 1990s. The demand for basic consumer goods is
rising. Mobile phones, watches and ceiling fans are common possessions in poor
communities.
View
Full Image
Getty
Images
She
reaps the benefits of liberalization. But is she voting the same
way?
Yet
the so-called 1991 Big Bang, and the reform process since then, left a lot
undone. In the past few years especially, the Congress Party-led government of
Prime Minister Manmohan Singh, the finance minister who helped introduce many of
the most dramatic reforms from 1991-93, has lost its nerve for liberalization.
Several important second-generation reforms, like the introduction of a unified
goods and services tax that will finally stop distorting the tax incentives of
producers, have not progressed since the Congress came to power in
2004.
More
importantly, Mr. Singh has done nothing to liberalize India's labor laws, the
key impediment to job creation. A plethora of labor legislation enacted since
India's independence in 1947 makes it very difficult for firms to hire and fire
people as they wish. Laws to protect existing workers have kept new workers out
of jobs. Because of these laws, manufacturing firms have preferred to substitute
otherwise cheap labor with capital. So even when India's companies grow, they
aren't taking its workforce along.
Meanwhile,
the government still struggles to provide basic public services. India is
terrible at making sure its citizens have the opportunity to go to schools or
hospitals, or even have drinking water. In some cases, it can't even promise law
and order. These problems add an edge to the old complaint that the Indian state
does too much in the economy and too little in governance. So reordering
priorities should involve further economic reforms on the one hand and
governance reforms on the other.
The
major problem now is that these earlier reform failures are creating political
conditions where it may be harder to push forward with more liberalization.
India's biggest political-economy puzzle, and also one of its most serious
challenges, is that earlier reforms have not created an effective political
constituency for further reform. Voters consistently reward candidates promising
greater welfare benefits or government intervention in the economy.
Why
reformers don't win votes is clearest in the labor market. Even if the potential
reform constituency now has phones and consumer goods, it doesn't have steady
employment. Manish Sabharwal of staffing firm Teamlease Services points out that
one number has stayed constant despite all the positive change in India over the
past two decades: 93% of working-age Indians, estimated now at 500 million,
continue to work informally—outside of the organized sector and without proper
labor contracts.
This
lack of modern employment opportunities, coupled with poor public services, has
denied millions the upward mobility that was seen in most other Asian countries.
Unemployed or underemployed Indians, still living an abject life without much
dignity, look at the hype surrounding the Big Bang and wonder what was in it for
them.
This
disconnect between rising aspirations and the inability to meet those hopes
quickly enough gives rise to a fault line in Indian politics. Politicians
happily exploit it: Rather than summoning the will to push through reforms that
would address the roots of the problem, it's easier to pitch illiberal spending
and subsidies as an easy "fix."
This
explains measures that already have moved India backward from its reform
progress, including entitlements proposed by Mr. Singh himself despite his
reform leadership in the early 1990s. The most obvious example is the rural
employment guarantee scheme his government started in 2005, essentially paying
the rural poor to work whether or not any actual work existed for them to do.
In
2010, the government passed the Right to Education Act, which empowers public
teachers without caring for student enrollment and retention. And for the past
two years, it's been contemplating a right to food act that would dramatically
expand the current food subsidy regime, which already costs 500 billion rupees
($11 billion) a year. Expansions of all these programs depend on a thin tax base
that could stretch state finances to the breaking point.
Will
the new entitlement state affect India's post-liberalization story? The first
decade after 1991 saw growing personal consumption as more Indians put the raw
struggle for survival behind them. The second decade saw families invest in the
future by raising their spending of services such as education and health. The
third decade is now upon us. If India can't overcome the current political
inertia surrounding reform, this decade won't see the positive strides the last
two saw.
Of
course, there is the possibility that the widening arc of prosperity will
encourage voters to look beyond entitlements—to seek leaders who deliver more
secure futures through expanded opportunities and better infrastructure. This
has already started happening at the state level. Last November voters in Bihar,
one of India's most backward states, re-elected Nitish Kumar, a leader who had
reformed governance and who had managed to woo investors. In Gujarat, Narendra
Modi's solid economic credentials have translated into political
gains.
If
this keeps up, national-level politics could change too. But for the moment,
India still is waiting for national-level politicians who understand the
importance of pushing forward with a second generation of
reforms.
Mr.
Rajadhyaksha is managing editor of Mint.
February 16,
2011
Self-Inflicted
Poverty
By Walter E.
Williams
http://townhall.com/columnists/WalterEWilliams/2011/02/16/self-inflicted_poverty
2/16/2011
Why is it that
Egyptians do well in the U.S. but not Egypt? We could make
that same observation and pose that same question about Nigerians, Cambodians,
Jamaicans and others of the underdeveloped world who migrate to the U.S. Until
recently, we could make the same observation about Indians in India, and the
Chinese citizens of the People's Republic of China, but not Chinese citizens of
Hong Kong and Taiwan.
Let's look at
Egypt. According to various reports, about 40 percent of Egypt's 80 million
people live on or below the $2 per-day poverty line set by the World Bank.
Unemployment is estimated to be twice the official rate pegged at 10
percent.
Much of Egypt's
economic problems are directly related to government interference and control
that have resulted in weak institutions vital to prosperity. Hernando De Soto, president of Peru's
Institute for Liberty and Democracy (www.ild.org.pe), laid out
much of Egypt's problem in his Wall Street Journal article (Feb. 3, 2011),
"Egypt's Economic Apartheid." More than 90 percent of Egyptians hold their
property without legal title.
De Soto says,
"Without clear legal title to their assets and real estate, in short, these
entrepreneurs own what I have called 'dead capital' -- property that cannot be
leveraged as collateral for loans, to obtain investment capital, or as security
for long-term contractual deals. And so the majority of these Egyptian
enterprises remain small and relatively poor."
Egypt's legal
private sector employs 6.8 million people and the public sector 5.9 million.
More than 9 million people work in the extralegal sector, making Egypt's
underground economy the nation's biggest employer.
Why are so many
Egyptians in the underground economy? De
Soto, who's done extensive study of hampered entrepreneurship, gives a typical
example: "To open a small bakery, our investigators found, would take more than
500 days. To get legal title to a vacant piece of land would take more than 10
years of dealing with red tape. To do business in Egypt, an aspiring poor
entrepreneur would have to deal with 56 government agencies and repetitive
government inspections."
Poverty in
Egypt, or anywhere else, is not very difficult to explain. There are three basic
causes: People are poor because they cannot produce anything highly valued by
others. They can produce things highly valued by others but are hampered or
prevented from doing so. Or, they volunteer to be
poor.
Some people use
the excuse of colonialism to explain Third World poverty, but that's
nonsense. Some the world's richest countries are
former colonies: United States, Canada, Australia, New Zealand and Hong Kong.
Some of the world's poorest countries were never colonies, at least for not
long, such as Ethiopia, Liberia, Tibet and Nepal. Pointing to the U.S., some say
that it's bountiful natural resources that explain wealth. Again nonsense. The
two natural resources richest continents, Africa and South America, are home to
the world's most miserably poor. Hong Kong, Great Britain and Japan, poor in
natural resources, are among the world's richest
nations.
We do not fully
know what makes some societies more affluent than others; however, we can make
some guesses based on correlations. Rank countries
according to their economic systems. Conceptually, we could arrange them from
those more capitalistic (having a large market sector and private property
rights) to the more socialistic (with extensive state intervention, planning and
weak private property rights). Then
consult Amnesty International's ranking of countries according to human rights
abuses going from those with the greatest human rights protections to those with
the least. Then get World Bank income statistics and rank countries from highest
to lowest per capita income.
Having compiled
those three lists, one would observe a very strong, though imperfect
correlation: Those countries with
greater economic liberty and private property rights tend also to have stronger
protections of human rights. And as an important side benefit of that
greater economic liberty and human rights protections, their people are
wealthier. We need to persuade our fellow man around the globe that liberty is a
necessary ingredient for prosperity.
So
where the heck are all the jobs? Eight-hundred billion in stimulus and $2
trillion in dollar-printing and all we got were a lousy 36,000 jobs last month.
That's not even enough to absorb population growth.
You
can't blame the fact that 26 million Americans are unemployed or underemployed
on lost housing jobs or globalization—those excuses are played out.
To understand what's
going on, you have to look behind the headlines. That 36,000 is a net number.
The Bureau of Labor Statistics shows that in December some 4,184,000 workers
(seasonally adjusted) were hired, and 4,162,000 were "separated" (i.e., laid off
or quit). This turnover tells the story of our
economy—especially if you focus on jobs lost as a clue to future job growth.
With a
heavy regulatory burden, payroll taxes and health-care costs, employing people
is very expensive. In January, the Golden Gate Bridge announced that it will
have zero toll takers next year: They've been replaced by wireless FastTrak
payments and license-plate snapshots.
Technology
is eating jobs—and not just toll takers.
Tellers,
phone operators, stock brokers, stock traders: These jobs are nearly extinct.
Since 2007, the New
York Stock Exchange has eliminated 1,000 jobs. And when was the last time you spoke
to a travel agent? Nearly all of them have been displaced by technology and the
Web. Librarians can't find 36,000 results in 0.14 seconds, as Google
can. And a snappily dressed postal worker can't instantly
deliver a 140-character tweet from a plane at 36,000 feet.
So
which jobs will be destroyed next? Figure that out and you'll solve the puzzle
of where new jobs will appear.
View
Full Image
Martin
Kozlowski
Forget
blue-collar and white- collar. There are two types of workers in our economy:
creators and servers.
Creators are the ones driving productivity—writing code, designing chips,
creating drugs, running search engines. Servers, on the other hand, service
these creators (and other servers) by building homes, providing food, offering
legal advice, and working at the Department of Motor Vehicles. Many servers will be replaced by
machines, by computers and by changes in how business operates. It's no
coincidence that Google announced it plans to hire 6,000 workers in
2011.
But
even the label "servers" is too vague. So I've broken down the service economy
further, as a guide to figure out the next set of unproductive jobs that will
disappear. (Don't blame me if your job is listed here; technology spares no one,
not even writers.)
•
Sloppers are
those that move things—from one side of a store or factory to
another.
Amazon is displacing
thousands of retail workers. DMV employees and so many other government workers move
information from one side of a counter to another without adding any value. Such
sloppers are easy to purge with clever
code.
•
Sponges are
those who earned their jobs by passing a test meant to limit
supply.
According to this newspaper, 23% of U.S. workers now need a state
license. The Series 7 exam is required for
stock brokers. Cosmetologists, real estate brokers, doctors and lawyers all need
government certification. All this does is legally bar others from doing the
same job, so existing workers can charge more and sponge off the rest of us.
But
eDiscovery is the hottest thing right now in
corporate legal departments. The software scans documents and looks for
important keywords and phrases, displacing lawyers and paralegals who charge
hundreds of dollars per hour to read the often millions of litigation
documents. Lawyers, understandably, hate
eDiscovery.
Doctors
are under fire as well, from computer imaging that looks inside of us and from
Computer Aided Diagnosis, which looks for patterns in X-rays to identify breast
cancer and other diseases more cheaply and effectively than radiologists do.
Other than barbers, no sponges are safe.
•
Supersloppers mark
up prices based on some marketing or branding gimmick, not true economic value.
That
Rolex Oyster Perpetual Submariner Two-Tone Date for $9,200 doesn't tell time as
well as the free clock on my iPhone, but supersloppers will convince you to buy
it. Markups don't generate wealth, except for those marking up. These products
and services provide a huge price umbrella for something better to sell
under.
•
Slimers are
those that work in finance and on Wall Street. They
provide the grease that lubricates the gears of the economy. Financial firms
provide access to capital, shielding companies from the volatility of the stock
and bond and derivative markets. For that, they charge hefty fees. But
electronic trading has
cut into their profits, and corporations are negotiating lower fees for mergers
and financings. Wall Street will always exist, but with many fewer workers.
•
Thieves have
a government mandate to make good money and a franchise that could disappear
with the stroke of a pen. You
know many of them: phone companies, cable operators and
cellular companies are the obvious ones. But there are more
annoying ones—asbestos testing and removal, plus all the regulatory inspectors
who don't add value beyond making sure everyone pays them. Technologies like
Skype have picked off phone companies by lowering international rates. And
consumers are cutting expensive cable TV services in favor of Web-streamed
video.
Like
it or not, we are at the beginning of a decades-long trend. Beyond the demise of
toll takers and stock traders, watch enrollment dwindle in law
schools and medical schools. Watch the divergence in stock performance between
companies that actually create and those that are in transition—just look at
Apple, Netflix and Google over the last five years as compared to retailers and
media.
But be
warned that this economy is incredibly dynamic, and there is no quick fix for
job creation when so much technology-driven job destruction is taking place.
Fortunately, history shows that labor-saving machines haven't decreased
overall employment even when they have made certain jobs obsolete. Ultimately
the economic growth created by new jobs always overwhelms the drag from jobs
destroyed—if policy makers let it happen.
Mr.
Kessler, a former hedge fund manager, is the author most recently of "Eat People
And Other Unapologetic Rules for Game-Changing Entrepreneurs," just out from
Portfolio.
Honduras's
Experiment With Free-Market Cities
A
poor country considers a new way to stimulate private
investment.
What
advocate of free markets hasn't, at one time or another, fantasized about
running away to a desert island to start a country where economic liberty would
be the law of the land? If things go according to plan, more than one such
"island" may soon pop up here.
Honduras
calls these visionary islands "model cities," and as the Journal's David Wessel
reported from Washington 10 days ago, the Honduran Congress is expected to soon
pass an amendment to the constitution that would clear the way to put the
concept into action.
The
idea is simple: A sizable piece of unpopulated government land is designated for
use as a model city.
A charter that will govern the city is drafted and the Congress approves it. A
development authority is appointed by the national government. The authority
signs contracts with the investors who will develop the infrastructure. The city
opens for business under rules that act as a magnet for
investment.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
Honduras
President Porfirio Lobo
Sound
fanciful? Perhaps, until the chief architect of the plan, 35-year-old Octavio
Sánchez, points out that "model cities" are nothing new. "What I love about the
concept," President Porfirio Lobo's chief of staff tells me in an interview, "is
two things. First, that we will employ the best practices from similar projects
around the world that have been successful. Second that it is entirely voluntary
for people to move in. They are the ones who will protect
it."
During
the Cold War, Honduras was known mostly for its loyalty to the U.S. In 2009 it
gained fame for deposing Manuel Zelaya because he was trying to extend his
presidency in violation of the nation's constitution. Honduras refused to comply
with international demands to restore Mr. Zelaya to power. Now the little
country that stood up to the world to defend its democracy seems to be affirming
a belief that it needs to change if it wants to ward off future assaults on
freedom.
New
York University economist Paul Romer is a global champion of the same concept by
another name. Here's how Mr. Romer described his "charter cities" in a Jan. 25
interview with the Council on Foreign Relations' Sebastian Mallaby: "Some group
of people who are willing to try something different say: Let's go off by
ourselves. We'll develop both different laws, perhaps, but importantly,
different norms about right and wrong. We'll reinforce that in our little
culture that operates separately. And then, if these turn out to be a success .
. . we'll not only demonstrate to others that there's something better, but
we'll also provide a mechanism where people can move from the equilibrium where
one set of rules and norms prevails to this other one."
The
germination of model cities for Honduras started in Honduras. The reason is not
hard to discern. Reformers have spent years trying to liberalize the economy
only to be thwarted by special interests.
As
Mr. Sánchez, who also worked in the government of President Ricardo Maduro
(2002-06), puts it: "For me, for a very long time, it has been obvious that with
the current system, we are going nowhere." The young lawyer says that almost a
decade ago he began thinking about whether it would be possible to designate a
small place where all the pro-market reforms would be law. He had no doubt that
such a zone would grow fast and that the ideas behind it would spread.
The
Americas in the News
Get the latest information in Spanish from
The Wall Street Journal's Americas page.
Over
time the concept evolved and the 2009 political crisis seems to have generated
interest in new ideas. In an interview here last week President Lobo told me
that his polling shows that among Hondurans familiar with the proposal, there is
broad support.
The
amendment is expected to pass Congress within the next three months. This week
Mr. Sánchez and Mr. Lobo will travel to South Korea and Singapore, where they
will analyze successful model cities to aid in drawing up the first
charter.
They will also be looking for investors. Mr. Sánchez says that it is important
that more than one model city is launched so that rule designers will have to
compete.
Can
it work? The critics—who interestingly enough seem to be mostly failed planning
or development "experts"—say it is unlikely because, well, this is Honduras. But
Mr. Sánchez is not deterred. He points out that both Japan and Chile were once
proclaimed culturally incapable of development. He also argues that history is
on Honduras's side. Separate legal systems inside cities generated untold
prosperity as far back as the 14th century in Northern Europe's Hanseatic League
and more recently in places like the Chinese city of
Shenzhen.
Former
president Ricardo Maduro is also a fan. "If we want to develop we have to find a
way to counterbalance the populism that causes us so much harm. The model city
is a way of decentralizing power and connecting people to their government."
Write
to O'Grady@wsj.com
Ivory
Coast Seizes Four International Banks
Associated
Press
ABIDJAN,
Ivory Coast—The disputed regime of Ivory Coast's Laurent Gbagbo has seized four
major international banks that had shut down operations in the West African
country, a spokesman for Mr. Gbagbo's government said on state TV late
Thursday.
Spokesman
Ahoua Don Mello read a decree on state TV saying that the banks didn't respect
the law and closed without proper notice. According to Ivorian law banks have to
give three months notice.
View
Full Image
Reuters
The
closed doors of a Société Générale branch in Abidjan.
Mr.
Don Mello said Mr. Gbagbo's government had seized Britain's Standard
Chartered PLC, France's
BNP Paribas SA and Société
Générale SA along with U.S. bank Citibank. These banks hold a majority of
the bank accounts for civil servants.
Mr.
Don Mello said that Mr. Gbagbo's government would nationalize the banks and
would pay February salaries. The banks
closed because of financial sanctions from the international community intended
to force Mr. Gbagbo out. It is unclear if Mr. Gbagbo will have access to the
banks' funds.
Nine
private banks began shutting down earlier this week including Nigeria's Access
bank. Société
Générale's local subsidiary, the country's largest financial institution,
announced it was shuttering all 47 of its branches, which serve 230,000
clients.
The
international community had said it would use financial sanctions to dislodge
Mr. Gbagbo, who is refusing to step down although results issued by his
country's election commission and certified by the United Nations showed he had
lost the Nov. 28 ballot by nearly nine percentage points. His opponent, Alassane
Ouattara, was widely recognized by the international community as the winner,
and is currently under U.N. protection at a hotel in
Abidjan.
Among
the sanctions slapped on Mr. Gbagbo's regime was the revocation of his signature
on state accounts at the regional central bank, which prints the currency used
in Ivory Coast. Once that happened late last month, the Gbagbo government was no
longer able to make deposits into the private banks where government salaries
are cashed.
The
move was expected to prevent almost all government employees from receiving
their salaries. Panicked people gathered in lines this week desperately seeking
to take out their savings in fear of a cash shortage.
Diplomats
and analysts have been wagering that once civil servants stop receiving their
pay, they will defect en masse away from Mr. Gbagbo. He is still backed by the
army, which has brutally cracked down on supporters of Mr.
Ouattara.
Mr.
Don Mello also said that the government has ordered the heads of the two French
banks to report to the minister of economy Friday morning in
Abidjan.
WSJ econ blog Feb 17, 2011
3:42 PM
E-Commerce
Surge May Hit Tax Revenue
By
Justin Lahart
The
rapid growth in internet sales is great for online retailers. But it’s not such
good news for state and local governments.
The
Commerce Department reported Thursday that e-commerce retail sales totaled $44
billion in the fourth quarter last year, up from $38 billion a year earlier.
E-commerce sales now account for 4.3% of total retail sales (which include lots
of things that don’t get bought online, like new cars, gasoline and restaurant
meals), up from 1% a decade ago. For the year, e-commerce sales totaled $165
billion.
Many
of those online purchases didn’t have any sales tax attached to them. Long
before the Internet was on anybody’s radar, the Supreme Court ruled that states
couldn’t require that retailers without a physical presence in a state, like
mail-order companies, charge sales tax on their behalf.
In recent years, states have tried to
find ways around that ruling. Last fall, for example, Texas said an Amazon.com distribution center in
Dallas counted as a physical presence and sent the retailer a past-due sale tax
bill for $269 million. This month, Amazon said it is shutting down the
distribution center as a result of Texas’s “unfavorable regulatory
climate.”
But
with the exception of New York and a handful of other states, online retailers
don’t have to charge sales tax. (In many places, residents are supposed to pick
up the tab, but few do.) Working with colleagues at the University of Tennessee two years
ago, economist Donald Bruce
projected that state and
local governments would lose some $10 billion in uncollected e-commerce taxes in
2011. Given how quickly online sales are growing, that estimate now seems
quite conservative, he says.
The
lack of sales taxes on Internet purchases is one of the factors driving online
sales growth, research suggests.
When MIT economists Glenn Ellison and Sara Fisher Ellison
looked at online sales of computer
memory modules, for example, they found that sales were substantially higher
to high sales tax states than to low sales tax states — “clear evidence that tax
savings are an important motivation for online shopping,” they
wrote.
That
means that, to some extent, the sales that offline retailers are losing to
online retailers is due to sales-tax differences. And if some of those Main
Street stores don’t survive as a result, state and local governments lose even
more tax revenue.
One
suspects that, with all the budget strains they’re facing, more states will be
going toe to toe with online retailers.
o
By Damian
Paletta
Journalists from all over the world are descending on
Paris this weekend for a summit of finance ministers and central bankers from
the Group of 20 leading nations.
A hot topic: China,
and whether its role as a huge exporter with what critics say is an
“undervalued” currency is causing economic imbalances around the
world.
Whether intentional
or not, the official “G20? bag that the French organizers gave all reporters
seemed to offer a reminder of tensions at the meeting. The bag contains a silver
“thumb drive,” meant as a gift for each journalist, which read “G-20 France
2011? on the side.
The little white box
the thumb drive is packaged in is blank except for a few symbols and its own
three little words: “Made in China.”
New
York Senator Chuck Schumer demanded on Sunday that the name of the New York
Stock Exchange appear first in a possible merger of NYSE Euronext with Germany's
Deutsche Börse. Mr. Schumer says he wants the merger to maintain New York City
as the center of world finance.
But if
he's concerned with the reality of keeping financial markets in the U.S.—as
opposed to the perception created by a corporate brand—Mr. Schumer should
conduct some oversight of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission. The agency's
pending rules could drive offshore markets that are much more lucrative than the
trading of stocks.
CFTC
chairman Gary Gensler is ostensibly seeking to limit the power of big banks with
proposed rules for derivatives-trading venues. Mr. Gensler has pushed for the
boards of trading platforms and clearinghouses, which stand behind every trade,
to include a majority of independent directors with no ties to these
organizations or to the banks that trade through them.
When
the CFTC passed a draft rule last year, he lacked the votes to require a
majority of independent directors, so he settled for 35%. But as a final vote on
the rule approaches, he's pushing again to raise the percentage to 51.
Think of it: By law,
these firms would be controlled by people who don't own them. Mr. Gensler also
wants to limit the share of these firms that banks can own.
Meanwhile,
the Securities and Exchange Commission has already passed a draft rule mandating
a majority of independent directors for the derivatives venues that it
regulates, though its regulatory turf is limited.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
As
we've argued before, the way to limit the power of big
banks is to break them up or take away their subsidies, not to engineer flaws
into trading platforms that are ultimately backed by taxpayers.
Overseeing the risks of
a clearinghouse that will stand behind trillions of dollars in interest-rate
swaps is not a job for amateurs. The expertise that exists in this area largely
exists inside banks, and taxpayers will most likely value competence over
independence.
We're
still waiting for evidence that independent directors yield better financial
results.
Merrill Lynch's 2006 annual report proudly noted that 11 out of the 12 members
of its corporate board were independent—people who had never worked at the firm
and had little connection to it. Merrill was a model of trendy
corporate governance, with a board of esteemed Americans who could offer an
unbiased perspective.
As it
turned out, what Merrill really needed was a board that knew how to manage
financial risk. And
it would have helped immensely if directors had understood the mortgage-backed
securities on which they had unwittingly bet the firm. The report was released
in early 2007, and by that October the company was searching for a new CEO after
an $8.4 billion quarterly loss.
In
2008, the firm again boasted of independent captains manning the board deck as
Merrill sailed into the financial crisis. The company had 11 directors by then,
and 10 of them were untainted by intimate knowledge of the business. Several
months later, the securities that the board never did comprehend forced Merrill
to sell itself to Bank of America.
Today
the regulators are pushing aggressively for independent directors at both public
and private companies, but there is even less of an argument for such changes
than there was at Merrill. Even if one supports the hypothesis that independent
directors enhance returns, the point is to mitigate the potential conflict when
executives are tempted to act on behalf of themselves instead of investors. But
in this case, the rules are explicitly intended to do the opposite, by limiting
the power of particular investors.
Yes,
there are potential conflicts when, for example, a bank is a partial owner of a
clearinghouse and is also one of the members trading through it. Such a bank
might pressure the management to give it a better deal than other members. But
large customers can exert the same pressure, whether or not they own part of the
business or have seats on the board.
Meanwhile,
an owner has a strong
financial incentive not to destroy his own asset. And a director with a
financial interest in the health of the organization is bound to focus very
intensively on maintaining that health.
Limits
on ownership and board control will discourage investment in American trading
venues, which makes sense only if Mr. Gensler and the SEC are trying to move
financial services from the United States to Europe or Asia. As bad as the
Dodd-Frank law is, Congress clearly did not intend to drive the derivatives
market offshore, and Congress specifically voted down a proposal to impose the
type of ownership and board limits that the regulators are now pursuing.
More
than a few Wall Streeters suspect that Mr. Gensler is seeking to shrink U.S.
derivatives markets as a way to reduce systemic risk. But the Financial Crisis
Inquiry Commission failed to prove that derivatives played a key role in the
last crisis, and there's no evidence that moving these markets from New York to
Shanghai will prevent the next one.
To pay
for all this CFTC overregulation, the President's budget proposes new fees on
derivatives trading, which will make foreign markets even more attractive. If
Mr. Gensler dreams of being the next Treasury Secretary, handing over U.S.
financial leadership to foreign competitors hardly seems like a resume builder.
Number
of the Week: The Perils of Inequality
By Mark
Whitehouse
Number
of the Week
364%
364% —
Difference in the hourly earnings of high-paid and low-paid
employees
US consumers
are in a much better financial situation than they were just a couple years ago.
But the poor and middle class still have at least one big incentive to get into
trouble again: The growing challenge of catching up to the
rich.
Various
economists, most notably Raghuram Rajan of the University of
Chicago, have stressed the pivotal role income inequality played in the
financial crisis. Poorer Americans’ debt troubles, the logic goes, stemmed in
part from their efforts to bridge the gap with the rich by borrowing money. A
flood of cash from China, together with enterprising bankers and mortgage
subsidies from the U.S. government, created the perfect environment for those
efforts to get out of control.
Now U.S.
consumers have managed to shed a lot of their debt. They’ve done so at great
cost to the economy, which has swallowed hundreds of billions of dollars in bad
loans. As of September 2010, total household debt stood at 118% of disposable
income, down from a peak of 130% three years earlier. Much of that has shifted
to the government, which has seen its debt to the public rise to 61% of GDP,
from 36%, over the same period.
The
inequality, though, hasn’t gone away. Rather, it’s hitting new records. As the
economy bottomed out in 2009, the hourly wage of employees in the 90th pay
percentile—those whose wage exceeded that of 90% of the working population—stood
at $38.50, according to a new study
by the Congressional Budget Office. That’s 364% more than the $8.30
an hour earned by those in the 10th percentile. A decade earlier, the difference
was 332%, adjusted for inflation. The difference is more pronounced for men than
women, at 383% versus 319%.
The growing
gap partly reflects the effects of globalization and technological change, which
help highly educated workers get more for their skills. But inequality causes a
lot of problems: It can contribute to political polarization, and it raises the
stakes for less wealthy consumers who want to keep the American dream
alive.
To be sure,
it’s not as easy to get into debt trouble as it was before the crisis. Banks are
more careful, and subprime lending has all but disappeared (with the notable
exception of the booming junk-bond market). But the Federal Reserve is
trying as hard as it can to get people borrowing again. And in some areas,
people are beginning to rack up debt: In the last three months of 2010,
credit-card balances rose at an annualized rate of 2.7%, the highest since
mid-2008. As of December, margin debt in the stock market was also at its
highest level since mid-2008.
Let’s hope
recent history doesn’t repeat itself.
http://www.the-american-interest.com/article-bd.cfm?piece=907
From
the January - February 2011
issue:
The Inequality That Matters
Does
growing wealth and income inequality in the United States presage the downfall
of the American republic? Will we evolve into a new Gilded Age plutocracy,
irrevocably split between the competing interests of rich and poor? Or is
growing inequality a mere bump in the road, a statistical blip along the path to
greater wealth for virtually every American? Or is income inequality partially
desirable, reflecting the greater productivity of society’s stars?
There
is plenty of speculation on these possibilities, but a lot of it has been aimed
at elevating one political agenda over another rather than elevating our
understanding. As a result, there’s more confusion about this issue than
just about any other in contemporary American political
discourse. The reality is that most of the
worries about income inequality are bogus, but some are probably better grounded
and even more serious than even many of their heralds
realize. If our economic churn is bound to throw off
political sparks, whether alarums about plutocracy or something else, we owe it
to ourselves to seek out an accurate picture of what is really going on.
Let’s start with the
subset of worries about inequality that are significantly overblown.
In
terms of immediate political stability, there is less to the income inequality
issue than meets the eye. Most
analyses of income inequality neglect two major points. First, the inequality of
personal well-being is sharply down over
the past hundred years and perhaps over the past twenty years as
well. Bill
Gates is much, much richer than I am, yet it is not obvious that he is much
happier if, indeed, he is happier at all. I have access to penicillin, air
travel, good cheap food, the Internet and virtually all of the technical
innovations that Gates does. Like the vast majority of Americans, I have access
to some important new pharmaceuticals, such as statins to protect against heart
disease. To be sure, Gates receives the very best care from the world’s top
doctors, but our health outcomes are in the same ballpark. I don’t have a
private jet or take luxury vacations, and—I think it is fair to say—my house is
much smaller than his. I can’t meet with the world’s elite on demand. Still, by
broad historical standards, what I share with Bill Gates is far more significant
than what I don’t share with him.
Compare
these circumstances to those of 1911, a century ago. Even
in the wealthier countries, the average person had little formal education,
worked six days a week or more, often at hard physical labor, never took
vacations, and could not access most of the world’s culture. The living
standards of Carnegie and Rockefeller towered above those of typical Americans,
not just in terms of money but also in terms of comfort. Most people today may
not articulate this truth to themselves in so many words, but they sense it
keenly enough. So when average people read about or see income inequality, they
don’t feel the moral outrage that radiates from the more passionate egalitarian
quarters of society. Instead, they think their lives are pretty good and that
they either earned through hard work or lucked into a healthy share of the
American dream. (The persistently unemployed, of course, are a different matter,
and I will return to them later.) It is pretty easy to convince a lot
of Americans that unemployment and poverty are social problems because discrete
examples of both are visible on the evening news, or maybe even in or at the
periphery of one’s own life. It’s much harder to get those same people worked up
about generalized measures of inequality.
This
is why, for example, large numbers of Americans oppose the idea of an estate tax
even though the current form of the tax, slated to return in 2011, is very
unlikely to affect them or their estates. In narrowly self-interested terms,
that view may be irrational, but most Americans are unwilling to
frame national issues in terms of rich versus poor.
There’s a great deal of
hostility toward various government bailouts, but the idea of “undeserving”
recipients is the key factor in those feelings. Resentment
against Wall Street gamesters hasn’t spilled over much into resentment against
the wealthy more generally. The bailout for General Motors’ labor unions wasn’t
so popular either—again, obviously not because of any bias against the wealthy
but because a basic sense of fairness was violated. As of November 2010,
congressional Democrats are of a mixed mind as to whether the Bush tax cuts
should expire for those whose annual income exceeds $250,000; that is in large
part because their constituents bear no animus toward
rich people, only toward undeservedly rich people.
A
neglected observation, too, is that envy is usually
local. At least in the United States, most
economic resentment is not directed toward billionaires or high-roller
financiers—not even corrupt ones. It’s directed at the guy down the hall who got
a bigger raise. It’s directed at the husband of your wife’s sister, because the
brand of beer he stocks costs $3 a case more than yours, and so
on. That’s another reason why a lot of people aren’t so
bothered by income or wealth inequality at the macro level. Most of us don’t
compare ourselves to billionaires. Gore Vidal put it honestly: “Whenever
a friend succeeds, a little something in me dies.”
Occasionally
the cynic in me wonders why so many relatively well-off intellectuals lead the
egalitarian charge against the privileges of the wealthy.
One group has the status currency of money and the other has the status currency
of intellect, so might they be competing for overall social regard?
The high status of the
wealthy in America, or for that matter the high status of celebrities, seems to
bother our intellectual class most. That class composes a very
small group, however, so the upshot is that growing income inequality won’t
necessarily have major political implications at the macro level.
What
Matters, What Doesn’t
All
that said, income inequality does matter—for both politics and the economy. To
see how, we must
distinguish between inequality itself and what causes it.
But first let’s review the trends in more detail.
The
numbers are clear: Income inequality has been rising in
the United States, especially at the very top. The data show a big difference
between two quite separate issues, namely income growth at the very top of the
distribution and greater inequality throughout the distribution. The first trend
is much more pronounced than the second, although the two are often confused.
When
it comes to the first trend, the share of pre-tax income earned by
the richest 1 percent of earners has increased from about 8 percent in 1974 to
more than 18 percent in 2007. Furthermore, the richest 0.01 percent (the 15,000
or so richest families) had a share of less than 1 percent in 1974 but more than
6 percent of national income in 2007. As noted, those figures are from pre-tax
income, so don’t look to the George W. Bush tax cuts to explain the pattern.
Furthermore, these gains have been sustained and have evolved over many years,
rather than coming in one or two small bursts between 1974 and
today.1
These
numbers have been challenged on the grounds that, since various tax reforms have
kicked in, individuals now receive their incomes in different and harder to
measure ways, namely through corporate forms, stock options and fringe benefits.
Caution is in order, but the overall trend seems robust. Similar broad patterns
are indicated by different sources, such as studies of executive compensation.
Anecdotal observation suggests extreme and unprecedented returns earned by
investment bankers, fired CEOs, J.K. Rowling and Tiger Woods.
At the
same time, wage
growth for the median earner has slowed since 1973. But that
slower wage growth has afflicted large numbers of Americans, and it is
conceptually distinct from the higher relative share of top income earners. For
instance, if you
take the 1979–2005 period, the average incomes of the bottom fifth of households
increased only 6 percent while the incomes of the middle quintile rose by 21
percent. That’s a widening of the spread of incomes, but
it’s not so drastic compared to the explosive gains at the very top.
The
broader change in income distribution, the one occurring beneath the very top
earners, can be deconstructed in a manner that makes nearly all of it look
harmless. For instance, there is usually greater inequality of income among both
older people and the more highly educated, if only because there is more time
and more room for fortunes to vary. Since America is becoming both older
and more highly educated, our measured income inequality will increase pretty
much by demographic fiat. Economist Thomas Lemieux at the University of British
Columbia estimates that these demographic effects explain three-quarters of the
observed rise in income inequality for men, and even more for women.2
Attacking
the problem from a different angle, other economists are challenging
whether there is much growth in inequality at all below the super-rich. For
instance, real incomes are measured using a common price index, yet poorer
people are more likely to shop at discount outlets like Wal-Mart, which have
seen big price drops over the past twenty
years.3 Once we take this behavior into
account, it is unclear whether the real income gaps between the poor and middle
class have been widening much at all. Robert J. Gordon, an economist from
Northwestern University who is hardly known as a right-wing apologist, wrote in
a recent paper that “there was no increase of inequality after 1993 in the
bottom 99 percent of the population”, and that whatever overall change there was
“can be entirely explained by the behavior of income in the top 1
percent.”4
And so
we come again to the gains of the top earners, clearly the big story told by the
data. It’s worth
noting that over this same period of time, inequality of work hours increased
too. The top earners worked a lot more and
most other Americans worked somewhat less. That’s another reason why high
earners don’t occasion more resentment: Many people understand how hard they
have to work to get there. It also seems that most of the
income gains of the top earners were related to performance pay—bonuses, in
other words—and not wildly out-of-whack yearly salaries.5
It is
also the case that any society with a lot of “threshold earners” is likely to
experience growing income inequality. A threshold earner is someone who seeks to
earn a certain amount of money and no more. If
wages go up, that person will respond by seeking less work or by working less
hard or less often. That person simply wants to “get by” in terms of absolute
earning power in order to experience other gains in the form of leisure—whether
spending time with friends and family, walking in the woods and so
on. Luck aside, that
person’s income will never rise much above the threshold.
It’s
not obvious what causes the percentage of threshold earners to rise or fall, but
it seems reasonable to suppose that the more single-occupancy households there
are, the more threshold earners there will be, since a major incentive for
earning money is to use it to take care of other people with whom one lives. For
a variety of reasons, single-occupancy households in the United States are at an
all-time high. There
are also a growing number of late odyssey years graduate students who try to
cover their own expenses but otherwise devote their time to study. If the
percentage of threshold earners rises for whatever reasons, however, the
aggregate gap between them and the more financially ambitious will widen.
There is nothing
morally or practically wrong with an increase in inequality from a source such
as that.
The
funny thing is this: For years, many cultural critics in and of the United
States have been telling us that Americans should behave more like threshold
earners. We
should be less harried, more interested in nurturing friendships, and more
interested in the non-commercial sphere of life. That may well be good advice.
Many studies suggest that above a certain level more money brings only marginal
increments of happiness. What isn’t so widely advertised is that those same critics have basically
been telling us, without realizing it, that we should be acting in such a manner
as to increase measured income inequality. Not only is high inequality an
inevitable concomitant of human diversity, but growing income inequality may be,
too, if lots of us take the kind of advice that will make us happier.
Lonely
at the Top?
Why is
the top 1 percent doing so well?
The
use of micro-data now makes it possible to trace some high earners by income and
thus construct a partial picture of what is going on among the upper echelons of
the distribution. Steven N. Kaplan and Joshua Rauh have
recently provided a detailed estimation of particular American
incomes.6 Their data do not comprise the entire
U.S. population, but from partial financial records they find a very strong role
for the financial sector in driving the trend toward income concentration at the
top. For instance, for 2004, nonfinancial executives of publicly traded
companies accounted for less than 6 percent of the top 0.01 percent income
bracket. In that same year, the top 25 hedge fund managers combined appear to
have earned more than all of the CEOs from the entire S&P
500. The number of Wall Street investors earning more than $100
million a year was nine times higher than the public company executives earning
that amount. The authors also relate that they shared their estimates with a
former U.S. Secretary of the Treasury, one who also has a Wall Street
background. He thought their estimates of earnings in the financial sector were,
if anything, understated.
Many
of the other high earners are also connected to finance. After Wall Street, Kaplan and Rauh
identify the legal sector as a contributor to the growing spread in earnings at
the top. Yet many high-earning lawyers are doing financial
deals, so a lot of the income generated through legal activity is rooted in
finance. Other lawyers are defending corporations against lawsuits, filing
lawsuits or helping corporations deal with complex regulations. The returns to
these activities are an artifact of the growing complexity of the law and
government growth rather than a tale of markets per se. Finance
aside, there isn’t
much of a story of market failure here, even if we don’t find
the results aesthetically appealing.
When
it comes to professional athletes and celebrities, there isn’t much of a mystery
as to what has happened. Tiger Woods earns much more, even adjusting for
inflation, than Arnold Palmer ever did. J.K. Rowling, the first billionaire
author, earns much more than did Charles Dickens. These high incomes come, on
balance, from the greater reach of modern communications and marketing.
Kids
all over the world read about Harry Potter. There is more purchasing power to
spend on children’s books and, indeed, on culture and celebrities more
generally. For
high-earning celebrities, hardly anyone finds these earnings so morally
objectionable as to suggest that they be politically actionable.
Cultural critics can complain that good schoolteachers earn too little, and they
may be right, but that does not make celebrities into political targets. They’re
too popular. It’s also
pretty clear that most of them work hard to earn their money, by persuading fans
to buy or otherwise support their product. Most of these individuals do not come
from elite or extremely privileged backgrounds, either. They
worked their way to the top, and even if Rowling is not an author for the ages,
her books tapped into the spirit of their time in a special way. We may or may
not wish to tax the wealthy, including wealthy celebrities, at higher rates,
but there is no need to
“cure” the structural causes of higher celebrity incomes.
If we
are looking for objectionable problems in the top 1 percent of income earners,
much of it boils down to finance and activities related to financial markets.
And to be sure, the high incomes in finance should give us all pause.
The
first factor driving high returns is sometimes called by practitioners “going
short on volatility.” Sometimes it is called “negative skewness.” In plain
English, this means that some investors opt for a strategy of betting against
big, unexpected moves in market prices. Most of the time investors will do well
by this strategy, since big, unexpected moves are outliers by definition.
Traders will earn
above-average returns in good times. In bad times they won’t suffer fully when
catastrophic returns come in, as sooner or later is bound to happen, because the
downside of these bets is partly socialized onto the Treasury, the Federal
Reserve and, of course, the taxpayers and the unemployed.
To
understand how this strategy works, consider an example from sports betting. The
NBA’s Washington Wizards are a perennially hapless team that rarely gets beyond
the first round of the playoffs, if they make the playoffs at all. This year the
odds of the Wizards winning the NBA title will likely clock in at longer than a
hundred to one. I could, as a gambling strategy, bet against the Wizards and
other low-quality teams each year. Most years I would earn a decent profit, and
it would feel like I was earning money for virtually nothing. The Los Angeles
Lakers or Boston Celtics or some other quality team would win the title again
and I would collect some surplus from my bets. For many years I would earn
excess returns relative to the market as a whole.
Yet
such bets are not wise over the long run. Every now and then a surprise team
does win the title and in those years I would lose a huge amount of money. Even
the Washington Wizards (under their previous name, the Capital Bullets) won the
title in 1977–78 despite compiling a so-so 44–38 record during the regular
season, by marching through the playoffs in spectacular fashion. So if you bet against unlikely
events, most of the time you will look smart and have the money to validate the
appearance. Periodically, however, you will look very bad. Does that kind of
pattern sound familiar? It happens in finance, too. Betting
against a big decline in home prices is analogous to betting against the
Wizards. Every now and then such a bet will blow up in your face, though in most
years that trading activity will generate above-average profits and big bonuses
for the traders and CEOs.
To
this mix we can add the fact that many money managers are investing other
people’s money. If
you plan to stay with an investment bank for ten years or less, most of the
people playing this investing strategy will make out very well most of the time.
Everyone’s time horizon is a bit limited and you will bring in some nice years
of extra returns and reap nice bonuses. And let’s say the whole thing does blow
up in your face? What’s the worst that can happen? Your bosses fire you, but you
will still have millions in the bank and that MBA from Harvard or Wharton.
For the people actually
investing the money, there’s barely any downside risk other than having to quit
the party early. Furthermore, if everyone else made more or less
the same mistake (very surprising major events, such as a busted housing market,
affect virtually everybody), you’re hardly disgraced. You might even get rehired
at another investment bank, or maybe a hedge fund, within months or even weeks.
Moreover, smart shareholders will acquiesce to
or even encourage these gambles. They gain on the upside, while the downside,
past the point of bankruptcy, is borne by the firm’s creditors. And will the
bondholders object? Well, they might have a difficult time monitoring the
internal trading operations of financial institutions. Of course, the firm’s
trading book cannot be open to competitors, and that means it cannot be open to
bondholders (or even most shareholders) either. So what, exactly, will they have
in hand to object to?
Perhaps
more important, government bailouts minimize the damage to creditors on the
downside.
Neither the Treasury
nor the Fed allowed creditors to take any losses from the collapse of the
major banks during the financial crisis. The U.S. government
guaranteed these loans, either explicitly or implicitly.
Guaranteeing
the debt also encourages equity holders to take more risk. While current
bailouts have not in general maintained equity values, and while share prices
have often fallen to near zero following the bust of a major bank, the bailouts
still give the bank a lifeline. Instead of the bank being destroyed, sometimes
those equity prices do climb back out of the hole. This is true of the major
surviving banks in the United States, and even AIG is paying back its
bailout. For better
or worse, we’re handing out free options on recovery, and that encourages banks
to take more risk in the first place.
In
short, there is an unholy dynamic of short-term trading and investing, backed up
by bailouts and risk reduction from the government and the Federal
Reserve.
This is not
good. “Going short on volatility” is a dangerous strategy
from a social point of view. For one thing, in so-called normal times, the
finance sector attracts a big chunk of the smartest, most hard-working and most
talented individuals. That represents a huge human capital opportunity cost to
society and the economy at large. But more immediate and more important, it
means that banks take far too many risks and go way out on a limb, often in
correlated fashion. When their bets turn sour, as they did in 2007–09, everyone
else pays the price.
And
it’s not just the taxpayer cost of the bailout that stings. The financial
disruption ends up throwing a lot of people out of work down the economic food
chain, often for long periods.
Furthermore, the Federal Reserve System has recapitalized major U.S. banks by
paying interest on bank reserves and by keeping an unusually high interest rate
spread, which allows banks to borrow short from Treasury at near-zero rates and
invest in other higher-yielding assets and earn back lots of money rather
quickly. In essence,
we’re allowing banks to earn their way back by arbitraging interest rate spreads
against the U.S. government. This is rarely called a bailout and
it doesn’t count as a normal budget item, but it is a bailout nonetheless. This
type of implicit bailout brings high social costs by slowing down economic
recovery (the interest rate spreads require tight monetary policy) and by
redistributing income from the Treasury to the major banks.
The
more one studies financial theory, the more one realizes how many different ways
there are to construct a “going short on volatility” investment position. To an
outsider, even to seasoned bank regulators, the net position of a bank or hedge
fund may well be impossible to discern. It’s not easy to unpack a balance sheet
with hundreds of billions of dollars on it and with numerous hedged, offsetting,
leveraged, or off-balance-sheet positions. Those who pack it usually know what’s
inside, but not always. In some cases, traders may not even know they are going
short on volatility. They just do what they have seen others do. Their peers who
try such strategies very often have Jaguars and homes in the Hamptons. What’s
not to like?
The
upshot of all this for our purposes is that the “going short on volatility”
strategy increases income inequality. In
normal years the financial sector is flush with cash and high earnings. In
implosion years a lot of the losses are borne by other sectors of society. In
other words, financial crisis begets income inequality. Despite being conceptually distinct
phenomena, the political economy of income inequality is, in part, the political
economy of finance. Simon Johnson tabulates the numbers nicely:
From
1973 to 1985, the financial sector never earned more than 16 percent of domestic
corporate profits. In 1986, that figure reached 19 percent. In the 1990s, it
oscillated between 21 percent and 30 percent, higher than it had ever been in
the postwar period. This decade, it reached 41 percent. Pay rose just as
dramatically. From 1948 to 1982, average compensation in the financial sector
ranged between 99 percent and 108 percent of the average for all domestic
private industries. From 1983, it shot upward, reaching 181 percent in
2007.7
If
you’re wondering, right before the Great Depression of the 1930s, bank profits
and finance-related earnings were also especially high.8
There’s
a second reason why the financial sector abets income inequality: the “moving
first” issue. Let’s say that some news hits the market and that traders
interpret this news at different speeds. One trader figures out what the news
means in a second, while the other traders require five seconds. Still other
traders require an entire day or maybe even a month to figure things out. The
early traders earn the extra money. They buy the proper assets early, at the
lower prices, and reap most of the gains when the other, later traders pile on.
Similarly, if you buy into a successful tech company in the early stages, you
are “moving first” in a very effective manner, and you will capture most of the
gains if that company hits it big.
The
moving-first phenomenon sums to a “winner-take-all”
market. Only
some relatively small number of traders, sometimes just one trader, can be
first. Those who are first will make far more than those who are fourth or
fifth. This difference will persist, even if those who are fourth come pretty
close to competing with those who are first. In this context, first is first and
it doesn’t matter much whether those who come in fourth pile on a month, a
minute or a fraction of a second later. Those who bought (or sold, as the case
may be) first have captured and locked in most of the available gains. Since
gains are concentrated among the early winners, and the closeness of the
runner-ups doesn’t so much matter for income distribution, asset-market trading
thus encourages the ongoing concentration of wealth. Many investors make lots of
mistakes and lose their money, but each year brings a new bunch of projects that
can turn the early investors and traders into very wealthy individuals.
These
two features of the problem—“going short on volatility” and “getting there
first”—are related. Let’s say that Goldman Sachs regularly secures a lot of the
best and quickest trades, whether because of its quality analysis, inside
connections or high-frequency trading apparatus (it has all three). It builds up
a treasure chest of profits and continues to hire very sharp traders and to
receive valuable information. Those profits allow it to make “short on
volatility” bets faster than anyone else, because if it messes up, it still has
a large enough buffer to pad losses. This increases the odds that Goldman will
repeatedly pull in spectacular profits.
Still,
every now and then Goldman will go bust, or would go bust if not for government
bailouts. But the odds are in any given year that it won’t because of the
advantages it and other big banks have. It’s as if the major banks have tapped a
hole in the social till and they are drinking from it with a straw. In any given
year, this practice may seem tolerable—didn’t the bank earn the money fair and
square by a series of fairly normal looking trades? Yet over time this situation
will corrode productivity, because what the banks do bears almost no resemblance
to a process of getting capital into the hands of those who can make most
efficient use of it. And it leads to periodic financial explosions. That, in
short, is the real problem of income inequality we face today. It’s what
causes the
inequality at the very top of the earning pyramid that has dangerous
implications for the economy as a whole.
A
Fix That Fits?
A
key
lesson to take from all of this is that simply railing against income inequality
doesn’t get us very far. We have to find a way to prevent or limit major banks
from repeatedly going short on volatility at social expense. No one has figured
out how to do that yet.
It
remains to be seen whether the new financial regulation bill signed into law
this past summer will help. The bill does have positive features. First, it
forces banks to put up more of their own capital, and thus shareholders will
have more skin in the game, inducing them to curtail their risky investments.
Second, it also limits the trading activities of banks, although to a currently
undetermined extent (many key decisions were kicked into the hands of future
regulators). Third, the new “resolution authority” allows financial regulators
to impose selective losses, for instance, to punish bondholders if they wish.
We’ll
see if these reforms constrain excess risk-taking in the long run. There are
reasons for skepticism. Most of all, the required capital
cushions simply aren’t that high, so a big enough bet against unexpected
outcomes still will yield more financial upside than downside.
Furthermore, high
capital reserve requirements insulate bank managers from the pressures of both
shareholders and bondholders. That could encourage risk-taking and
make the underlying problem worse. Autonomous managers often push for
risk-taking rather than constrain it.
What
about controlling bank risk-taking directly with tight government oversight?
That is not practical.
There are more ways for banks to take risks than even knowledgeable regulators
can possibly control; it just isn’t that easy to oversee a
balance sheet with hundreds of billions of dollars on it, especially when
short-term positions are wound down before quarterly inspections. It’s also not
clear how well regulators can identify risky assets. Some of the worst excesses of the
financial crisis were grounded in mortgage-backed assets—a very traditional
function of banks—not exotic derivatives trading strategies. Virtually any asset
position can be used to bet long odds, one way or another. It is naive to think
that underpaid, undertrained regulators can keep up with financial traders,
especially when the latter stand to earn billions by circumventing the intent of
regulations while remaining within the letter of the law.
It’s a
familiar story, repeated many times in the past. If one recalls the Basel I
capital agreements for banks, the view was that we would make banks safer by
inducing them to hold a lot of AAA-rated mortgage-backed assets. How well did
that work out? So, with no disrespect to the regulators or the sponsors of the
recent bill, it is hardly clear that enhanced regulation will solve the basic
problem.
For
the time being, we
need to accept the possibility that the financial sector has learned how to game
the American (and UK-based) system of state capitalism.
It’s no longer
obvious that the system is stable at a macro level, and extreme income
inequality at the top has been one result of that imbalance. Income inequality
is a symptom, however, rather than a cause of the real
problem. The root cause of income inequality,
viewed in the most general terms, is extreme human ingenuity, albeit of a
perverse kind. That is why it is so hard to control.
Another
root cause of growing inequality is that the modern world, by so limiting our
downside risk, makes extreme risk-taking all too comfortable and easy.
More risk-taking will
mean more inequality, sooner or later, because winners always emerge from
risk-taking. Yet bankers who take bad risks
(provided those risks are legal) simply do not end up with bad outcomes in any
absolute sense. They still have millions in the bank, lots of human capital and
plenty of social status. We’re not going to bring back torture, trial by
ordeal or debtors’ prisons, nor should we. Yet the threat of impoverishment and
disgrace no longer looms the way it once did, so we no longer can constrain
excess financial risk-taking. It’s too soft and cushy a world.
That’s
an underappreciated way to think about our modern, wealthy economy: Smart people
have greater reach than ever before, and nothing really can go so wrong for
them. As a broad-based portrait of the new world, that sounds pretty good, and
usually it is. Just keep in mind that every now and then those smart people will
be making—collectively—some pretty big mistakes.
How
about a world with no bailouts? Why don’t we simply eliminate the safety net for
clueless or unlucky risk-takers so that losses equal gains overall? That’s a
good idea in principle, but it is hard to put into practice. Once a financial
crisis arrives, politicians will seek to limit the damage, and that means they
will bail out major financial institutions. Had we not passed TARP and related
policies, the United States probably would have faced unemployment rates of 25
percent of higher, as in the Great Depression. The political consequences would not
have been pretty. Bank bailouts may sound quite interventionist, and indeed
they are, but in relative terms they probably were the most libertarian policy
we had on tap. It meant big one-time expenses, but, for the most part, it kept
government out of the real economy (the General Motors bailout aside).
So what
will happen next? One worry is that banks are currently undercapitalized and
will seek out or create a new bubble within the next few years, again pursuing
the upside risk without so much equity to lose. A second perspective is that
banks are sufficiently chastened for the time being but that economic turmoil in
Europe and China has not yet played itself out, so perhaps we still have seen
only the early stages of what will prove to be an even bigger international
financial crisis. Adherents of this view often analogize 2009–10 to 1929–32,
when many people thought that negative economic shocks had stopped and recovery
was underway. In 2006, banks were gambling on the housing market, and maybe
today they are, as the result of earlier decisions, gambling on China and Europe
staying in one economic piece.
A
third view is perhaps most likely. We probably don’t have any solution to the
hazards created by our financial sector, not because plutocrats are preventing
our political system from adopting appropriate remedies, but because we don’t
know what those remedies are. Yet
neither is another crisis immediately upon us. The underlying dynamic favors
excess risk-taking, but banks at the current moment fear the scrutiny of
regulators and the public and so are playing it fairly safe. They are sitting on
money rather than lending it out. The biggest risk today is how few parties will take
risks, and, in part, the caution of banks is driving our current protracted
economic slowdown. According to this view, the long run will bring another
financial crisis once moods pick up and external scrutiny weakens, but that day
of reckoning is still some ways off.
Is the
overall picture a shame? Yes. Is it distorting resource distribution and
productivity in the meantime? Yes. Will it again bring our economy to its knees?
Probably. Maybe that’s simply the price of modern society. Income inequality
will likely continue to rise and we will search in vain for the appropriate
political remedies for our underlying problems.
http://www.freerepublic.com/focus/news/2336385/posts
Understanding Poverty in
America (What the Census doesn’t count when reporting on the
“poor.”)
National Review
^ | 9/10/2009 | Robert Rector
Posted
on Thursday, September 10, 2009 10:26:33 AM by SeekAndFind
Today,
the U.S. Census Bureau will release its annual poverty report. The report is
expected to show an increase in poverty in 2008 due to the onset of the
recession. It is no surprise that poverty goes up in a recession. What is
surprising is that every year for nearly three decades, in good economic times
and bad, Census has reported more than 30 million Americans living in poverty.
What
does it mean to be “poor” in America? For the average reader, the word poverty
implies significant physical hardship — for example, the lack of a warm,
adequate home, nutritious food, or reasonable clothing for one’s children. By
that measure, very few of the 30 million plus individuals defined as “living in
poverty” by the government are actually poor. Real hardship does occur, but it
is limited in scope and severity.
The
average person identified as “poor” by the government has a living standard far
higher than the public imagines. According to the government’s own surveys, the
typical “poor” American has cable or satellite TV, two color TVs, and a DVD
player or VCR. He has air conditioning, a car, a microwave, a refrigerator,
a stove, and a clothes washer and dryer. He is able to obtain medical care when
needed. His home is in good repair and is not overcrowded. By his own report,
his family is not hungry, and he had sufficient funds in the past year to meet
his family’s essential needs. While this individual’s life is not affluent, it
is far from the images of dire poverty conveyed by liberal activists and
politicians.
Various
government reports contain the following facts about persons defined as “poor”
by the Census Bureau:
Nearly
40 percent of all poor households actually own their own homes. On average,
this is a three-bedroom house with one-and-a-half baths, a garage, and a porch
or patio.
Eighty-four
percent of poor households have air conditioning. By contrast, in 1970, only 36
percent of the entire U.S. population enjoyed air conditioning.
Nearly
two-thirds of the poor have cable or satellite TV.
Only 6
percent of poor households are overcrowded; two-thirds have more than two
rooms per person.
The
typical poor American has as much or more living space than the average
individual living in most European countries. (These comparisons are to the
average citizens in foreign countries, not to those classified as poor.)
Nearly
three-quarters of poor households own a car; 31 percent own two or more cars.
Ninety-eight
percent of poor households have a color television; two-thirds own two or more
color televisions.
Eighty-two
percent own microwave ovens; 67 percent have a DVD player; 73 percent have a
VCR; 47 percent have a computer.
The
average intake of protein, vitamins, and minerals by poor children is
indistinguishable from that of children in the upper middle class. Poor boys
today at ages 18 and 19 are actually taller and heavier than middle-class boys
of similar age were in the late 1950s. They are a full inch taller and ten
pounds heavier than the GIs who stormed the beaches of Normandy during World War
II.
Conventional
accounts of poverty not only exaggerate hardship, they also underestimate
government spending on the poor. In 2008, federal and state governments spent
$714 billion (or 5 percent of the total economy) on means-tested welfare aid,
providing cash, food, housing, medical care, and targeted social services to
poor and low-income Americans. (This sum does not include Social Security or
Medicare.) If converted into cash, this aid would be nearly four times the
amount needed to eliminate poverty in the U.S. by raising the incomes of all
poor households above the federal poverty levels.
How can
the government spend so much and still have such high levels of apparent
poverty? The answer is that, in measuring poverty and inequality, Census ignores
almost the entire welfare state. Census deems a household poor if its income
falls below federally specified levels. But in its regular measurements, Census
counts only around 4 percent of total welfare spending as “income.” Because of
this, government spending on the poor can expand almost infinitely without
having any detectable impact on official poverty or inequality.
Also
missing in most Washington discussions about the poor is an acknowledgement of
the behavioral causes of official poverty. For example, families with children
become poor primarily because of low levels of parental work and high levels of
out-of-wedlock childbearing with accompanying single parenthood.
Even in
the best economic times, the typical poor family with children has, on average,
only 16 hours of work per week. Little work equals little income equals more
poverty. Nearly two-thirds of poor children live in single-parent homes, a
condition that has been promoted by the astonishing growth of out-of-wedlock
childbearing in low-income communities. When the War on Poverty began, 7 percent
of American children were born outside marriage; today the number is 39 percent.
President
Obama is pursuing his agenda to “spread the wealth” through massive hikes in
welfare spending financed by unprecedented increases in the federal debt. Before
we further expand the welfare state and pile even greater indebtedness on our
children, we need a more honest assessment of current anti-poverty spending and
the actual living conditions of the “poor.”
—
Robert Rector is a senior research fellow at the Heritage Foundation.
When President Obama announced a two-year stay
of execution for taxpayers on Dec. 7, he made it clear that he intends to spend
those two years campaigning for higher marginal tax rates on dividends, capital
gains and salaries for couples earning more than $250,000. "I don't see how the
Republicans win that argument," said the president.
Despite the deficit commission's call for tax
reform with fewer tax credits and lower marginal tax rates, the left wing of the
Democratic Party remains passionate about making the U.S. tax system more and
more progressive. They claim this is all about payback—that raising the highest
tax rates is the fair thing to do because top income groups supposedly received
huge windfalls from the Bush tax cuts. As the headline of a Robert Creamer
column in the Huffington Post put it: "The Crowd that Had the Party Should Pick
up the Tab."
Arguments for these retaliatory tax penalties
invariably begin with estimates by economists Thomas Piketty of the Paris School
of Economics and Emmanuel Saez of U.C. Berkeley that the wealthiest 1% of U.S.
households now take home more than 20% of all household
income.
View Full Image
Images.com/Corbis
This estimate suffers two obvious and fatal
flaws. The first is that the "more than 20%" figure does not refer to "take
home" income at all. It refers to income before taxes (including capital gains)
as a share of income before transfers. Such figures tell us nothing about
whether the top percentile pays too much or too little in income
taxes.
In The Journal of Economic Perspectives (Winter
2007), Messrs. Piketty and Saez estimated that "the upper 1% of the income
distribution earned 19.6% of total income before tax [in 2004], and paid 41% of
the individual federal income tax." No other major country is so dependent on so
few taxpayers.
A 2008 study of 24 leading economies by the
Organization of Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) concludes that,
"Taxation is most progressively distributed in the United States, probably
reflecting the greater role played there by refundable tax credits, such as the
Earned Income Tax Credit and the Child Tax Credit. . . . Taxes tend to be least
progressive in the Nordic countries (notably, Sweden), France and Switzerland."
The OECD study—titled "Growing Unequal?"—also
found that the ratio of taxes paid to income received by the top 10% was by far
the highest in the U.S., at 1.35, compared to 1.1 for France, 1.07 for Germany,
1.01 for Japan and 1.0 for Sweden (i.e., the top decile's share of Swedish taxes
is the same as their share of income).
A second fatal flaw is that the large share of
income reported by the upper 1% is largely a consequence of lower tax rates. In
a 2010 paper on top incomes co-authored with Anthony Atkinson of Nuffield
College, Messrs. Piketty and Saez note that "higher top marginal tax rates can
reduce top reported earnings." They say "all studies" agree that higher "top
marginal tax rates do seem to negatively affect top income
shares."
What appears to be an increase in top incomes
reported on individual tax returns is often just a predictable taxpayer reaction
to lower tax rates. That should be readily apparent from the nearby table, which
uses data from Messrs. Piketty and Saez to break down the real incomes of the
top 1% by source (excluding interest income and rent).
The first column ("salaries") shows average
labor income among the top 1% reported on W2 forms—from salaries, bonuses and
exercised stock options. A Dec. 13 New York Times article, citing Messrs.
Piketty and Saez, claims, "A big reason for the huge gains at the top is the
outsize pay of executives, bankers and traders." On the contrary, the table
shows that average real pay among the top 1% was no higher at the 2007 peak than
it had been in 1999.
In a January 2008 New York Times article,
Austan Goolsbee (now chairman of the President's Council of Economic Advisers)
claimed that "average real salaries (subtracting inflation) for the top 1% of
earners . . . have been growing rapidly regardless of what happened to tax
rates." On the contrary, the top 1% did report higher salaries after the
mid-2003 reduction in top tax rates, but not by enough to offset losses of the
previous three years. By examining the sources of income Mr. Goolsbee chose to
ignore—dividends, capital gains and business income—a powerful taxpayer response
to changing tax rates becomes quite clear.
The second column,
for example, shows real capital gains reported in taxable accounts. President
Obama proposes raising the capital gains tax to 20% on top incomes after the
two-year reprieve is over. Yet the chart shows that the top 1% reported fewer
capital gains in the tech-stock euphoria of 1999-2000 (when the tax rate was
20%) than during the middling market of 2006-2007. It is doubtful so many gains
would have been reported in 2006-2007 if the tax rate had been 20%. Lower tax
rates on capital gains increase the frequency of asset sales and thus result in
more taxable capital gains on tax returns.
The third column shows a near tripling of
average dividend income from 2002 to 2007. That can only be explained as a
behavioral response to the sharp reduction in top tax rates on dividends, to 15%
from 38.6%. Raising the dividend tax to 20% could easily yield no additional
revenue if it resulted in high-income investors holding fewer dividend- paying
stocks and more corporations using stock buybacks rather than dividends to
reward stockholders.
The last column of the table shows average
business income reported on the top 1% of individual tax returns by subchapter S
corporations, partnerships, proprietorships and many limited liability
companies. After the individual tax rate was brought down to the level of the
corporate tax rate in 2003, business income reported on individual tax returns
became quite large. For the Obama team to argue that higher taxes on individual
incomes would have little impact on business denies these facts.
If individual tax
rates were once again pushed above corporate rates, some firms, farms and
professionals would switch to reporting income on corporate tax forms to shelter
retained earnings. As with dividends and capital gains, this is another reason
that estimated revenues from higher tax rates are
unbelievable.
The Piketty and
Saez estimates are irrelevant to questions about income distribution because
they exclude taxes and transfers. What those figures do show, however, is that
if tax rates on high incomes, capital gains and dividends were increased in
2013, the top 1%'s reported share of before-tax income would indeed go way down.
That would be partly because of reduced effort, investment and entrepreneurship.
Yet simpler ways of reducing reported income can leave the after-tax income
about the same (switching from dividend-paying stocks to tax-exempt bonds, or
holding stocks for years).
Once higher tax rates cause the top 1% to
report less income, then top taxpayers would likely pay a much smaller share of
taxes, just as they do in, say, France or Sweden. That would be an ironic
consequence of listening to economists and journalists who form strong opinions
about tax policy on the basis of an essentially irrelevant statistic about what
the top 1%'s share might be if there were not taxes or transfers.
Mr. Reynolds is a senior fellow at the Cato
Institute and the author of "Income and Wealth" (Greenwood Press 2006).
WSJ
econ blog Feb 18, 2011
12:52 PM
By
Michael Casey
The
widely quoted and influential director of the Peterson
Institute for International Economics in
Washington, Fred
Bergsten has
until recently been one of the most prominent critics of China’s policy of
intervening in foreign exchange markets to weaken its currency. Now he thinks
progress is finally being made to resolve this acrimonious dispute between the
U.S. and China. In an article he wrote for the Institute’s website last week, he
said that a “breakthrough” appeared to have been made because of a combination
of Chinese inflation and the gradual appreciation in the yuan’s nominal exchange
rate to the dollar since mid-2010, which is putting the inflation-adjusted
exchange rate on track to achieve a needed correction of 20 to 30% over the next
two to three years.
You recently wrote that the
combination of inflation and gradual appreciation in the Chinese yuan’s exchange
rate could be achieving a “breakthrough” in terms of U.S. demands for an
increase in Chinese competitiveness. You said the increase in the
inflation-adjusted real exchange rate was now in line with the trend that’s
expected of China over the next two years. Can you
explain?
Bergsten: The real
[inflation-adjusted] renmimbi exchange rate has appreciated against the dollar
at an annual rate of about 12% since last June, although considerably less on a
trade-weighted basis. The dollar has fallen against most other currencies, so on
a trade-weighted basis, the renmimbi has risen less. On the other hand, one has
to accept that the Chinese think of this totally in dollar terms. So the dollar
exchange rate is a legitimate focus for them, and if you believe that the dollar
is going to bounce around and come back over time it will drag the renmimbi back
up with it [against those other currencies.]
They
have been letting [the real exchange rate] go up an average of 10 to 12% on an
annual basis so it’s fair to say that if they would let that continue for
another couple of years they would achieve a restoration of underlying
equilibrium in the exchange rate. That would take away most, if not all, of the
distortions that their persistent interventions have created.
About
four months ago, you estimated that the yuan was 30% undervalued, and many
commentators read that as a strong critique of China’s exchange rate policy.
Have the changes over past four months improved things enough for the U.S. to
accept that the policy of deliberate undervaluation has
changed?
Bergsten: During its
previous period of appreciation [between 2005 and 2008] the renmimbi went up 20
to 25% in a period of two and half years. I suggested recently that the goal
should be the same amount this time and [Treasury Secretary Timothy]
Geithner
seemed to endorse this. I took that as a kind of wide agreement
on what the outcome should be.
You’re
talking about real exchange rate adjustments in which inflation plays a key
role. Surely it would be China’s and other countries’ interests to have this
adjustment take place through the nominal exchange rate and avoid the
disruptions that inflation could cause in the world’s second biggest
economy?
Bergsten:
Yes, especially given
China’s history of hyperinflation, it would be far better to adjust via the
nominal rate. It has always surprised me that they seem to prefer to do part of
it through inflation. And now that they are really worried about inflation,
which has become the focal point of their economic policy, this would be the
perfect time for them to let the currency adjust. They know the
currency is going to adjust over time anyway and it is better to let it happen
through the nominal rate. At the same time, it’s an ideal time for us if they
make the move now because it will help rebalance our external accounts and help
deal with our high unemployment. From the standpoint of both sides there
couldn’t be a better time to adjust the nominal exchange rate for the
renmimbi.
Surely
other countries aren’t happy about China basing its appreciation policy solely
on the dollar exchange rate when the dollar itself is falling sharply against
other currencies, especially emerging market currencies.
Bergsten: One of the
reasons the Chinese are moving now is because they have gotten a pretty wide
array of complaints from other emerging markets — from Brazil, from India, from
Mexico and others. They have been quite pointed in their criticism. Most of them
have respected China’s desire not to be criticized publicly, so they do it
privately. I’ve been in on some of those discussions, recently at Davos, for
example. There is a lot of pressure on the Chinese from other emerging market
countries.
Irish mist
Feb 17th 2011 | from PRINT EDITION Economist
THE
story of Ireland is like a fairy tale: from rags to riches and back to rags
again. Twenty-five years ago Ireland was mired in a deep peat bog of slow
growth, high emigration and shocking poverty. Then came the miracle of the
“Celtic Tiger”, which briefly made Ireland the second-richest country in the
European Union. But hubris was followed by nemesis, as a frothy boom turned into
a spectacular bust: the banks were rescued by the government, which in turn has
now had to accept a humiliating bail-out from the EU and the
IMF.
It is little wonder that, in next week’s
general election, angry Irish voters are poised not just to kick out the
government but to give Fianna Fail, haughtily accustomed to being Ireland’s
ruling party, its biggest drubbing since it was founded 85 years ago. Nor is it surprising that many should now
be fretting that the entire Celtic Tiger was an illusion—and that Ireland might
be heading back to the gloom of the 1980s.
Such fears are overstated. Ireland’s people are
experiencing a wrenching recession and a sharp cut in living standards. The
Irish state is going to be weighed down by an intolerably large debt burden. But
if the new government, which seems almost certain to be led by Fine Gael’s Enda
Kenny, follows the right policies, the underlying economy is resilient enough,
and Ireland’s demographic outlook is favourable enough, for it to return to the
path of prosperity.
Related items
Related topics
This is to deny neither the epic scale of the
Irish property bust nor the visible and not-so-visible scars it has left behind
(see article). Clearing up this mess has already cost
Ireland as much as one-seventh of its national income. The immediate concern
for the new government must be its ballooning sovereign debt. Mr Kenny has
promised to renegotiate the penal interest rate that the government is paying
for its bail-out. He will meet fierce Franco-German resistance, but Ireland is
another prompt for the EU, and Germany in particular, to look at a broader,
formal restructuring (including Greece and probably Portugal). Investors know that the current
bail-outs are not sustainable: a plan B is needed. In Ireland’s case a
restructuring should involve a haircut for some bank creditors—and then a lower
interest rate on the debt that is left.
What about the longer term? One priority for the new government ought
to be to root out the cronyism (and its linked party financing) that gave
property developers too much political influence. But Mr Kenny’s main
responsibility is to sustain the policies that first fostered Ireland’s strong
growth. These included encouraging more women into work, keeping tax rates low,
luring foreign (notably American) direct investment and investing in secondary
and higher education. A flexible labour market with sensible trade unions, and
an openness to immigration, have also proved critical in enabling Ireland to cut
real wages and regain some of the competitiveness it has lost against Germany.
It has done this faster than the countries of the southern Mediterranean. In
effect, the Irish have in the past two years carried out an “internal
devaluation” similar to the one that Latvia achieved in 2009. As a result,
exports are already growing and Ireland has moved into a current-account
surplus. Far from seeing Ireland as a case-study in what not to do, the troubled
Mediterranean members of the euro would do well to learn from it.
Is there a risk of some of these sound policies
being jettisoned? For the most part, Mr Kenny will find his hands tied on
macroeconomic matters. Ireland cannot
afford to quit Europe’s single currency, the euro. It will have to comply
with the conditions set by the EU and the IMF for their bail-out, however much
Mr Kenny may grumble about its terms. And surely nobody in Ireland wants to dump
policies that have proved so beneficial to growth.
The
worry lies, rather, in pressure from other countries in the euro. There is talk
in the euro zone of building a stronger social and political counterpart to
monetary union, which might include such notions as harmonised tax bases and
labour laws. The symbolic pinch-point for Ireland is its 12.5% corporate-tax
rate, which France and Germany self-interestedly want to force
up. Their argument is that they are
bailing out a bust Irish government which is holding taxes artificially low
(never mind that Ireland’s low corporate-tax rate yields proportionally bigger
revenues than in most other countries).
Fortunately tax matters are decided by
unanimity in the EU. Mr Kenny and his new government must veto any attempt to
impose a higher corporate-tax rate on Ireland. That would be welcome evidence
that they will stick with the country’s pro-business and pro-growth
policies.
After the race
Feb 17th 2011 | DUBLIN
AND TRALEE | from PRINT EDITION Economist
http://www.economist.com/node/18176072
“THERE’S a craze for land everywhere!” The line
draws wry laughs from audiences in Dublin’s Olympia Theatre at a revival of “The
Field”, John B. Keane’s play about a land dispute in south-west Ireland. Their
country has been transformed since the play was first staged 45 years ago. But
Mr Keane’s lines also belong to a more recent time in Irish
history.
Consider St Michael’s Green, an abandoned
half-built housing estate near the village of Lixnaw, in north Kerry. “Look at
what’s coming soon to Lixnaw”, proclaims a sign at the entrance. Visitors who
take up the offer are met with an apocalyptic sight. Four finished houses,
complete with driveways, stand in line. Windows are broken; shards of glass are
strewn on the ground. Peer (carefully) through the window-frames and you can see
doors hanging from hinges and semi-carpeted floors. Opposite the houses,
surrounded by metal fencing, some of it collapsed, are the exposed foundations
of houses never built. Rubble and rubbish lie everywhere. With wind howling and
rain lashing, it is easy to imagine that you are gazing on the ruins of a failed
civilisation. And in a way you are.
Such “ghost estates” are only the most visible
scars of Ireland’s extraordinary crash, which in four years has turned the
country from Europe’s star performer into a sickly invalid. After a long history
of poverty and unemployment, the Irish thought they had finally transformed
their country into a successful modern state. Now they find themselves saddled
with staggering debts and an international bail-out. Some wonder whether the
country’s achievements in recent years counted for anything at all. How did this
happen? And what comes next?
Related topics
In the
1990s Ireland became the “Celtic Tiger”. Sensible
policies and a benign global economy helped it catch up with European neighbours
that for decades had left it languishing. Between 1993 and 2000 average
annual GDP growth approached 10%. But then someone put speed in
the tiger’s water. Over the last decade the boom turned bubbly, as low interest
rates and reckless lending, abetted by dozy regulation, pushed up land values
and caused Ireland to turn into a nation of property developers. In County
Leitrim, in the Irish Midlands, housing construction outstripped demand (based
on population growth) by 401% between 2006 and 2009, according to one
estimate.
Few minded. The Irish became, by one measure, the
second-richest people in the European Union. “The boom is getting boomier,”
said Bertie Ahern, Ireland’s taoiseach (prime minister), in 2006. The government
began exporting the Celtic Tiger model, telling other small countries that they,
too, could enjoy double-digit growth rates if they followed Ireland’s lead.
People splashed out on foreign holidays, new cars and expensive meals. “We
behaved like a poor person who had won the lottery,” says Nikki Evans, a
businesswoman.
Then it all began to go wrong. Property prices
started sliding in 2006-07, leaving the banks hopelessly exposed. “What happened
in Ireland was very boring,” says Morgan Kelly, an economist at University
College, Dublin, and one of the few observers to have predicted the crash.
“There were no complex derivatives or shadow banking systems. This was a good
old 19th-century, or even 17th-century, banking collapse.” On September 15th
2008 Lehman Brothers tumbled, sending a giant tremor round the world. Two weeks
later, with the share prices of Irish banks in free fall, the government took
the fateful decision to guarantee liabilities worth €400 billion ($572 billion)
at six financial institutions.
The costs of the rescue mounted as the banks’
losses grew, springing a giant hole in the public finances. The banking crisis
had become a sovereign-debt crisis. International investors began to target
Ireland as a weak link in the euro zone, raising its borrowing costs to
unsustainable levels. In November 2010
it became the second country in the euro zone, after Greece, to accept a
bail-out from the EU and the IMF.
“I can’t tell you how depressing it is here
now,” says Anne Enright, a novelist. An austerity budget pushed through to meet
the terms of the €85 billion bail-out is starting to hit pockets. Unemployment
has shot up to 13.4%, wages have fallen and, after a peak-to-trough contraction
of 14% of GDP, the economy is still flatlining. “It’s very demoralising that
this thing has happened when we thought we had arrived at a modern
industrialised society,” says David Begg, general secretary of the Irish
Congress of Trade Unions.
Not everyone welcomed the changes that
prosperity brought. Kevin Barry, a writer who had been living abroad, returned
home to find that “people only spoke about two things: property prices and
commuting times. It was extremely boring.” Ms Evans, who runs PerfectCard, a
pre-paid debit-card business, saw some of her younger staff acquire a sense of
entitlement which made them hard to motivate. (It’s easier now, she
says.)
As
Ireland grew richer, one form of exceptionalism—the fatalistic belief that
Ireland was destined always to be western Europe’s poor outpost—gave way to
another: the myth of the Celtic Tiger.
“We’re very narcissistic,” says Ms Enright. “We believed our boom was better
than anyone else’s.” The twin articles of independent Ireland’s faith,
Catholicism and nationalism, were eclipsed by material ambition: the desire to
get on, to improve one’s station in life. “People lost interest in the other
world while they were so successful in this one,” says Mark Patrick Hederman,
abbot of Glenstal Abbey, near Limerick.
The new Ireland looked attractive to outsiders.
When the country opened itself to new EU members after the 2004 eastward
expansion, Poles and others poured in looking for work (see chart 1). Rather
than resenting the newcomers, many Irish were proud that their country had
become a place people wanted to enter rather than leave. “The country was
welcoming, open, easy-going,” says Monika Sapielak, a Pole who began to visit in
2001 and who now runs a contemporary-arts centre in Dublin. “There was a sense
that anything was possible.” Not any more.
Many people see the economic crisis as a chance
to jettison the baggage of excess that marked the later Tiger years. The first
casualty will be Fianna Fail, the party that presided over the “boomier” years
and, in coalition with the Greens, the subsequent crash. In a general election
on February 25th, voters will boot the party out; the polls suggest it could
fall to third place, behind Fine Gael and the Labour Party.
This
alone is a big story. Fianna Fail is the “natural” party of government in
Ireland: it has been in power for three out of every four years since winning a
landslide victory in 1932, and it has
been the biggest party in parliament ever since. Yet it is hard to detect a
whiff of revolution. The next government will almost certainly be led by Fine
Gael (probably in coalition with Labour), a party with a centre-right platform
not obviously distinct from Fianna Fail’s. (In Ireland’s peculiar politics, the
difference between the two main parties dates from the 1922 civil war, fought
over the terms of independence from the British.) Few believe the party would
have been a more responsible steward of the Celtic Tiger. Enda Kenny, its leader
and probably the next taoiseach, is no more setting Irish hearts alight in this
campaign than in his 36 years in parliament. A telling sign of the mood is that
although 95% of voters say they are unhappy with the government, 16% of them
plan to vote for it.
At this tumultuous time for Europe—deadly riots
in bailed-out Greece, hundreds of thousands marching over pension reform in
France, a general strike in Spain—Ireland’s collapse may be the worst trauma of
all. But apart from a union-led demonstration in Dublin in November, there have
been few outward signs of rage. Why do the Irish seem so
quiescent?
As a small country, Ireland is a hard place to
hide in. Reports abound of disgraced bankers being hounded out of pubs by burned
investors, or Fianna Fail candidates having dogs set on them. “There aren’t that
many strangers in Ireland,” says Ruairi Quinn, a Labour frontbencher. This, some
say, acts as a safety valve, allowing citizens to vent their anger directly
rather than take to the streets.
But it also lends Irish politics an oddly
intimate flavour. National candidates tout achievements that in other countries
would be considered the domain of local councillors. This goes along with a
proportional voting system that forces candidates of the same party to compete
for votes, turning elections into intensely personal contests. “If you’re not
seen to be helping your constituents, you will not be re-elected,” says Martin
Ferris, Sinn Fein TD (member of parliament) for Kerry North.
During a windy canvassing session in a
middle-class area of Tralee, County Kerry’s largest town, many voters say they
will back Mr Ferris because they remember how, seven years ago, he worked to
improve access to local footpaths and tackle anti-social behaviour. Not one
mentions his party’s policies. You would expect this lot to be Fine Gael
supporters, says a party worker, who appears to know them all personally. But Mr
Ferris has won them round. She herself began canvassing for him because of his
community work.
A TD working the campaign trail looks like
democracy in action. But there are problems. Ambitious types do not want to
spend their careers promising to fill in potholes and deliver passports, so they
avoid politics. Moreover, the endless focus on local issues distracts from the
business of running the country. “Politicians say, ‘Elect me and I’ll get you a
swimming pool.’ You’ll get your pool, but there won’t be any money to run it,”
says Damian Loscher of Ipsos MRBI, a market-research agency.
The
radical transformation of Ireland into a globalised economy left some old
attitudes untouched. Voters continued to tolerate levels of misbehaviour and, in
some cases, outright corruption in their politicians that in other countries
would have ended careers. Cronyism flourished, as businessmen, politicians and
bankers sealed themselves off in a cosy world of golf matches, fine dining and
the Fianna Fail tent at the Galway races. “It felt like an old boys’ club,” says Ms Evans—who
had to use personal contacts, too, to get the government’s attention.
When the EU and IMF delegations arrived in
Dublin for bail-out talks last November, the Irish Times ran a
lachrymose editorial asking if this was what the national heroes of the 1916
Easter Rising had died for. Outsiders saw this as a sign of resentment from a
proud nation that was once again having its affairs run by foreigners. Yet the
editorial went on: “The true ignominy…is that we ourselves have squandered [our
sovereignty].” Having seen their leaders make such a mess of things, most Irish
welcome the arrival of technocrats.
Still, one long-term effect of this crisis may
be a cooling of Ireland’s love affair with the EU. When the country joined what
was then the European Economic Community in 1973, children danced in the
streets. Agricultural subsidies and infrastructure funding flooded in from
Brussels. Equal membership in a club of nations was a seal of sovereignty.
Ireland remains more positive about the EU than most other members. But the
Irish have begun to suspect that the “solidarity” they hear so much about from
European leaders does not apply to their troubled economy.
The terms of the European element of the
bail-out arouse particular ire. There is something approaching a consensus in
Ireland that the country rescued Europe (specifically, German and French
investors that had lent heavily to Irish banks) last November, rather than the
other way around. There have been heated exchanges between Irish and EU
politicians over how to apportion the blame for Ireland’s crash. Some compare
Ireland’s bank guarantee unfavourably with Iceland’s decision, after a similar
meltdown in October 2008, to let the banks go to the wall, creditors be damned.
Eyeing an opportunity, the parties that are likely to form the next Irish
government have made extravagant campaign promises about renegotiating the
bail-out package. They may find it difficult to keep them once in office.
Ireland
is not about to adopt the Euroscepticism of its larger neighbour,
Britain. But it is bound to become more
pragmatic. The new government will, for example, fight hard for permission to
impose bank losses on creditors not covered by the 2008 guarantee (something the
European Central Bank rejected during the bail-out negotiations). “The attitude
has shifted from ‘We want to be part of Europe’ to ‘We need to be part of
Europe’,” says Mr Loscher.
One fear is that a growing number of young
people will not be part of Europe at all. Lack of prospects will drive them to
America, Canada or Australia. For at least 150 years, emigration has been the
instinctive Irish response to hardship. Alan Barrett of the Economic and Social
Research Institute (ESRI), a Dublin-based research body, says emigration is to
the Irish what inflation is to the Germans: a trauma formed by economic wounds
inflicted decades ago that still runs deep in the collective memory. The
generation that came of age in the Celtic Tiger years was the first that did not
feel it had to move abroad to thrive. But for now, those days are over.
A
recent report by the ESRI, based on employment forecasts, estimates that a net
100,000 people will leave Ireland between April 2010 and April
2012. That is a lot: at its peak,
the net annual outflow in the 1980s was 44,000. Evidence of the exodus is
already emerging. Work-placement and visa-assistance companies are advertising
widely. Election candidates report that emigration is a big issue on the
doorstep.
Still, many argue that a population willing to
move to where the jobs are is exactly what a country in Ireland’s predicament
needs. Historically, labour mobility has helped to keep a lid on unemployment.
And there have been other benefits: the diaspora, particularly in the United
States, has proved a useful asset for Ireland, politically as well as
economically. Moreover, a move abroad today is hardly the one-way ticket it was
for many in the 19th century. When Ireland started to boom in the 1990s many
émigrés returned home, bringing with them much-needed skills and
capital.
But such arguments will ring largely hollow in
a country where emigration is so strongly linked to feelings of national shame.
“You can talk about the collapse in GNP,” says Mr Barrett, “but the emotional
touchstone of emigration is a major issue. That’s why there is a great sense of
regret.”
In five years’ time Ireland will mark the 100th
anniversary of the Easter Rising. The country will ask itself how far it has
satisfied the hopes of those who fought for its independence. Some fear that the
crash has shown the Celtic Tiger to have been a phantom, an illusionist’s trick
that distracted Ireland from its underlying poverty with glitzy cars and big
houses.
It is
true that Ireland will not soon pull itself from the economic bog. Recovery will
be slow at best, particularly if an inflation-wary ECB starts to jack up
interest rates. Unemployment is likely to stay in double figures for some time.
Some fear that the cost of servicing the debts to the EU and IMF, and of feeding
the insatiable maw of the banks, will eventually force Ireland into a debt
restructuring. This would be a terrible blow to a country desperate to believe
that the worst is over.
Yet
Ireland is not about to return to the dark days of the 1980s. Numerically, the
recession has sent living standards back only to the levels of around 2002 (see
chart 2). The flexible economy will
remain attractive to multinationals seeking a toehold in Europe, especially if
it keeps its low corporate-tax rate. Domestic demand is still depressed—a big
concern. But unlike other troubled
euro-zone countries, Ireland is regaining competitiveness by reducing unit
labour costs. Exports are booming, and there should be a current-account surplus
this year for the first time in over a decade. The demographic outlook is
favourable. “There are no brakes to growth if we can get this thing going,”
says Danny McCoy, head of the Irish Business and Employers
Confederation.
At least as important, despite the fog of gloom
sitting over the country, Ireland has much to be proud of. Not all the gains of the Celtic Tiger
years were squandered. An optimistic, entrepreneurial spirit emerged that will
not be crushed by a few years of recession. Higher education has expanded
dramatically—30% of Irish students are the first in their family to attend
university—as has the labour force. A generation has grown up knowing nothing
but prosperity. This accumulation of expectation and experience makes Ireland a
very different country from the weary, fearful place of the mid-1980s.
Perhaps the most hopeful future for Ireland
lies in becoming, for the first time, an ordinary small European country, with a
properly functioning democratic system and a stable, diversified economy. But
first it must begin to see itself with sober eyes. Kevin Gardiner of Barclays
Wealth, who coined the phrase “Celtic Tiger” in 1994, says that Celts have a nasty habit of extrapolating
both good and bad times for ever (as a Welshman, he dares to make such
generalisations). Just as the Irish suffered a bad bout of irrational exuberance
in the boom years, they have now been overcome by excessive pessimism. Or, as Ms
Enright puts it, “Ireland is a series of stories it tells itself. None of them
are true
http://www.nytimes.com/2011/02/13/business/13view.html?_r=1&ref=business
IN his State of the Union
address last month, President
Obama set the stage for a coming policy debate and his re-election bid with
a catch phrase. Six times, he called on Americans to “win the future.” And he
used the variant “winning the future” three other times. But is this really a
good way to frame the economic challenges we face?
No doubt, the phrase appealed to White House
political advisers and speechwriters. It is always better for presidents to
focus on our future potential than the immutable past. And who doesn’t want to
win? Americans love rooting for their favorite teams, and no contest seems more
vital than that for international economic dominance.
Yet this catch phrase is also problematic. For
one thing, “Winning the Future” was the title of a 2005 book by Newt
Gingrich. It is almost as if Mr. Gingrich were to run for president in 2012
under the banner “Audacious Hope.” And then there is that pesky abbreviated form
of the phrase — WTF — that does not exactly inspire confidence.
More troublesome to me as an economist, though,
is that calling on Americans to “win the future” misleads us about the nature of
the policy choices ahead. Achieving economic prosperity is not like winning a
game, and guiding an economy is not like managing a sports team.
To see why, let’s start with a basic economic
transaction. You have a driveway covered in snow and would be willing to pay $40
to have it shoveled. The boy next door can do it in two hours, or he can spend
that time playing on his Xbox, an activity he values at $20. The solution is
obvious: You offer him $30 to shovel your drive, and he happily agrees.
The key here is that everyone gains from trade.
By buying something for $30 that you value at $40, you get $10 of what
economists call “consumer surplus.” Similarly, your young neighbor gets $10 of
“producer surplus,” because he earns $30 of income by incurring only $20 of
cost. Unlike a sports contest, which by necessity has a winner and a loser, a
voluntary economic transaction between consenting consumers and producers
typically benefits both parties.
This example is not as special as it might
seem. The gains from trade would be much the same if your neighbor were
manufacturing a good — knitting you a scarf, for example — rather than
performing a service. And it would be much the same if, instead of living next
door, he was several thousand miles away, say, in Shanghai.
Listening to the president, you might think that
competition from China and other rapidly growing nations was one of the larger
threats facing the United States. But the essence of economic exchange belies
that description. Other nations are best viewed not as our competitors but as
our trading partners. Partners are to be welcomed, not feared. As a general
matter, their prosperity does not come at our expense.
To be sure, there are exceptions to this rule.
When China uses our intellectual property such as software without paying for
it, we should view that as a form of theft. And when other nations’ economic
growth has side effects on the global environment, as it does when they emit the
greenhouse gases that contribute to climate
change, the United States has good reason for concern. But these limited
exceptions should not blind us into taking a more generally adversarial approach
to international economic relations.
During
the address, Mr. Obama lamented the fact that many foreign students attended
colleges and universities in the United States and then returned to their
countries of origin. “As soon as they obtain advanced degrees, we send them back
home to compete against us,” he said. “It makes no sense.”
The
president is right that we should encourage a greater number of highly educated
foreigners to migrate here. Because skilled workers pay more in taxes than they
receive in government benefits, increasing their supply would reduce the fiscal
burden on the rest of us. But if these foreign students decide to return home,
as many do, we shouldn’t worry that they are competing against us.
Instead, we should view higher education in the
United States as one of our most successful export
industries. The United States has 5 percent of the
world’s population but most of the best universities. Is it any wonder that
students from many nations flock here to learn? And as they do so, they create
opportunities for Americans — from the professors who teach the classes to the
grounds crews who maintain the campuses.
When the foreign students head home, they take
the human capital acquired here to become productive members of their own
communities. They spread up-to-date knowledge, so it can foster prosperity
everywhere. Some of this knowledge is technological. Some of it concerns
business, legal and medical practices. And some is even more fundamental, such
as the values of democracy and individual liberty. Nothing could be better for
the United States than these thousands of American-trained ambassadors who have
seen at first hand the benefits of a free and open society.
As we confront the many hard policy choices
ahead, let’s prepare for the future. Let’s invest for the future. Let’s be
willing to make hard sacrifices for a more prosperous future. But let’s not
presume that the future is a game requiring winners and losers.
In accounts of the
political unrest sweeping through the Middle East, one factor, inflation,
deserves more attention. Nothing can be more demoralizing to people at the low
end of the income scale—where great masses in that region reside—than increases
in the cost of basic necessities like food and fuel. It brings them out into the
streets to protest government policies, especially in places where mass protests
are the only means available to shake the existing power structure.
The consumer-price index in Egypt rose to more than 18%
annually in 2009 from 5% in 2006, a more normal year. In Iran, the rate went to
25% in 2009 from 13% in 2006. In both cases the rate subsided in 2010 but
remained in double digits.
Egyptians were able
to overthrow the dictatorial Hosni Mubarak. Their efforts to fashion a more
responsive regime may or may not succeed. Iranians are taking far greater risks
in tackling the vicious Revolutionary Guards to try to unseat the ruling
ayatollahs.
Probably few of the protesters in the streets connect
their economic travail to Washington. But central bankers do. They complain,
most recently at last week's G-20 meeting in Paris, that the U.S. is exporting
inflation.
China and India blame the U.S. Federal Reserve for their
difficulties in maintaining stable prices. The International Monetary Fund and
the United Nations, always responsive to the complaints of developing nations,
are suggesting alternatives to the dollar as the pre-eminent international
currency. The IMF managing director,
Dominique Strauss-Kahn, has proposed replacement of the dollar with IMF special
drawing rights, or SDRs, a unit of account fashioned from a basket of currencies
that is made available to the foreign currency reserves of central banks.
View Full Image
Associated Press
About the only one
failing to acknowledge a problem seems to be the man most responsible, Federal
Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke. In a
recent question-and-answer session at the National Press Club in Washington, the
chairman said it was "unfair" to accuse the Fed of exporting inflation. Other
nations, he said, have the same tools the Fed has for controlling
inflation.
Well, not quite. Consider, for example, that much of
world trade, particularly in basic commodities like food grains and oil, is
denominated in U.S. dollars. When the Fed floods the world with dollars, the
dollar price of commodities goes up, and this affects market prices generally,
particularly in poor countries that are heavily import-dependent.
Export-dependent nations like China try to maintain exchange-rate stability by
inflating their own currencies to buy up dollars.
Mr. Bernanke has
made it clear that his policy is to inflate the money supply. His second round
of quantitative easing—the
controversial QE2 policy to systematically purchase $600 billion in Treasury
securities with newly created money—serves that aim. But even for the
U.S. it is uncertain that Mr. Bernanke can hold to his 2% inflation target. Oil
is going up. Foodstuffs are going up. And when the Fed sneezes money, the weak
economies of the world, and the poor masses who are highly vulnerable to price
rises in the necessities of life, catch pneumonia.
The turmoil in
Iran is reminiscent of another period when the Fed was on an inflationary binge,
the late 1970s. The Iranian oil boom had brought many thousands of peasants out
of the villages into the cash economy in population centers like Tehran. On top
of the disorientation resulting from that change itself, Iranians were then
victims of an outbreak of inflation and a sharp decline in the purchasing power
of the rials in their pay envelopes. Confused and angry, they supported the
clerical revolution that unseated the shah and has been a thorn in America's
side ever since.
Today's Iranian
revolt has similar causes and, if successful, could be the flip side of 1979, a
nation again friendlier toward the U.S. But there is no guarantee of that, or
that states now friendly, like Bahrain, will remain so after an Egyptian-style
upheaval.
Indeed, it is unlikely that Americans themselves will
escape the inflationary consequences of current Fed policy. Aside from the rise
in oil and foodstuffs, higher prices of manufactured goods are in the offing.
China's inflation rate is hovering at 5%. MKM Partners, a research and trading
firm, last November reported that an internal study at Wal-Mart, a big importer
from China, showed that the huge retail chain's prices are edging up at an
annual rate of 4% a year. That recent
trend showed up in last week's consumer-price index report.
The Fed is
financing a vast and rising federal deficit, following a practice that has been
a surefire prescription for domestic inflation from time immemorial. Meanwhile,
its policies are stoking a rise in prices that is contributing to political
unrest that in some cases might be beneficial but in others might turn out as
badly as the overthrow of the shah in 1979. Does any of this suggest that there
might be some urgency to bringing the Fed under closer
scrutiny?
Mr. Melloan, a former columnist and deputy
editor of the Journal editorial page, is author of "The Great Money Binge:
Spending Our Way to Socialism" (Simon & Schuster, 2009).
Iceland's voters
will once again get to have their say over whether they should bear the cost of
the 2008 bailouts of British and Dutch depositors in Icelandic banks. And a new
poll out yesterday suggests that this time, they might just approve the deal,
struck in December between the governments of the three countries. A yes vote in a referendum likely to be
held in early April would leave Iceland in hock to London and The Hague for as
long as 35 years—and this because the British and Dutch governments decided, of
their own volition, to bail out their own citizens.
The dispute dates
back to the height of the financial panic. Icelandic banks, which had
aggressively marketed high-yielding savings products in the EU, collapsed when
the financial markets seized up that fall, leaving the deposits of more than
300,000 Dutch and British depositors in jeopardy. The decision to bailout Icesave
depositors in their countries cost those governments £3.1 billion ($5
billion)—but all of that money went to their own countrymen, those who had made
the choice of investing their savings in Iceland. It did nothing to stave off
the near-total collapse of Iceland's banking sector or the collapse in its
currency. And thanks in part to British and Dutch demands for repayment, Iceland
remains, two and a half years later, shut out of global capital
markets.
Last year,
Icelandic voters overwhelmingly rejected an earlier deal to repay the money over
15 years. The new agreement should prove much less costly to Icelandic taxpayers
than the original, with the President estimating that they could be on the hook
for as little as £246 million in direct costs. But it's unclear why Iceland should bear
the costs of bailing out the Dutch and British at all.
If those
countries' governments felt it necessary to make their people whole, that is
their affair. It's hardly surprising that the people of Iceland would prefer to
put the whole business behind them, as the most recent polling suggests. But
that should not be taken as vindication of the U.K.'s and Netherlands'
two-and-a-half year campaign of vilification of Iceland.
Printed in The Wall Street Journal, page
11
American nonfinancial corporations were "sitting on"
$1.93 trillion in liquid assets at the end of last year's third quarter,
according to the Federal Reserve Board. This has become one of the most
frequently echoed statistics, viewed as indisputable evidence that U.S. business
leaders are unduly timid or evil.
Last September,
Chris Matthews, the host of MSNBC's "Hardball," asked Politico's Charles
Mahtesian, "You think business can sit on those billions and trillions of
dollars for two more years after they screw Obama this time? Are they going to
keep sitting on their money . . . to get Mr. Excitement Mitt Romney elected
president? Will they do that to the country?" Mr. Mahtesian concurred.
More recently,
Washington Post columnist Harold Meyerson opined that, "U.S. corporations can't
sit on their nearly $2 trillion in cash reserves forever, but that doesn't mean
they're going to invest their stash in job-creating enterprises within the
United States." And the "nearly $2 trillion in cash" was included in this
newspaper's four key numbers of the year—right up there with jobs, oil prices
and world trade. "In an ideal world," that report suggested, "2011 would see
cash-rich companies step up their hiring."
Like so many
statistics used to score political points, this datum de jour has been totally
misunderstood. The chorus of media outrage about supposedly excessive corporate
cash reveals nothing about the financial health of any U.S. business. It simply
reveals appalling ignorance of elementary accounting.
1) There are two sides to a balance sheet: assets and
liabilities.
2) Liquid assets serve as a vital safety cushion to
minimize the impact (on workers and suppliers) of unanticipated business
difficulties.
3) A corporate balance sheet is not an income statement.
4) Corporations commonly use both internal and external
sources of funds to acquire both real and financial assets at the same time.
Larger investments in money-market funds and bank CDs do not mean smaller
investment in plant and equipment, as many seem to imagine.
Point No. 1, about
two-sided balance sheets, reminds us that single-entry bookkeeping will not do.
The financial health of corporations is not measured by the form in which assets
are held (liquid or not), but by net worth.
Getty Images
From 2007 to
September 2010, the value of nonfinancial corporate real estate fell by more
than 30%—a loss of more than $2.8 trillion. The ratio of cash to total assets
rose largely because the value of total assets collapsed. Meanwhile, liabilities
topped $13.6 trillion last fall, up from $12.9 trillion at the last cyclical
peak. With real estate falling and debts rising, the net worth of nonfinancial
corporations was only $12.6 trillion at last count—down from $15.9 trillion in
2007.
Point No. 2, about
safety cushions, alerts us to the fact that $1.93 trillion of liquid assets
would not begin to cover $3.67 trillion of short-term debts, let alone ongoing
expenses such as payroll. To describe the liquid assets as "hoarding"
(regardless of debts) is witless. The recession in 2008-09 would have been far
less painful if nonfinancial corporations in 2007 had been "hoarding" more
liquid assets (they had $1.53 trillion).
Point No. 3, about
the difference between a balance sheet (what a company owns and owes) and an
income statement (money received and spent) is basic accounting. Outraged
proclamations about the $1.93 trillion figure show zero understanding of this
difference.
Firms hire out of
income, not by liquidating assets or adding to debt. No sensible employer plans
on meeting routine payroll expenses by drawing down assets, liquid or not.
Decisions to
increase or reduce hiring are unrelated to decisions to increase or reduce any
assets on the balance sheet. Companies add workers if the expected addition to
after-tax revenues is likely to exceed the addition to costs (including taxes
and mandated benefits).
Point No. 4 is
related to Point No. 3. Consider that in the balance-sheet section of the
Federal Reserve flow-of-funds accounts, where the now-famous $1.93 trillion
appears, investments in liquid assets are a use of funds, not a source of funds.
Sources of funds
are both internal (profits) and external (debts). Uses of funds include adding
to financial assets. The Smith family may invest part of its monthly paycheck in
a bank CD or mutual fund and the Jones Corporation may likewise invest part of
its monthly profits in the same way. Such liquid investments are viewed as
something that could be tapped to meet unexpected expenses, or to make
longer-term investments later—not as a substitute for regular monthly
income.
Another use of
funds is capital expenditures on tangible assets—plant, equipment and
inventories. Such capital expenditures by nonfinancial corporations (at home,
not abroad) were growing at an annual rate of nearly $1.1 trillion in the third
quarter of 2010—a 42% increase from $752 billion in the second quarter of 2009.
U.S. corporations obviously can and do increase their investments in plant and
equipment at the same time they are increasing investments in so-called "liquid"
assets (which include bonds, time deposits and mutual funds).
The widely repeated notion that prudent corporate
investments in liquid assets have somehow reduced real investments or hiring is
unqualified nonsense based on inexcusable ignorance of elementary economics and
accounting.
Mr. Reynolds, a senior fellow at the Cato
Institute, is author of "Income and Wealth" (Greenwood Press,
2006).
Mar
4th 2010 | from the print edition Economist
IMAGINE
you are one half of a young couple expecting your first child in a fast-growing,
poor country. You are part of the new middle class; your income is rising; you
want a small family. But traditional mores hold sway around
you, most important in the preference for sons over daughters. Perhaps hard
physical labour is still needed for the family to make its living. Perhaps only
sons may inherit land. Perhaps a daughter is deemed to join another family on
marriage and you want someone to care for you when you are old. Perhaps she
needs a dowry.
Now
imagine that you have had an ultrasound scan; it costs $12, but you can afford
that. The scan says the unborn child is a girl. You yourself would prefer a boy;
the rest of your family clamours for one. You would never dream of killing a
baby daughter, as they do out in the villages. But an abortion seems different.
What do you do?
For
millions of couples, the answer is: abort the daughter, try for a son.
In China and northern
India more than 120 boys are being born for every 100 girls.
Nature dictates that
slightly more males are born than females to offset boys’ greater susceptibility
to infant disease. But nothing on this scale.
Related
items
Related
topics
For
those who oppose abortion, this is mass murder. For those such as this
newspaper, who think abortion should be “safe, legal and rare” (to use Bill
Clinton’s phrase), a lot depends on the circumstances, but the cumulative
consequence for societies of such individual actions is catastrophic. China
alone stands to have as many unmarried young men—“bare branches”, as they are
known—as the entire population of young men in America. In any country rootless
young males spell trouble; in Asian societies, where marriage and children are
the recognised routes into society, single men are almost like outlaws. Crime
rates, bride trafficking, sexual violence, even female suicide rates are all
rising and will rise further as the lopsided generations reach their maturity
(see article).
It is
no exaggeration to call this gendercide. Women are missing in their
millions—aborted, killed, neglected to death. In 1990 an Indian economist, Amartya
Sen, put the number at 100m; the toll is higher now. The crumb
of comfort is that countries can mitigate the hurt, and that one, South Korea,
has shown the worst can be avoided. Others need to learn from it if they are to
stop the carnage.
Most
people know China and northern India have unnaturally large numbers of boys. But
few appreciate how bad the problem is, or that it is rising. In China the imbalance between the
sexes was 108 boys to 100 girls for the generation born in the late 1980s; for
the generation of the early 2000s, it was 124 to 100. In some Chinese provinces
the ratio is an unprecedented 130 to 100. The destruction is
worst in China but has spread far beyond. Other East Asian countries, including
Taiwan and Singapore, former communist states in the western Balkans and the
Caucasus, and even sections of America’s population (Chinese- and
Japanese-Americans, for example): all these have distorted sex ratios.
Gendercide exists on
almost every continent. It affects rich and poor; educated and illiterate;
Hindu, Muslim, Confucian and Christian alike.
Wealth
does not stop it. Taiwan and Singapore have open, rich economies. Within China
and India the areas with the worst sex ratios are the richest, best-educated
ones. And
China’s one-child policy can only be part of the problem, given that so many
other countries are affected.
In
fact the destruction of baby girls is a product of three forces: the ancient
preference for sons; a modern desire for smaller families; and ultrasound
scanning and other technologies that identify the sex of a
fetus. In
societies where four or six children were common, a boy would almost certainly
come along eventually; son preference did not need to exist at the expense of
daughters. But now couples want two children—or, as in China, are allowed only
one—they will sacrifice unborn daughters to their pursuit of a son. That is why
sex ratios are most distorted in the modern, open parts of China and India. It
is also why ratios are more skewed after the first child: parents may accept a
daughter first time round but will do anything to ensure their next—and probably
last—child is a boy. The boy-girl ratio is above 200 for a third child in some
places.
Baby
girls are thus victims of a malign combination of ancient prejudice and modern
preferences for small families. Only one country has managed to change this
pattern. In the 1990s South Korea had a sex ratio almost as skewed as
China’s. Now, it is heading towards normality. It has achieved this not
deliberately, but because the culture changed. Female education,
anti-discrimination suits and equal-rights rulings made son preference seem
old-fashioned and unnecessary. The forces of modernity first exacerbated
prejudice—then overwhelmed it.
But
this happened when South Korea was rich. If China or India—with incomes
one-quarter and one-tenth Korea’s levels—wait until they are as wealthy, many
generations will pass. To speed up change, they need to take actions that are in
their own interests anyway. Most obviously China should scrap the one-child
policy. The country’s leaders will resist this because they fear population
growth; they also dismiss Western concerns about human rights. But the one-child
limit is no longer needed to reduce fertility (if it ever was: other East Asian
countries reduced the pressure on the population as much as China). And it
massively distorts the country’s sex ratio, with devastating results. President
Hu Jintao says that creating “a harmonious society” is his guiding principle; it
cannot be achieved while a policy so profoundly perverts family life.
And
all countries need to raise the value of girls. They should encourage female
education; abolish laws and customs that prevent daughters inheriting property;
make examples of hospitals and clinics with impossible sex ratios; get women
engaged in public life—using everything from television newsreaders to women
traffic police. Mao Zedong said “women hold up half the sky.” The world needs to
do more to prevent a gendercide that will have the sky crashing down.
The
worldwide war on baby girls
Mar 4th 2010 | from the print edition
XINRAN XUE, a Chinese writer, describes
visiting a peasant family in the Yimeng area of Shandong province. The wife was
giving birth. “We had scarcely sat down in the kitchen”, she writes (see article), “when we heard a
moan of pain from the bedroom next door…The cries from the inner room grew
louder—and abruptly stopped. There was a low sob, and then a man’s gruff voice
said accusingly: ‘Useless thing!’
“Suddenly, I thought I heard a slight movement
in the slops pail behind me,” Miss Xinran remembers. “To my absolute horror, I
saw a tiny foot poking out of the pail. The midwife must have dropped that tiny
baby alive into the slops pail! I nearly threw myself at it, but the two
policemen [who had accompanied me] held my shoulders in a firm grip. ‘Don’t
move, you can’t save it, it’s too late.’
“‘But that’s...murder...and you’re the police!’
The little foot was still now. The policemen held on to me for a few more
minutes. ‘Doing a baby girl is not a big thing around here,’ [an] older woman
said comfortingly. ‘That’s a living child,’ I said in a shaking voice, pointing
at the slops pail. ‘It’s not a child,’ she corrected me. ‘It’s a girl baby, and
we can’t keep it. Around these parts, you can’t get by without a son. Girl
babies don’t count.’”
Related items
Related topics
In January 2010 the Chinese Academy of Social
Sciences (CASS) showed what can happen to a country when girl babies don’t
count. Within ten years, the academy said, one in five young men would be unable
to find a bride because of the dearth of young women—a figure unprecedented in a
country at peace.
The number is based on the sexual discrepancy
among people aged 19 and below. According to CASS, China in 2020 will have
30m-40m more men of this age than young women. For comparison, there are 23m
boys below the age of 20 in Germany, France and Britain combined and around 40m
American boys and young men. So within ten years, China faces the prospect of
having the equivalent of the whole young male population of America, or almost
twice that of Europe’s three largest countries, with little prospect of
marriage, untethered to a home of their own and without the stake in society
that marriage and children provide.
Gendercide—to borrow the title of a 1985 book by Mary
Anne Warren—is often seen as an unintended consequence of China’s one-child
policy, or as a product of poverty or ignorance. But that cannot be the whole
story. The surplus of bachelors—called in China guanggun, or “bare
branches”— seems to have accelerated between 1990 and 2005, in ways not
obviously linked to the one-child policy, which was introduced in 1979. And, as
is becoming clear, the war against baby girls is not confined to
China.
Parts of India have sex ratios as skewed as
anything in its northern neighbour. Other East Asian countries—South Korea,
Singapore and Taiwan—have peculiarly high numbers of male births. So, since the
collapse of the Soviet Union, have former communist countries in the Caucasus
and the western Balkans. Even subsets of America’s population are following
suit, though not the population as a whole.
The real cause, argues Nick Eberstadt, a
demographer at the American Enterprise Institute, a think-tank in Washington,
DC, is not any country’s particular policy but “the fateful collision between
overweening son preference, the use of rapidly spreading prenatal
sex-determination technology and declining fertility.” These are global trends.
And the selective destruction of baby girls is global,
too.
Boys are slightly more likely to die in infancy
than girls. To compensate, more boys are born than girls so there will be equal
numbers of young men and women at puberty. In all societies that record births,
between 103 and 106 boys are normally born for every 100 girls. The ratio has
been so stable over time that it appears to be the natural order of
things.
That
order has changed fundamentally in the past 25 years. In China the sex ratio for
the generation born between 1985 and 1989 was 108, already just outside the
natural range. For the generation born in 2000-04, it was 124 (ie, 124 boys were
born in those years for every 100 girls). According to CASS the ratio today is
123 boys per 100 girls. These rates are biologically impossible without human
intervention.
The national averages hide astonishing figures
at the provincial level. According to an analysis of Chinese household data
carried out in late 2005 and reported in the British Medical Journal*, only one
region, Tibet, has a sex ratio within the bounds of nature. Fourteen
provinces—mostly in the east and south—have sex ratios at birth of 120 and
above, and three have unprecedented levels of more than 130. As CASS says, “the
gender imbalance has been growing wider year after year.”
The BMJ study also casts light on one of the
puzzles about China’s sexual imbalance. How far has it been exaggerated by the
presumed practice of not reporting the birth of baby daughters in the hope of
getting another shot at bearing a son? Not much, the authors think. If this
explanation were correct, you would expect to find sex ratios falling
precipitously as girls who had been hidden at birth start entering the official
registers on attending school or the doctor. In fact, there is no such fall. The
sex ratio of 15-year-olds in 2005 was not far from the sex ratio at birth n
1990. The implication is that sex-selective abortion, not under-registration of
girls, accounts for the excess of boys.
Other countries have wildly skewed sex ratios
without China’s draconian population controls (see chart 1). Taiwan’s sex ratio
also rose from just above normal in 1980 to 110 in the early 1990s; it remains
just below that level today. During the same period, South Korea’s sex ratio
rose from just above normal to 117 in 1990—then the highest in the world—before
falling back to more natural levels. Both these countries were already rich,
growing quickly and becoming more highly educated even while the balance between
the sexes was swinging sharply towards males.
South Korea is experiencing some surprising
consequences. The surplus of bachelors in a rich country has sucked in brides
from abroad. In 2008, 11% of marriages were “mixed”, mostly between a Korean man
and a foreign woman. This is causing tensions in a hitherto homogenous society,
which is often hostile to the children of mixed marriages. The trend is
especially marked in rural areas, where the government thinks half the children
of farm households will be mixed by 2020. The children are common enough to have
produced a new word: “Kosians”, or Korean-Asians.
China is nominally a communist country, but
elsewhere it was communism’s collapse that was associated with the growth of
sexual disparities. After the Soviet Union imploded in 1991, there was an
upsurge in the ratio of boys to girls in Armenia, Azerbaijan and Georgia. Their
sex ratios rose from normal levels in 1991 to 115-120 by 2000. A rise also
occurred in several Balkan states after the wars of Yugoslav succession. The
ratio in Serbia and Macedonia is around 108. There are even signs of distorted
sex ratios in America, among various groups of Asian-Americans. In 1975,
calculates Mr Eberstadt, the sex ratio for Chinese-, Japanese- and
Filipino-Americans was between 100 and 106. In 2002, it was 107 to 109.
But the
country with the most remarkable record is that other supergiant, India. India
does not produce figures for sex ratios at birth, so its numbers are not
strictly comparable with the others. But there is no doubt that the number of
boys has been rising relative to girls and that, as in China, there are large
regional disparities. The north-western states of Punjab and Haryana have sex
ratios as high as the provinces of China’s east and south. Nationally, the ratio
for children up to six years of age rose from a biologically unexceptionable 104
in 1981 to a biologically impossible 108 in 2001. In 1991, there was a single
district with a sex ratio over 125; by 2001, there were
46.
Conventional wisdom about such disparities is that they
are the result of “backward thinking” in old-fashioned societies or—in China—of
the one-child policy. By implication, reforming the policy or modernising the
society (by, for example, enhancing the status of women) should bring the sex
ratio back to normal. But this is not always true and, where it is, the road to
normal sex ratios is winding and bumpy.
Not all traditional societies show a marked
preference for sons over daughters. But in those that do—especially those in
which the family line passes through the son and in which he is supposed to look
after his parents in old age—a son is worth more than a daughter. A girl is
deemed to have joined her husband’s family on marriage, and is lost to her
parents. As a Hindu saying puts it,
“Raising a daughter is like watering your neighbours’
garden.”
“Son preference” is discernible—overwhelming,
even—in polling evidence. In 1999 the government of India asked women what sex
they wanted their next child to be. One third of those without children said a
son, two-thirds had no preference and only a residual said a daughter. Polls
carried out in Pakistan and Yemen show similar results. Mothers in some
developing countries say they want sons, not daughters, by margins of ten to
one. In China midwives charge more for delivering a son than a daughter.
The unusual thing about son preference is that
it rises sharply at second and later births (see chart 2). Among Indian women
with two children (of either sex), 60% said they wanted a son next time, almost
twice the preference for first-borns. This reflected the desire of those with
two daughters for a son. The share rose to 75% for those with three children.
The difference in parental attitudes between first-borns and subsequent children
is large and significant.
Until
the 1980s people in poor countries could do little about this preference: before
birth, nature took its course. But in that decade, ultrasound scanning and other
methods of detecting the sex of a child before birth began to make their
appearance. These technologies changed everything. Doctors in India started
advertising ultrasound scans with the slogan “Pay 5,000 rupees ($110) today and
save 50,000 rupees tomorrow” (the saving was on the cost of a daughter’s dowry).
Parents who wanted a son, but balked at killing baby daughters, chose abortion
in their millions.
The use of sex-selective abortion was banned in
India in 1994 and in China in 1995. It is illegal in most countries (though
Sweden legalised the practice in 2009). But since it is almost impossible to
prove that an abortion has been carried out for reasons of sex selection, the
practice remains widespread. An ultrasound scan costs about $12, which is within
the scope of many—perhaps most—Chinese and Indian families. In one hospital in
Punjab, in northern India, the only girls born after a round of ultrasound scans
had been mistakenly identified as boys, or else had a male twin.
The spread of fetal-imaging technology has not
only skewed the sex ratio but also explains what would otherwise be something of
a puzzle: sexual disparities tend to
rise with income and education, which you would not expect if “backward
thinking” was all that mattered. In India, some of the most prosperous
states—Maharashtra, Punjab, Gujarat—have the worst sex ratios. In China, the
higher a province’s literacy rate, the more skewed its sex ratio. The ratio also
rises with income per head.
In Punjab Monica Das Gupta of the World Bank discovered that second and
third daughters of well-educated mothers were more than twice as likely to die
before their fifth birthday as their brothers, regardless of their birth
order. The discrepancy was far lower in poorer households. Ms Das Gupta
argues that women do not necessarily use improvements in education and income to
help daughters. Richer, well-educated families share their poorer neighbours’
preference for sons and, because they tend to have smaller families, come under
greater pressure to produce a son and heir if their first child is an
unlooked-for daughter**.
So modernisation and rising incomes make it
easier and more desirable to select the sex of your children. And on top of that
smaller families combine with greater wealth to reinforce the imperative to
produce a son. When families are large, at least one male child will doubtless
come along to maintain the family line. But if you have only one or two
children, the birth of a daughter may be at a son’s expense. So, with rising
incomes and falling fertility, more and more people live in the smaller, richer
families that are under the most pressure to produce a son.
In China the one-child policy increases that
pressure further. Unexpectedly, though, it is the relaxation of the policy,
rather than the policy pure and simple, which explains the unnatural upsurge in
the number of boys.
In most Chinese cities couples are usually
allowed to have only one child—the policy in its pure form. But in the
countryside, where 55% of China’s population lives, there are three variants of
the one-child policy. In the coastal provinces some 40% of couples are permitted
a second child if their first is a girl. In central and southern provinces
everyone is permitted a second child either if the first is a girl or if the
parents suffer “hardship”, a criterion determined by local officials. In the far
west and Inner Mongolia, the provinces do not really operate a one-child policy
at all. Minorities are permitted second—sometimes even third—children, whatever
the sex of the first-born (see map).
The provinces in this last group are the only
ones with close to normal sex ratios. They are sparsely populated and inhabited
by ethnic groups that do not much like abortion and whose family systems do not
disparage the value of daughters so much. The provinces with by far the highest
ratios of boys to girls are in the second group, the ones with the most
exceptions to the one-child policy. As the BMJ study shows, these exceptions
matter because of the preference for sons in second or third births.
For an
example, take Guangdong, China’s most populous province. Its overall sex ratio
is 120, which is very high. But if you take first births alone, the ratio is
“only” 108. That is outside the bounds of normality but not by much. If you take
just second children, however, which are permitted in the province, the ratio
leaps to 146 boys for every 100 girls. And for the relatively few births where
parents are permitted a third child, the sex ratio is 167. Even this startling
ratio is not the outer limit. In Anhui province, among third children, there are
227 boys for every 100 girls, while in Beijing municipality (which also permits
exceptions in rural areas), the sex ratio reaches a hard-to-credit 275. There
are almost three baby boys for each baby girl.
Ms Das Gupta found something similar in India.
First-born daughters were treated the same as their brothers; younger sisters
were more likely to die in infancy. The rule seems to be that parents will
joyfully embrace a daughter as their first child. But they will go to
extraordinary lengths to ensure subsequent children are sons.
Throughout human history, young men have been
responsible for the vast preponderance of crime and violence—especially single
men in countries where status and social acceptance depend on being married and
having children, as it does in China and India. A rising population of
frustrated single men spells trouble.
The crime rate has almost doubled in China
during the past 20 years of rising sex ratios, with stories abounding of bride
abduction, the trafficking of women, rape and prostitution. A study into whether
these things were connected† concluded that
they were, and that higher sex ratios accounted for about one-seventh of the
rise in crime. In India, too, there is a correlation between provincial crime
rates and sex ratios. In “Bare Branches”††, Valerie Hudson
and Andrea den Boer gave warning that the social problems of biased sex ratios
would lead to more authoritarian policing. Governments, they say, “must decrease
the threat to society posed by these young men. Increased authoritarianism in an
effort to crack down on crime, gangs, smuggling and so forth can be one
result.”
Violence is not the only consequence. In parts
of India, the cost of dowries is said to have fallen (see article). Where people pay a
bride price (ie, the groom’s family gives money to the bride’s), that price has
risen. During the 1990s, China saw the appearance of tens of thousands of
“extra-birth guerrilla troops”—couples from one-child areas who live in a legal
limbo, shifting restlessly from city to city in order to shield their two or
three children from the authorities’ baleful eye. And, according to the World
Health Organisation, female suicide rates in China are among the highest in the
world (as are South Korea’s). Suicide is the commonest form of death among
Chinese rural women aged 15-34; young mothers kill themselves by drinking
agricultural fertilisers, which are easy to come by. The journalist Xinran Xue
thinks they cannot live with the knowledge that they have aborted or killed
their baby daughters.
Some of the consequences of the skewed sex
ratio have been unexpected. It has probably increased China’s savings rate. This
is because parents with a single son save to increase his chances of attracting
a wife in China’s ultra-competitive marriage market. Shang-Jin Wei of Columbia
University and Xiaobo Zhang of the International Food Policy Research Institute
in Washington, DC, compared savings rates for households with sons versus those
with daughters. “We find not only that households with sons save more than
households with daughters in all regions,” says Mr Wei, “but that households
with sons tend to raise their savings rate if they also happen to live in a
region with a more skewed sex ratio.” They calculate that about half the
increase in China’s savings in the past 25 years can be attributed to the rise
in the sex ratio. If true, this would suggest that economic-policy changes to
boost consumption will be less effective than the government
hopes.
Over the next generation, many of the problems
associated with sex selection will get worse. The social consequences will
become more evident because the boys born in large numbers over the past decade
will reach maturity then. Meanwhile, the practice of sex selection itself may
spread because fertility rates are continuing to fall and ultrasound scanners
reach throughout the developing world.
Yet the
story of the destruction of baby girls does not end in deepest gloom. At least
one country—South Korea—has reversed its cultural preference for sons and cut
the distorted sex ratio (see chart 3). There are reasons for thinking China and
India might follow suit.
South Korea was the first country to report
exceptionally high sex ratios and has been the first to cut them. Between 1985
and 2003, the share of South Korean women who told national health surveyors
that they felt “they must have a son” fell by almost two-thirds, from 48% to
17%. After a lag of a decade, the sex ratio began to fall in the mid-1990s and
is now 110 to 100. Ms Das Gupta argues that though it takes a long time for
social norms favouring sons to alter, and though the transition can be delayed
by the introduction of ultrasound scans, eventually change will come.
Modernisation not only makes it easier for parents to control the sex of their
children, it also changes people’s values and undermines those norms which set a
higher store on sons. At some point, one trend becomes more important than the
other.
It is just possible that China and India may be
reaching that point now. The census of 2000 and the CASS study both showed the
sex ratio stable at around 120. At the very least, it seems to have stopped
rising. Locally, Ms Das Gupta argues†††, the provinces
which had the highest sex ratios (and have two-thirds of China’s population)
have seen a deceleration in their ratios since 2000, and provinces with a
quarter of the population have seen their ratios fall. In India, one study found
that the cultural preference for sons has been falling, too, and that the sex
ratio, as in much of China, is rising more slowly. In villages in Haryana,
grandmothers sit veiled and silent while men are present. But their daughters
sit and chat uncovered because, they say, they have seen unveiled women at work
or on television so much that at last it seems normal to
them.
Ms Das Gupta points out that, though the two
giants are much poorer than South Korea, their governments are doing more than
it ever did to persuade people to treat girls equally (through
anti-discrimination laws and media campaigns). The unintended consequences of
sex selection have been vast. They may get worse. But, at long last, she
reckons, “there seems to be an incipient turnaround in the phenomenon of
‘missing girls’ in Asia.”
* “China’s excess males,
sex selective abortion and one child policy”, by Wei Xing Zhu, Li Lu and Therese
Hesketh. BMJ 2009
** “Why is son preference so persistent in East and
South Asia?” By Monica Das Gupta, Jiang Zhenghua, Li Bohua, Xie Zhenming, Woojin
Chung and Bae Hwa-Ok. World Bank, Policy Research Working Paper 2942.
†
“Sex ratios and crime: evidence from China’s one-child policy”, by Lena Edlund,
Hongbin Li, Junjian Yi and Junsen Zhang. Institute for the Study of Labour,
Bonn. Discussion Paper 3214
†† “Bare Branches”, by Valerie Hudson and
Andrea den Boer. MIT Press, 2004
††† “Is there an incipient turnaround in
Asia’s “missing girls” phenomenon?” By Monica Das Gupta, Woojin Chung and Li
Shuzhuo. World Bank, Policy Research Working Paper 4846.
from the print edition | International
ABUJA,
Nigeria—The Central
Bank of Nigeria will stick to a stable exchange-rate policy as the country ramps
up its economic growth, the bank's top official said, rejecting recent comments
from the International Monetary Fund that its currency is
overvalued.
In an
exclusive interview, Nigeria's central-bank governor, Sanusi Lamido Sanusi, said devaluing
its currency, the naira, wouldn't help the economy and could fuel
inflation—already in the low
double-digits.
"Price
stability is the mandate of the central bank," he said. "We aren't targeting a
particular exchange rate."
Earlier
this month, the IMF
released a report on Nigeria stating that the central bank's policies of
protecting the value of the currency and keeping interest rates low have eroded
foreign-exchange reserves.
The
IMF report "stressed that greater exchange-rate flexibility would prevent
one-way bets in the foreign-exchange market and cushion external
shocks."
But
Nigeria's central-bank governor took issue with the IMF diagnosis. A cheaper
currency wouldn't aid exports, he said, since much of what the country sells
overseas is oil at prices dictated by the international markets. And since much
of what Nigerian factories make depend on foreign materials, he warned a sharp
currency devaluation that would make imports more expensive "could shut down
manufacturing."
At the
end of 2010, the IMF estimated Nigeria's foreign-exchange reserves at $34.1
billion, down from $42.4 billion the year before.
But
Mr. Sanusi said the more important priority than preserving reserves was keeping
on the economy on track. Last year, Nigeria not only had to deal with the
global financial crisis; it also face heightened political uncertainty at home.
The country's president died, militants kept up attacks on its oil
infrastructure, and there was renewed fighting between Muslims and Christians
around the volatile region of Jos.
The
political uncertainty is set to continue for at least a couple more months. In
April, Nigeria will hold elections for president as well as posts for powerful
state governors.
And
yet, Africa's most
populous country and second-largest economy has weathered the global downturn
better than most. The IMF projected Nigeria's economic
growth at 8.5% in 2010, more than twice as fast as the continent's largest
economy, South Africa. It predicted the economy would grow by 7% this year,
thanks in part to the emergence of a consumer class and demand for retail goods,
telecommunications and other services.
The
central-bank governor said Nigeria could grow at twice that projected clip by
overhauling the nation's lackluster infrastructure.
Rather
than exchange-rate adjustments, Mr. Sanusi said, steps to improve roads and
spotty power supply as well as distribution of fresh farm produce—most of which
rots before arriving at market—will be more effective at boosting growth and
bringing down prices.
Korean
companies are among the best in the world, delivering innovative products from
washing machines to high-tech smart phones. Yet this success is not reflected in
the values of these companies' stocks, a problem Korea needs to fix to keep
growing. Improving corporate governance is the key.
View
Full Image
European
Pressphoto Agency
Although
many Korean companies have reached developed-economy scale in terms of revenue,
name recognition or number of employees, they're still stuck in a
family-business model in terms of corporate governance. Among the top 100
companies in market capitalization, almost all are controlled by members of the
founding family. This encourages a sense that the company, even if it's listed,
is the family's private possession, to be divided up or handed down to the
children as the patriarch sees fit.
That
fact alone can serve as a temptation toward activities that hurt the interests
of small investors. For instance, it is considered normal to turn control of a
company over to children of the founder at a relatively early age. According to a 2009 survey of 37 of
these "royal kids" by business website Chaebul.com, the average age at which
they take directorial positions is only
31.
The
problem is compounded by weak institutional protections for minority
shareholders. In theory, legal changes after the 1997
financial crisis bolstered the role of outside directors on corporate boards and
created a better electronic reporting system for regulatory filings to enhance
shareholder access to information. However, the culture still discourages
regulators—especially public prosecutors—from vigorously defending the ability
of minority owners to assert the few rights they do have.
Koreans
cling to a belief that their economy is founded on the health of large
conglomerates, known as chaebol, and that what's good for the chaebol (and its
ruling family) is good for Korea. This
explains why prosecutions of corporate corruption cases involving chaebol
families are infrequent and rarely result in stiff sanctions even if prosecutors
secure a conviction.
This
was most clearly on display in 2008 in the case of Lee Kun-hee, chairman of
Samsung and son of the chaebol's founder. In July of that year, he was convicted
of tax evasion and other charges in connection with a scandal over transfer of
his managerial control and wealth to his son. He was given a three-year prison
term suspended for five years, and fined 110 billion won ($100 million). Yet he
never served a day in prison; instead he received a presidential pardon.
According to newspaper reports, President Lee Myung-bak decided to pardon Mr.
Lee in view of the "national interest."
This
kind of behavior—and Samsung's Mr. Lee is hardly alone in Korean corporate
history—is a serious damper on the interests of minority
shareholders.
That may be one of the
reasons for the so-called Korean discount, whereby the Korean market trades at
lower average price-to-earnings ratios than its peers in Asia.
Yet the back-scratching alliance of government and business often deters
minority shareholders from exercising their rights or blocks them when they try.
It's notable in this
regard that one of the most common types of corporate scandal involves
conglomerates maintaining slush funds with which to make political
donations.
There
are no quick fixes, and many pieces will need to fall into place—from policy
makers to prosecutors to individual executives—to improve corporate governance.
Lawmakers in particular must revise tax laws and corporate codes so that
families are no longer able to extract shareholder value. The Korean government and the
National Assembly are reorganizing the country's inheritance tax laws and other
laws governing transparency of corporate financial dealings. These changes would
be important improvements. But by themselves they won't be
enough.
Crucially,
minority shareholders are not powerless to push for change under the existing
laws and regulations.
One part of the solution is for these shareholders themselves to start
exercising their rights more vigorously.
My
company has achieved small victories improving corporate governance in several
cases. Most recently, we pushed for significant changes at Taekwang Group, the
40th-largest chaebol with subsidiaries in petrochemical, finance, cable
television and many other businesses. Although the founding families control 46%
of the outstanding shares, we were able to start shedding a light on what we
believe is wrongdoing that has hurt the interests of our fellow small
shareholders.
In
particular, we believe based on our own review of corporate financial
statements, interviews with former executives, news reports, and in some cases
tips from company insiders, that Chairman Lee Ho-jin transferred assets
improperly between various business units and to outsiders. Based on company
financial statements, he appears to have made almost $90 million by ordering
affiliate companies to buy memberships in an unbuilt golf course owned by his
own family. The prosecution alleges that he has created 440 billion won of slush
funds in accounts held under false names and used part of the money for personal
purposes.
Our
research provided sufficient evidence for prosecutors to launch their own
investigation. After a four-month investigation that covered our findings as
well as other issues raised by former insiders, prosecutors indicted the
chairman and six other senior executives on charges of embezzlement and breach
of trust. According to news reports, the company admits to engaging in the
undocumented transactions, but denies allegations related to efforts to lobby
politicians. According to local media reports, Mr. Lee has not commented other
than to apologize for causing the controversy, which in the Korean context is a
standard response in such cases.
Public
prosecutors might ordinarily be reluctant to take on such a case, given the
prominence of the company and people involved. But Korean law allows minority
shareholders to press prosecutors in such cases, and my firm has done just that.
We have also spent two years conducting our own investigation into what we
believe are governance failures at the company.
Our
experience offers some evidence that bad governance accounts for part of the
"Korea discount." After we started pursuing our case, the stock price of
Taekwang Industrial—which had stagnated for almost three years—surged. The
company's market capitalization reached 1.5 trillion won in late January, up
from 800 billion won five months earlier.
There was no other news at the time that might have moved the stock price,
suggesting investors were responding to the prospects of better governance and,
as a result, better earnings in the future.
We
can't improve corporate governance alone. But we also can't afford not to do our
part to improve governance. Doing so is good for us and our own investors, and
for Korean companies and ultimately for Korea's healthy
capitalism.
Mr.
Park is president of Seoul Invest, a private-equity
firm.
President
Obama has trumpeted his intention to rationalize economic regulations, and he
even derided overzealous oversight of salmon in his State of the Union address.
While he's on the
subject of fish, Mr. Obama might want to school himself on the campaign against
the Vietnamese pangasius.
The
U.S. Department of Agriculture is seeking public comment on its proposal to
classify the pangasius as a "catfish." A lot rides on that name. The 2008 farm bill specifies new
safety inspection on imported catfish so onerous it would amount to a ban for at
least several years while foreign fishermen struggle to comply. Pangasius is the
target because it has a similar taste and texture to American catfish but is
cheaper—the main reason American catfish farmers have tried for years to ban the
imports.
The
problem is that the pangasius is an entirely different species of fish. In an
earlier bout of protectionism, Congress even passed a law making it illegal to
call pangasius "catfish" for marketing purposes.
Since that hasn't deterred American consumers from buying pangasius, Washington
is willing to call the Vietnamese fish a catfish again if that makes it easier
to ban.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
s
would be funny if it weren't so costly and probably illegal. On
health-and-safety grounds, both the 2008 law and USDA's moves to enforce it make
little sense. Vietnamese pangasius, like all fish
imports, already is regulated by the Food and Drug Administration. There have
been no reported safety problems with the Vietnamese imports. In contrast, USDA
has no experience regulating fish despite its history overseeing meat, and
catfish will be the only fish species under its regulatory
purview.
This
explains why the Government Accountability Office last week included USDA
regulation of catfish in its biennial report on federal programs at "high risk"
for "fraud, waste, abuse and mismanagement." The GAO quotes a USDA estimate that
it will cost $30 million over two years to ramp up a special inspection regime
for this single fish while FDA remains responsible for other seafood. It's not
clear from the language of the 2008 farm bill that the FDA would not still be responsible
for catfish after the USDA takes over, raising the prospect that catfish could
be regulated twice.
As for
the illegality, stricter regulation is unlikely to pass muster at the World
Trade Organization.
Trade expert James
Bacchus, in an opinion commissioned by fish importers, argues that the U.S.
would likely lose if Vietnam sued precisely because FDA regulation already is
effective. Trade judges would conclude the only reason to change
the regulation was protectionism, and they'd be right. A former Democratic
Representative from Florida, Mr. Bacchus was the chief judge of the WTO's
appellate panel for eight years.
No
wonder this pangasius stir has American exporters worried about retaliation.
Senator Max Baucus (D., Mont.) is on record worrying that the Vietnamese could
block imports of U.S. beef in response, and producers of soy products also have
reason to be nervous. All this to protect American catfish farmers from
competition and force American consumers to pay more for
fish.
The
Administration still has a chance to short-circuit this foolishness, if USDA
exercises its discretion to rule that pangasius is not a "catfish." Barring
that, Congress and Mr. Obama could revamp the questionable section of the 2008
farm bill. For anyone looking to cut waste and rationalize regulation, this
should be shooting fish in a barrel.
LONDON—Cocoa prices surged to 32-year peaks
after the internationally recognized president of Ivory Coast extended a ban on
the export of the key ingredient in chocolate.
Cocoa futures jumped 2.5% to close at $3,633 a
ton on ICE Futures U.S.
The front-month contract, for March delivery,
earlier hit an intraday high of $3,666. Although IntercontinentalExchange Inc.
only has records from the mid-1990s, data from Dow Jones Market Data Group
showed the front-month contract last settled at $3,635 on Jan. 12,
1979.
A bitter struggle for political control of the
world's top producer of cocoa has sent cocoa prices rallying since
December.
The monthlong ban implemented by Alassane
Ouattara, who in November won the country's first election in a decade, was due
to expire Wednesday but was prolonged to March 15, according to an order from
Mr. Ouattara's government.
Major cocoa exporters say they are complying
with the restrictions. Some analysts say it is likely that Ivory Coast cocoa
beans are being shipped to international markets through neighboring countries.
Fresh clashes erupted between supporters of the
rival presidents Monday, with army gunfire killing one civilian and injuring
more than a dozen, while African leaders launched a new bid to break the
impasse.
Kona Haque, a commodity analyst with Macquarie,
said she expects cocoa prices on ICE to target $3,700 a ton as the crisis
escalates.
"Despite favorable weather and attractive
prices, the short-term outlook for cocoa supplies out of Ivory Coast has turned
sharply negative," she said.
The extended ban is likely to put greater
pressure on the small farmers who grow most of the cocoa beans. The flow of
beans from the countryside to the ports will slow, resulting in quality problems
and "severe social consequences for the rural communities," said Rodger Wegner,
managing director of the German Cocoa Trade Association.
View Full Image
Agence France-Presse/Getty Images
Farmers are having problems financing and
storing the upcoming crop, due to be harvested between April and May. Banks have
closed branches, and warehouses are overflowing.
About 300,000 tons of cocoa are currently held
in the country, including 100,000 tons at the ports, but observers warn that
cocoa beans stored in poor conditions may deteriorate rapidly.
Trade has also been hurt by European Union
sanctions barring ships entering the country's main ports. French shipper CMA
CGM, the main carrier of Ivorian cocoa to Europe, said earlier this month that
it had suspended visits to Ivory Coast by ships from a
subsidiary.
Shipping services "have almost completely
ceased, thereby inhibiting both export of products such as cocoa, and import of
foodstuffs such as wheat and rice," the European Cocoa Association and the
Federation of Cocoa Commerce said in a joint statement last
week.
Write to Caroline Henshaw at caroline.henshaw@dowjones.com
Some recent articles on
democracy
February 6, 2006
Liberty vs. Democracy
Many mistakenly believe democracy means liberty, but that
is not true.
By :
Richard W. Rahn
http://www.cgeg.org/issue_template.php?issue_id=2491
This
piece was originally published February 5, 2006 in the Washington
Times.
Would you prefer to live in a country that
has:
(1) The rule of law with an honest civil service, strong
protection of private property and minority rights, free trade, free markets,
very low taxes, and full freedom of the speech, press and religion, but not a
democracy?
(2) Democracy and a corrupt court and civil service, many
restrictions on economic freedom, including very high taxes, with limited rights
for minority religions, peoples and speech?
The first example describes Hong Kong under the British,
which had full civil liberties, little corruption and the world's freest
economy. The Chinese took over Hong Kong
in 1997 and have allowed it to continue as the freest economy in the world.
As a result of the British being benevolent dictators and the Chinese
largely continuing economic noninterference, with a number of restrictions on
freedom of speech and the press, Hong Kong has achieved a per capita income
close to that of the United States and higher than almost all
democracies.
Many mistakenly believe democracy means liberty, but a
quick review of world democracies show that is not true. Almost all democracies restrict economic liberties more
than necessary. Many have corrupt court and civil service systems, inhibit
women's rights, constrain press freedom and do not protect minority rights and
views. Iran, though a very restrictive theocracy, calls itself a democracy
and holds elections.
The American Founding Fathers were concerned with
liberty, so they set up a Republic to protect individual liberties from the
passions of the majority at the moment. They worried about the excesses of
democracy.
James Madison, the primary Framer of the U.S.
Constitution, noted: "Democracies have been spectacles of turbulence and
conflict." His views were shared by the other Founders. That is why the U.S.
Constitution was designed to restrict a democratic majority from limiting
freedom of speech, press, religion and so forth. It is a document of liberty,
not of democracy.
The Bush administration has placed itself in a difficult
position by advocating democracy rather than liberty as its global
mission. The democratic elections in
Iraq and Palestine may well result in subjugation of women, containment of basic
freedoms of speech and the press, and support for terrorist
activities.
We,
the victors in Iraq, had a perfect right -- in fact, a responsibility -- to
insist any new constitution protect individual liberties, including full rights
for women, property rights and the right to follow one's own religious beliefs
and not be forced to wear the majority's religious garb.
Remember, Gen. Douglas MacArthur and his fellow American
officials virtually dictated the constitution of Japan after World War II, which
abolished the emperor's role as a deity. That constitution served the Japanese
well.
The
Allies would have not accepted a German constitution that restricted minority
rights, for good reason. Standards of tolerance and civil liberties should
not have been lowered for majority Muslim nations. By doing so, we may
end with hollow victories. Religious Muslims can do perfectly well under regimes
that protect the liberties of all citizens, as demonstrated by successful Muslim
communities in the U.S. and elsewhere.
It
is argued you cannot have sustained periods of liberty without democracy, and
that argument does have merit. Those economic/political units today that have
liberty without democracy are almost all colonies or territories of large
democracies (the notable exception is Hong Kong, which remains largely free
because of the treaty).
England enjoyed several centuries of substantial liberty
without being a real democracy. However, such cases were rare: Even the most
liberal (in the original sense) monarchies and oligarchies most often ended up
restricting liberties.
The
Bush administration needs to revise its rhetoric and actions to put advancement
of human liberty, including economic freedom, in the forefront of its global
agenda. This does mean support for democratic governments and institutions
within countries that help preserve liberty. Democracy should not be seen as the
end goal in itself, but only as a mechanism, if properly constructed, to help
create, preserve and enhance liberty.
Richard W. Rahn is director general of the Center for
Global Economic Growth, a project of the FreedomWorks
Foundation.
Democracy is more than voting
Jan 30, 2006
by Jack Kemp ( bio | archive | contact
)
* Email to a friend
* Print this page
* Text size: A A
Since the surprising victory by Hamas in the Palestinian
parliamentary elections, there has been a significant measure of schadenfreude
on the part of the media and Bush administration critics. Pointing out that the administration
has based its foreign policy largely on the thesis that spreading democracy
throughout the Middle East is both doable and desirable, an article in the
aftermath of the Palestinian elections posted at Salon by Juan Cole, professor
of modern Middle East and South Asian history at the University of Michigan,
asked sarcastically, "How do you like your democracy now, Mr.
Bush?"
Formerly known as the Islamic Resistance Movement and
designated as a terrorist group by the United States government and the European
Union, Hamas declares itself opposed to the very existence of Israel and has
claimed responsibility for dozens of suicide bombings. Beyond the sheer
political embarrassment, Hamas' victory places the United States in a dicey
diplomatic and legal situation.
Under U.S. law, the government may not have contacts or
official dealings with any state or organization on the State Department's
official terrorist list. Yet the Palestinian elections were urged
by the administration in spite of the fact that Hamas had not disarmed nor had
it renounced its intention to drive Israel off the face of the Earth. By every indication, the elections were
fair and legitimate, and Hamas has the right to form a
government.
The
short answer to the gloaters and the basis for crafting a policy to deal with
the situation is there is more to democracy than simply voting. Elections without the accompanying
institutions of democracy - the rule of law, individual liberty and civil
rights, private property, civil society, functioning government institutions -
is "all sail and no rudder." The political system scuds along at a frightening
pace in whatever direction the wind is blowing, but it lacks any institutional
steering mechanism to drive the system into the political winds to reach its
ultimate destination of security and efficient delivery of government
services.
The common-sense observation that democracies do not
spring fully formed was confirmed by a United Nations University study that
concluded premature or inadequately designed elections in a volatile environment
may fuel violence, magnify chaos and lead to authoritarian regimes, thereby
retarding - and sometimes reversing - progress toward democracy.
In
theory the Palestinian democracy may have cast off too soon in such stormy seas,
but in practice it is an accomplished fact, and the question is, can some
political rudder be installed with Hamas at the helm? The first practical problem that Europe
and the United States must address is how a Palestinian government controlled by
Hamas will be funded. The Palestinian Authority's annual budget is $1.6 billion,
the majority of which comes from Europe, which has indicated it won't continue
to finance a Palestinian government controlled by Hamas. Clearly, the United
States government shouldn't, either, which means the $150 million in aid
scheduled to go the Palestinian Authority in development projects cannot now
occur.
Bush
was right when he said of Hamas, "I don't see how you can be a partner in peace
if you advocate the destruction of a country as part of your platform. And I know you can't be a partner in
peace if your party has got an armed wing."
That
said, what policy should the U.S. government pursue now?
One option is to withhold any funding until Hamas either
renounces its use of violence and its intention to destroy Israel or its
government collapses. The problem
with this option is that there may be undesirable sources of money, i.e.,
Al-Qaida, Iran and others within the radical Islamic movement willing to fund a
Hamas-controlled Palestinian government. If we
allow a Hamas government to struggle and collapse for lack of revenue, we may
only increase the likelihood that the Palestinian Authority will implode into a
failed experiment in democracy and become a breeding ground for
terrorism.
The
good news is that in spite of Hamas' continued anti-Israel rhetoric and its
refusal to disarm, there has existed a yearlong cease-fire - the product of a
complicated four-way negotiation between Israel, the Palestinian Authority,
Egypt and Hamas - that actually has been observed better than the cease-fire
between Israel and Fatah. If Hamas is not to suffer the same fate as Fatah at
the hands of voters, it will need to do what Fatah could not - provide security,
end corruption, deliver day-to-day services and advance negotiations with Israel
toward final establishment of a Palestinian state. Hamas has every incentive now to
maintain the cease-fire.
Perhaps this same back-channel mechanism that gave rise
to the imperfect cease-fire with Hamas can also be used and expanded to convince
Hamas to begin to accept the state of Israel as a fait accompli. Now is clearly
the time for creative diplomacy.
Jack
Kemp is Founder and Chairman of Kemp Partners and a contributing columnist to
Townhall.com.
HOW TO WIN FREEDOM
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ousting an authoritarian regime is often far easier than
sustaining
freedom afterward. Indeed, the best way to achieve
freedom is to use
"people power," rather than top-down reform or armed
revolt, says
Freedom House.
A
study of 67 transitions from authoritarian rule over the past 33
years found that there are four key characteristics of
political
transitions: the societal forces driving it, the strength
of nonviolent
civic resistance, the level of violence and the sources
of that
violence. These determine how successful transitions to
democracy are
achieved, says Freedom House.
According to researchers:
o Regime changes
generated by nonviolent civic resistance are
more
likely to be "free" or "partly free" today
than
countries in which political elites have launched the
transition or opposition groups have used violence
to
topple the government.
o About five of
the 47 countries that experienced generally
peaceful transitions are currently rated "not
free,"
compared with four of the 20 countries in which the
opposition employed violence.
o Policy makers
should offer support to nascent civic
resistance movements in order to foster democratic change.
Furthermore, in Iraq's case, the study offers no guide;
only three
of
the transitions - Panama, who is rated "free," Bosnia "partly free"
and
Cambodia, who is "not free" - were driven by external
interventions, says Freedom House.
Source: Adrian Karatnycky and Peter Ackerman., "How
Freedom Is Won:
From
Civic Resistance to Durable Democracy," Freedom House, 2005.
For
text:
http://www.freedomhouse.org/research/specreports/civictrans/FHCIVICTRANS.pdf
For
more on International:
http://www.ncpa.org/pi/internat/intdex1.html
The golden calf of
democracy
By:
Lawrence W. Reed
1-18-05
http://www.bipps.org/ARTICLE.ASP?ID=282
No
one knew better how to deflate the inflated than the late political satirist and
commentator H. L. Mencken. “Democracy,” he once said, “is the theory that
the common people know what they want, and deserve to get it good and hard.” He
also famously defined an election as “an advance auction of stolen goods.”
With so many promises made in this year’s elections to so many, his
description seems especially fitting.
Mencken was not opposed to democracy. He simply possessed
a more sobering view of its limitations than does today’s conventional wisdom,
which regards it as the unmentioned fourth branch of the
Trinity.
Democracy may be the world’s single most misunderstood
concept of political governance.
Commonly romanticized, it is assumed in most circles to ensure far more than it
possibly can. The Norman Rockwell portrait of engaged, informed citizens
contending freely on behalf of the common good is the utopian ideal that
obscures the very messy details of reality.
Pure, undiluted democracy would be unshackled majority
rule. Everybody would vote on
everything, and 50 percent plus one extra vote would decide every “public” issue
— and inevitably, a lot of what ought to be private ones, too. Ancient Athens
for a brief time came closest to this, but no society of any size and complexity
can practice this form of governance for very long. It’s unwieldy,
endlessly contentious, and disrespectful of the inalienable rights of
individuals who find themselves in the minority.
People like the sound of “democracy” because it implies
that all of us have an equal say in our government, and that a simple majority
is somehow inherently fair and smart in deciding issues. Subjecting every decision of governance to a vote of
the people, however, is utterly impossible. Many decisions have to be made
quickly and require knowledge that few people possess or have the time to become
expert on. Many decisions don’t belong in the hands of any government at all.
A pure democracy, even if possible, would quickly degenerate into the
proverbial two wolves and a sheep voting on what to have for
lunch.
Suppose someone says, “I just don’t like people with
boats and jewelry. I think we should confiscate their property. Let’s have a
vote on that.” A democratic purist would have to reply, “All in favor say
‘Aye’!” Anyone interested in protecting individual rights would have to say,
“That’s not a proper function of government, and even if 99 percent of the
citizens vote for it, it’s still wrong.”
In
common parlance, “democracy” has been stretched to mean little more than
responsive government. Because of such things as elections,
government officials cannot behave in a vacuum. That fact is laudable, but
it hardly guarantees that government will be good or limited. Even
the best and most responsive of governments still rest upon the legal use of
force — an inescapable fact that requires not blind and fawning
reverence, but brave, intelligent and determined
vigilance.
Elections are a political safety valve for dissident
views, because they rely on ballots instead of bullets to resolve
disputes. They allow for political
change without resorting to violence to make change happen — but the change a
majority favors can be right or wrong, good or evil. The folks who work to make
it easier to vote so more votes are cast should also spend their time
encouraging others to be well-informed before they vote.
In spite of this year’s candidates singing interminable
paeans to “our democracy,” America is thankfully not one and never has been. Our
founders established a republic, modifying democracy considerably.
It provides a mechanism whereby
almost anyone can have some say in matters of government. We can run for office. We can support candidates and
causes of our choosing. We can speak out in public forums. And, indeed, some
issues are actually decided by majority vote.
But
a sound republic founded on principles that are more important than
majority rule (like individual rights) will put strong limits on all this. In
its Bill of Rights, our Constitution clearly states, “Congress shall make no
law. ...” It does not say, “Congress can pass anything it wants so long as a
majority supports it.”
If
you worship the golden calf called democracy, you might want to think about
finding a different religion.
—
Lawrence W. Reed is president of the Mackinac Center for Public Policy in
Midland, Mich., and an adjunct scholar with the Bluegrass
Institute.
Categories: Government, Federal; Government,
General
Democracy: No Panacea
By Dale Franks
08/13/2002
E-Mail
against each other."
We've all heard this bromide so often
that we uncritically accept it as true.
Upon thinking about it a second
time, however, perhaps the real
conclusion on this adage should be
the "Scottish verdict": Not proven.
Certainly, in modern times,
democracies have tended to be allies, rather than enemies. It is
less
certain, however, that the tendency of modern democracies to
foreswear
war against each other stems from some shared quality of
democracy,
except insofar as democracies are reluctant warriors as a general matter.
But, until recently, there simply weren't a lot of democracies to begin
with.
Prior to the First World War, the number of actual democratic states
could
be counted on one's fingers. Indeed, even today, the number
of
democracies is far smaller than the number of authoritarian regimes
of
various stripes.
In addition, until the breakup of the Soviet Union, modern Europe,
where
most of today's democracies are concentrated, has always
operated
under the threat of one or another authoritarian government
attaining
continental dominance. Indeed, the struggle between republican
France
and imperial Germany to become the dominant continental power
in
Europe lasted from the German Unification of 1870 until the end of
the
Second World War. In that struggle, France's traditional enemy,
Britain,
became a French ally against Germany. The authoritarian German
state
was a greater threat to Britain - which was, by the end of the 19th
century,
about as democratic a government as existed anywhere - than
republican
France. This was true not, it must be understood, because France was
no
longer a threat to Britain, but rather because Germany was a greater one.
In the post-World War II era, the number of democracies - in Europe,
at
least - increased drastically. At the same time, those democracies
were
forced to ally themselves against the threat posed by the Soviet Union.
It
is true that democracies have tended not to war against each other
in
modern times, but, as we've seen, they had other fish to fry.
Authoritarian
regimes, who do not have to concern themselves with public audit,
have
tended to be prone to cause trouble. In consequence, democracies
have
banded together against the threats posed by autocrats because
such
threats were more immediate. That may say a lot about the
democracies'
shared commitment against authoritarianism, but it may not tell us
an
awful much about how democracies treat each other in the absence
of
compelling authoritarian threats.
We do, however, have knowledge of a time and place where
democracies
rather regularly warred against each other. The democratic city-states
of
Greek Classical Antiquity were built on a foundation of civic militarism.
The free yeoman farmers, who also served as the hoplites of the
Greek
phalanx, voted on whether to go to war. They usually elected their
military
leaders. As often as not, those leaders faced rigorous civilian audit of
their
conduct of military campaigns when they returned to the polis and
their
former hoplite subordinates reverted to their prior status as civilian
voters.
In some cases even successful, victorious generals were put on trial
for
their lives due to their lack of attention to their men's welfare while
on
campaign.
Modern
democracies may, perhaps, tend to be less inclined towards
warfare in general when compared with authoritarian states. But it is
not
entirely certain that democracies cannot evolve into warlike
states
themselves.
As UC Fresno Professor of Classics Victor Davis Hanson writes in
his
book, Carnage and Cultures, "[T]he choice of military response to win
or
protect territory was a civic matter, an issue to be voted on by
free
landowning infantrymen themselves." Additionally, he reminds us,
that
republican Rome operated in a similar fashion. "[T]he
republican
legionaries themselves felt confident that they fought to preserve
the
traditions of their ancestors (mos maiorum) and in accordance with
the
constitutional decrees of an elected government."
Being a democracy seems to have done little to bar the development
of
Athens as an imperial power in classical Greece, just as it presented
no
particular obstacle in preventing republican Rome from doing
likewise.
Both
states were democratic. In both states, the military leadership
was
elected or appointed by civilian leaders, and subjected to civilian audit
of
their conduct on a regular basis. Yet, they both became warlike
and
aggressive states.
There is no guarantee that a modern democracy could not do likewise.
For example, if a free, fair, and honest election were held in
Palestine
tomorrow, the chances are quite good that Yasser Arafat and
the
Palestinian Authority would be removed from power. Unfortunately,
the
replacement government would probably come from the more radical
ranks
of Hamas and the Al-Aqsa Brigades. It would be a perfectly
democratic
result, but such a democracy would be fairly threatening to
their
neighboring democrats in Israel.
Westerners in
general, and Americans in particular, are prone to
believe
some rather unrealistic things about democracy. Chief among these is
the
idea that democracy in and of itself is inculcated with some virtue
that
makes the people more peaceful and reasonable. Such a view is
entirely
specious.
The reason democracy works as an ameliorating institution in the West
is
because it is based upon a host of other liberal ideals. Democracy is
the
result of ideas such as individual equality, open debate, freedom
of
thought and speech, and freedom of the press. It is not a precursor
to
them. Such ideas
need to have relatively firm root in a society for
democracy to work as a restraining force.
Democracy is, of course a fine institution. If nothing else, it is a
wonderful
method for ascertaining what the people want, and selecting leaders
to
carry out the people's will. It is not, however, in and of itself, a
particularly
good way of ensuring that what people want is the right thing.
Some Thoughts on the Problems of
Democracy
found at
http://www.mercatus.org/
Gordon Tullock
March 15, 2002
Democracy is frequently referred to as a system of majority
voting. Granted, the
last
election in the United States the opposing candidate received more
popular
votes than
the winner, and neither received a majority of popular votes because
of
the
existence of other candidates, it is surprising that our system is called that."
Of
course the
winner did get a majority both in the Supreme Court and in the
electoral
college.
The loser got a majority in the Florida Supreme Court. 1
Why do we
call it "majority voting" when . . .
The
failure to get a majority in the popular vote is not particularly
uncommon.
Lincoln,
for example, got only 35 percent of the popular vote and if one of
the
three of
his opponents in the election, Douglas, had met him in a 2
candidate
election,
he would have won. The 1912 election, once again, had a winner
who
received
less than half the popular votes. In Wilson's case he had two
opponents,
either one
of which could have beaten him if the other had not been present.
The
current
government in Canada received less than half the popular vote and,
except
in wartime,
no British government has been elected by more half the voters
since
1920. In
both of these cases, of course, the winner had more than half of
the
representatives in Parliament. During its long reign in India, the
Congress party
never
received a majority of the popular vote. Normally it received less than
45
percent.
Another and
interesting case is the election of 1960. Nixon had more popular
votes
than
Kennedy but lost in the electoral college. The fact that Nixon had more
popular
votes, although not a majority of all votes, is almost a secret.
2
The
election of 1960 is interesting and here I foreshadow the major part of
this
article in
that the two strongest candidates for the final election were eliminated
in
the
selection processes of the two parties. It is reasonably certain that
Johnson
could have
beaten Nixon in both popular and electoral votes and that
Rockefeller
could have
beaten Kennedy . All of this does
not indicate the system is inferior, but
it does
suggest that we stop calling it majority voting.
The problem
of more than two alternatives
As on my
readers will know, there are two general types of democracy,
one
originating
in England long ago in which the voters directly select
individual
candidates.
The other, which originated on the continent in the 19th century,
is
called
proportional representation and I will to a large extent leave it out of
the
discussion
below. Actually, I rather prefer proportional representation, but it is
a
different
subject and requires different analysis.
But to
return to my main subject, the reader will have noticed that in each of
the
cases with
a winner who did not have a majority of the votes, more than
two
alternatives were presented to the voters. With only two candidates or
proposals
before the
voters these problems do not occur. Unfortunately, there are
many
people who
would like to be the president and many ways which the
government
income
could be spent.
In the real
world, it is likely that the system is confronted with more than
two
alternatives and it must either cut them down to two by some means or be
willing to
accept a
candidate or proposition chosen by less than a majority. Of course it
may
happen that
although there are three candidates or proposals one of him gets
more
than half
of the votes. But we should not have a system which depends on
that
chance.
The
paradox: from Condorcet to Black and Arrow
This
problem has been known for a very long time and procedures to either
simply
take the
one that has the most votes or reduce the number of alternatives to
two
and then
vote on the those two are orthodox. Unfortunately, none of
these
procedures
really overcome the problem. Shortly before the French
Revolution
two French
aristocrats, Condorcet and Borda, looked into the problem
and
Condorcet
found what is now known as Condorcet Paradox while
Borda
produced
system which avoided that Paradox but introduced another.
This was of
course the period of the great expansion of democracy and, perhaps
as
a result of
the enthusiasm for democracy, the problem was largely
forgotten
although
some mathematicians seem to have known about it. In the
mid-19th
century,
Lewis Carroll rediscovered the paradox and did considerable work on
it
without
finding a solution. He too was largely forgotten and the problem
was
rediscovered by Black who also discovered that he had predecessors
lost in the
obscurity
of minor mathematical publications.
Black
succeeded in reviving interest in the issue which is a little paradoxical since
it
is obvious
he did not like the idea of democracy having paradoxes. Working
with
Newing he
produced a proof that this paradox could not the avoided if there
were
more than
two alternatives. 3 Notably he did not put out his work as a criticism
of
democracy
because he was a firm believer in democracy. Nevertheless
careful
reading of
his book with Newing shows the impossibility of avoiding the
Paradox
except in
special cases.
While Black
and Newing were working, Arrow produced a general proof that
the
paradox
cannot be avoided in the general case.
4 This was his famous general
impossibility theorem. Notably it
was only a remarkably long delay in the refereeing
process
which prevented the Black and Newing paper from being published
before
Arrow.
In the
early days of research in public choice, papers dealing with the
paradox
were a
major component of papers submitted to me as editor of the journal. I
think
that most
of these papers were inspired by desire to avoid the paradox or at
least
to minimize
it. If this was the inspiration, it failed. The paradox continues and
indeed
I have
invented a much simpler although less elegant proof. 5
After
considerable delay I discovered a proof that the problem was
not
nonexistent, but of less importance than had been thought. If the voting
preceded in
the usual
way of legislatures with anyone free to introduce an amendment is,
it
would
precede to an outcome very close to the center of the cloud of
individual
optima. A
dictatorial chairman, however, could lead the votes to almost
anywhere
he wished.
Since the usual procedure is not involving a dictatorial chairman,
this
meant that
the voting normally would lead to a more or less satisfactory
outcome.
Professor
Arrow, in a very kind letter, accepted in the bulk of my reasoning
but
pointed out
that the latter part was not really mathematically strict. He was
right,
but the
reasoning was very strong even if not perfect, mathematicians standpoint.
6
What are
fans of democracy to do?
The end
result of all of this work is most disappointing for proponents
of
democracy.
Since the author and all of the readers of this paper are
such
proponents
of democracy we should all the unhappy about it. As far as I can see,
however,
the usual response is not to be sad, but to sweep the problem under
the
rug.
Psychologically this is no doubt an optimal response, but it seems to me
that
scholars
should busily search for some better way of dealing with the paradox.
I
frankly
admit I have not found one, but the point of this article is to attempt
to
interest
other scholars in a revival of voting problem, so important in the early days
of Public
Choice, but normally today not even mentioned in the average issue
or,
indeed, in
the average 10 issues.
This is
particularly surprising granted that intellectuals are currently
vigorously
producing
arguments for democratic governments, and hence would be one
would
think
particularly interested in eliminating paradoxes in democracy. The new
arguments
for majority voting, and the authors normally refer to majority
voting
rather than
simply democracy fall into two categories. The first is the allegation
that
democracy's
tend to produce capitalistic economies and hence are
prosperous.
Dictatorships are allegedly less efficient in the economic
field.
Democracy and economic progress
In the
first place, economists have long known for (or at least many of them
have)
that a
capitalistic system is a better method and of producing prosperity than
a
centrally
directed one. In the last few years most intellectuals have adopted
this
idea. Note
however, that except for a certain number of "reactionary"
economists
this idea
was not popular among intellectuals 50 years ago. Warren
Nutter
undertook a
major research project in communist statistics and decided that
the
rate of
growth of the Soviet Union was not in any way remarkable. Indeed it
was
about that
of United States and markedly lower than that of Japan.
As a result
he was practically drummed out of the economic profession. Note
that
efforts to
duplicate his research turned out to be surprisingly similar although
the
CIA which
funded them never overtly admitted that. It was however not just
the
CIA which
disagreed. To repeat, Nutter's career was more or less terminated
in
the
economic profession. The University of
Virginia did not give him significant pay
raises and
moved him to an inconvenient office. He could not go anywhere
else
because
other universities also thought that he was following his ideology and
not
his
science.
This was a
personal tragedy for Nutter and a policy tragedy for many
governments.
The view
that economic progress required central control by someone
not
hampered by
democratic mechanisms was widely held. Many of the people
who
felt this
way remained in favor of democracy for reasons other than its
economic
effects.
Nevertheless, the recent view sweeping intellectuals that democracy
works
better in
economics than a communist dictatorship is recent. Further, as far as I can
see, like
the earlier enthusiasm for communist dictatorships in the economic field,
it
was based
on nothing more than one of the waves of enthusiasm that tend to
sweep
the
intellectual classes, although the collapse of the old order in Russia
undoubtedly
contributed
If we
look at the real world, Japan, Germany, France, and India are
all
democracies
and doing very badly in their economies while Singapore and
Hong
Kong
continue to be prosperous with dictatorships and China, a
clear-cut
dictatorship and a rather impressive one, currently claims the highest
rate of growth
of any
significant country. Speaking for
myself, I tend to distrust communist
statistics,
but observation on a recent trip to China indicates it is very much
better
off than it
was not too long ago, at the end of the great proletarian
cultural
revolution.
Democracy and peace
Another
recent argument for democracy is that democracies are relatively
peaceful.
This began
with view that democracies did not engage in aggressive
wars.
Apparently,
after a while, some intellectuals read the history of 19th-century
in
which
democracy's conquered much of the world, and the claim was reduced
to
one in
which democracy's do not fight other democracies. The original claim
was
particularly surprising since many of the intellectuals who made it were
American
citizens
and therefore should have been aware that United States had seized
is
present
geographic area by a series of minor but certainly aggressive
wars.
Consider
the reduced claim that democracies rarely fight other
democracies.
During a
rather long period in which democracies were rare and hence had
little
opportunity
to fight each other this was undoubtedly true. Still it should be kept
in
mind that
in 1914 it could easily have been argued that both England and
Imperial
Germany
were democracies, indeed the major undemocratic country in the
war
was Russia.
Of course at that time all the monarchies were moving
toward
democracy
and England and Germany were much farther along than Russia.
The
end product
of the war was that what progress Russia had made towards
democracy
was canceled and one of the world's worst autocracies put in its place.
The
dissolution of Austria-Hungary was disastrous by any standard. The history
of
the
fragments was complicated, but on the whole a setback for democracy.
Since
shortly
after the war Italy became a dictatorship, albeit a rather mild one
as
compared to
Russia, it is not very obvious that the allied victory
expanded
democracy.
World War
II had a very nasty dictatorship, the Soviet Union, on the same
side
with United
States and England. Indeed it did most of the fighting. Japan had
an
elected
legislature and the Emperor's powers were very modest. It seems likely
that
they should
be regarded as a constitutional monarchy rather than as a
dictatorship.
The end product of the war was of course
the great expansion of the Soviet
dictatorship so that Europe in 1945 was less democratic than it had been
in 1930.
Once again
to refer to the war as a war for democracy is misleading
Better
alternatives?
I have been presenting all of this
material which could be regarded as an attack on
democracy,
not in order to run down democracy but indicate that the
enthusiasm
for
democracy in the last 10 years and for communist dictatorship in the early
'50s
were simply
examples of the instability of intellectual opinion. Personally I
prefer
democracies, but I must admit that the arguments for a democratic state
are much
weaker than
those for a capitalistic economy.
Further, when you look around the
world you
realize that Prince Bismarck's invention, the welfare state is
largely
dominant in
democracies. Since the long run prospects of that system are poor,
this
could be an
argument against democracy. It is
however quite possible to feel as I
do that in
spite of its defects, democracy is better than the currently
known
alternatives.
So far
this paper has not had any dominant theme except that it shows
little
enthusiasm
for democratic methods of government. I have to admit that I am
not
enthusiastic about democracy. Like Churchill, I favor it over its
current
competitors, but it seems to me that we should be looking for something
better.
The purpose
of this note is first to deal with certain popular arguments
for
democracy,
which I think are false, as a preliminary to encouraging my listeners
to
look for
new forms of government.
I find when
talking to people about improvements in government the first
response
with
respect to any idea is to ask, "Is it more democratic than our
present
methods?"
If it were it would have the same defects. It could be, however,
that
there is
another form of government which has all of the advantages of
our
democracy
but adds something on to it. I have no suggestions at the moment but
I
believe
that seeking a better form of government then democracy is sensible
policy.
It may be
of course that the better form is a modification of our present
democracy.
If we look
around the world we observe some democratic governments that
are
more
successful than others. In my opinion the Swiss government is not only
the
best
democratic government in the world but also the best
government.
Thus
copying it
would be an improvement even though I am great admirer of
our
Constitution. Melding the two might be an excellent idea. But I hope that
the public
choice
scholars can do better.
But let me
return to my main theme which is problems with our present
democracy.
I will
begin by once again turning to either the Arrow theorem, or the
Black
Newing
proof that the voting process has paradoxes.
Back to the voting paradox
Roughly
speaking, simple majority voting works very well if they're only
two
alternatives. When there
are more the outcome may be close to random. In
general, in
democracies there are more than two people who would like given
job
and they're
more than two policy suggestions for any given problem. In
most
functioning
democracies these multiple choices are winnowed down to two
which
are then
voted on. It is not obvious that one of the alternatives eliminated in
the
winnowing
down process could not get a majority over whoever wins in
the
election
limited to the two survivors.
Of course
the winnowing down process does not always get the final
choice
pattern
down to two alternatives. I above mentioned cases in the American
system
in which no
one got a majority because there were more than 2 alternatives
which
attracted
significant votes. If one looks at policy choices we once again find
a
number of
alternatives offered which are then winnowed down to two
by
successive
votes in accord with the procedural rules in use in that particular
voting
body.
Granted the prospect of paradox, it is by no means obvious that one of
the
other
alternatives which lost earlier could not be the winner selected by
the
operation
of the rules of order.
To take a
simple and artificial set of choices, suppose that the various
alternatives
actually
offered as amendments in the Senate are: A, B, C, D, E, and F. Note
that
these are
only a set of amendments offered on the floor of the Senate. If
we
considered
those offered in committee, the set of amendments to the House
version
and what
was done in the conference committee, probably at least 25 or
30
possible
variants are proposed at one or another stage in the process. One of
these
numerous
alternatives could be capable getting majority against the winner in
the
formal
vote. Suppose for example that the votes are taken F against E, the
winner
against D.
and so forth. This leads to B winning, but that B as never been
offered
against E,
so it's perfectly possible that E could beat B but not beat
D.
This is
simply an example of the standard possibility of circular majorities. We
have
no real
measure of how often it happens. The first effort to find out how often
was
a joint
article by Colin Campbell and myself which generated random
preferences
for a large
body of synthetic voters in the computer memory and then tested
them
for cycles.
The method
is obviously crude but the only improvements on our design have
been
based on
the same method but with larger collections of random numbers
assigned
to voters.
Obviously, we need improvements but it is clear that the cycles
are
reasonably
common. In this paper, I will make no effort to find out how
common
they are. I
simply assume that they sometimes happen, and when they do,
the
outcome is
not one we should respect. Of course, if they were rare we
could
regard the
possibility as a minor defect, and go ahead. If they were common
they
would not
be a minor but a major defect. Unfortunately we do not
know.
The effect
of the paradox on Congressional elections
But let us
go on to the candidates selected by election. In addition to the
paradoxes
mentioned
above, in the United States there is another very serious problem. In
the
2000
election year, 31 members of the House of Representatives chose not to
run
--
presumably mainly in order to retire. Of the remaining to 394, all but 11
were
re-elected.
It is sometimes said that the security of tenure held by members of
the
House of
Representatives is greater than that held by members of the House
of
Lords.
The basic
reason for this security is that the members of the House are able to
get
the federal
government to expend great resources for their re-election. They
have
large
staffs, considerable free travel, access to a free television studio in
the
basement of
the capital, and many other advantages. There doesn't seem to be
any
exact
accounting for this money, but I asked a professional lobbyist how much
he
thought it
was worth and he gave a figure of two and half million per
congressman
per
election. It's obvious why they are so secure and obvious why they want
to
restrict
campaign expenditures by potential opponents.
Senators do
not have as firm a grasp on their offices as the members of the
House
and a
President probably even less. In the case of the President resources spent
by
the federal
government to get him re-elected are immense. It is probably true
that
resource
expenditures have the highest payoff when there is little other
information.
Thus, the
value of these large government expenditures would be highest for
the
House. It
should be noted that in the 19th century when these expenditures
were
not as
large congressman normally served only one term.
This leads
us perform a mental experiment. There must be several thousand
people
who would
like to be President and who think at least a little bit of running. Most
of
them drop
the idea almost immediately, but some will give it further
consideration
and talk to
people about the possibilities. At this stage we're down to
something
like the 50
possible candidates. They "test the water." There was a
senator
unknown to
me who recently visited Washington to a give a speech to
an
organization which he thought might support him. The Washington Post
reported
him as "
testing the water" and said he received an enthusiastic response. This
put
him a bit
above many of the above 50, perhaps in the top 10 or 20.
At this
point he would begin trying harder to get support from one of the
parties,
from
special-interest groups, etc. he would also begin trying to raise
money.
Eventually
he would either be nominated or not. Whether he became
President
would
depend on who else was nominated and, in particular, how many
were
nominated.
The prospect that somebody who could beat the eventual
winning
candidate
was eliminated early in the game is certainly good. In other words
the
paradox
exists here as well as in the choice of issues. Indeed it appears to
even
stronger
here.
Some
suggestions for improvement
This rather
lengthy essay has raised a number of difficulties of a fundamental
nature
with
democracy. They do not prove that democracy is inferior to any other
given
system, but
they do indicate that we should substitute hard research for
enthusiasm.
In recent
years there's been very little effort to solve these problems. I would like
to
encourage
my audience to go back to the fundamentals.
As a sort
of study aid for people looking for improvements in the structure
of
government
I should like to list some suggestions that already been made. This
is
not
intended to be a complete list of possible changes, but only a set which
have
been made
but have received little or no attention. I think they should be
given
more
attention by students in this field, but I hope that someone will invent
even
better
ones.
I begin
with Clarke's demand revealing process. This has had more
attention than
the others
including a complete issue of public choice devoted to it. As the
reader
may know, I
have done some work in this area and am an enthusiast for
the
system. It
permits the voter to express not only which alternative he prefers,
but
also how
much he prefers it. The outcome might lead to a minority of intense
voters
defeating a
majority of near indifferent voter.
My second
proposal is Earl Thompson's suggestion to put individual policy
changes
up, in
essence, to a bid. Among other things this permits compensation of
the
losers. The
third proposal is Hanson's betting procedure in which the voter may
be
rewarded
for favoring a decision for certain proposals if ex post an
impartial
commission
finds that it adds to the national welfare.
All three
of these methods are radically different from our current
voting
procedures.
Indeed, it could be argued that they're not really voting at
all.
Nevertheless they are a start. Note that all three permits a minority to
win over a
majority.
Also, all three of these suggestions are subject to the Arrow, Newing
and
Black
problem. If there are more than two alternatives, the order in which they
are
taken up
may lead to different outcomes. Voting on all alternatives at the same
time
may also
lead to different outcomes. As in other cases where these problems
arise,
voting on
the order of taking them up to also leads to paradoxes. Still these are
a
start in
investigating radically different ways of making decisions, and they're
not
monarchical.
Alternative
voting procedures
These are
variants on the actual voting procedure. Other possible changes
involve
the problem
of who can vote. Dennis Mueller suggested that voters to given a
short
examination
before being permitted to vote. The intent, of course, is to restrict
the
voting to
people who at least know some elementary facts about the government.
I,
myself,
perhaps influenced by my knowledge of China, have suggested
an
examination
for the candidates. Following the Chinese precedent the
examination
for
different offices would be of different degrees of difficulty. A man who
would
fail the
president's exam might well pass that for alderman. Again following
the
Chinese
precedent the examination would leave several candidates for each
office
to be
selected by the voters. They would remain in control but the number
of
alternatives would be reduced. If the examination were well-designed
the
alternatives would also be improved.
It is not
obvious that one man one vote is ideal. Corporations give different
people
different
votes depending on how many shares they own. As an aside, this
system
was
originated by Lord Clive. He not only started the British Empire in India by
his
victory at
Plassey, but he also, in an unsuccessful effort to control the
Honorable
Company,
caused changes from one man one vote to one share one vote. It's
not
at all
obvious which is the best system. I find, however, that most people
are
strongly
opposed to, let us say, the one vote for every dollar in taxes paid.
Whether
this is
merely opposition to a new idea or a rational position, I do not know.
When
I talk to
people about it their objections normally are not well reasoned.
Indeed
they
normally offer no reason at, all, merely opposition.
There are
other proposals for giving different people to different numbers of
votes.
Nevil
Schute wrote a whole novel, In the Wet, devoted to this idea, and one of
the
richest men
in United States - Hunt -- also produced a book on it. The
additional
votes could
be distributed in terms of payment for services. For a modest
example,
suppose any
war veteran who actually got shot at gets an extra vote.
Another
radical idea is to permit people to hold their votes in abeyance. I could,
for
example,
decide not to vote for president in 2004 and then cast two votes in
2008.
Or perhaps
I could have credit, testing two votes in 2004 and none in
2008.
Perhaps to
charge interest, I might be prohibited from casting votes for Senators
in
2008.
Undemocratic governments and conclusion
But let us
consider some undemocratic ideas. Gibbon thought the period of
the
adoptive
Emperor's in Rome was the happiest in human history. Mexico used
a
somewhat
similar system from 1931 to 1987. It also had a reasonably
good
government
by the rather moderate standards of Mexican government's. For a
list
of other
governments which are not democratic, I suggest my
forthcoming
"Undemocratic Governments".
The reader
should keep in mind that it is not necessary for the government form
to
be suitable
for a nation state. It may be suitable only for use in
individual
governments
which form only a part of the nation. If these were undemocratic,
they
would
nevertheless be subject to popular control because of the possibility
of
moving.
Note that some government functions cannot conveniently be broken
up.
In military
matters economies of scale require large government units. There
are
other areas
where breaking up government is unlikely to be successful. As
an
obvious
example consider the regulation of the electromagnetic spectrum.
No
doubt the
reader can think of many others. Nevertheless, pre-1870
Germany
seems to
have been pretty well governed although none of the
constituent
monarchies
were democratic.
I do not claim
that any of the alternative governments I have listed is
ideal.
Nevertheless, I think they should receive careful study. Further, I think
we should
look
for other forms of government. There is no natural law which says we
cannot
invent new forms of government which are better than the current sample.
It is to
encourage the reader to engage in such radical thought that this essay is dedicated.
************R15
'Tinker
Bell' Economics Colors Inflation Predictions
Oil
prices are rising. Food prices are up. The world economy is gaining momentum.
Central banks, still fighting aftereffects of the financial crisis, are keeping
interest rates low. Is an outbreak of U.S. inflation around the
corner?
Federal
Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke says it isn't. It's hard to sustain inflation with
so many people out of work and so many offices, stores and factories empty, he
reasons. Plus he sees no big rise in "inflation expectations," the wage and
price increases that business executives, consumers, workers and investors
anticipate.
Related
Reading
"Inflation
expectations remain well anchored," Fed officials concluded confidently at their
last meeting, minutes show, despite obvious inflationary threats abroad.
Translation: Food and energy price increases won't prompt higher wages and
prices throughout the U.S., partly because people don't think they will.
The
notion is that if we all expect inflation, we'll seek higher wages, prices and
rents, and that will produce the inflation we expect. Conversely, no matter
what's happening in Libya or grain markets, no matter how much yelping about
commodity prices squeezing profit margins, if we all believe the Fed won't
permit inflation to take off, it won't. Call it the Tinker Bell school of
economics.
This
actually was an improvement in economic thinking. Fifty years ago, economists
assumed people expected future inflation to match the recent past. Then came a
generation of economists arguing that people are smarter than that: Their
expectations change when the world does. (If it usually takes you 20 minutes to
get to work, and you hear one lane will be closed for construction, you'll leave
earlier.)
View
Full Image
So
central bankers began tracking inflation expectations. It seemed smarter than
steering the economy by looking in the rear-view mirror of last month's consumer
price index. "The state of inflation expectations," Mr. Bernanke said in a 2007
lecture, "greatly influences actual inflation and thus the central bank's
ability to achieve price stability."
Managing
inflation expectations became part of a central banker's job—with substantial
success. As Goldman Sachs wrote in a recent note, food and oil price spikes in
the mid-1980s led to large, persistent increases in economy-wide inflation.
Lately, they haven't. "[T]he most likely explanation for this change...is the
improved anchoring of inflation expectations since the mid-1980s," Goldman's
Sven Jari Stehn wrote.
It
sounds comforting, but there are a few rubs.
One
is that inflation expectations are easier to define than to measure precisely.
The
Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia surveys professional forecasters quarterly.
They see a spike in inflation this quarter on higher food and energy prices,
but over the next decade see 2.3% annual consumer-price-index inflation, a
bit below forecasts they have made over the past
decade.
Consumers
aren't so relaxed, perhaps because they focus more on gasoline and groceries.
The University of Michigan/Reuters survey found, on average, that consumers expect prices to rise 3.4%
over the next year, faster than they did a year earlier. But the five-to-10-year outlook, which
the Fed watches, is stable at about 2.9%.
Alas,
there is no reliable inflation-expectation survey of business decision-makers. But in a 1992 survey by Princeton
economist Alan
Blinder, half the businesses said they "never take economy-wide inflation
into account" in setting prices.
An
alternative is to look to financial markets. To gauge their expectations, compare
yields on Treasury debt that pays interest at a fixed rate, say 3.5% for 10
years, with yields on debt that adjusts so the return rises with the Consumer
Price Index. The late economist Milton Friedman liked this measure so much,
he proposed that Congress require the Fed to target it. But this gauge can
be hard to read, particularly in a financial crisis in which jittery investors
flock to the most liquid Treasury securities—conventional ones—and shy away from
inflation-protected securities.
At
face value, this measure suggested a
late-2008 deflation scare that has abated. Inflation expectations now are back
at pre-crisis levels, hardly a warning of danger. A more complicated
dissection of markets by the Cleveland Fed finds a steady decline in inflation
expectations over the past 20 years and now see inflation of just 1.8% over the
next decade.
The
other rub is that inflation expectations are "anchored"—until they're not. They
may change faster than the Fed responds.
"The tricky issue is forecasting whether inflation expectations might change,"
says Joel Prakken of Macroeconomic Advisers, whose model uses inflation
expectations to help forecast inflation. "They have been remarkably steady for
more than a decade. Presumably this is related to Fed credibility, but it also
might be that we've been lucky not to have the big inflation shocks we suffered
in the '70s and '80s."
Not
so long ago falling inflation expectations at a time of low inflation had
the Fed worrying about much-dreaded deflation. That moment has passed. Now, the
central bank faces a two-fold challenge: To avoid being stampeded into
tightening credit prematurely by the uproar over food and energy prices while
also avoiding complacency bred by overreliance on measures of inflation
expectations.
Write
to David
Wessel at capital@wsj.com
http://www.latinbusinesschronicle.com/app/article.aspx?id=4706
Tuesday,
January 04, 2011
CEOs: Bright
Brazil Outlook
| |||||||||||
|
Irish
Remedy for Hard Times: Leaving
By
GUY
CHAZAN
Jean
Curran for The Wall Street Journal
Martin
Lynch anticipated that his family would leave Ireland to pursue better
opportunities.
CARLOW,
Ireland—The people of Ireland go to the polls Friday to deliver what's expected
to be a knock-out blow to the governing party. But many are choosing to vote in
a traditional Irish fashion: with their feet. Tens of thousands are joining in a
new wave of emigration, turning their backs on a country mired in economic
malaise.
Martin
Lynch's family is one of many that are being scattered to the four winds. In the
past year, one son has moved to Germany, another to England. His daughter is
planning her departure for London, and Mr. Lynch and his wife are bound for
Australia.
"Ireland
has let me down," says the 62-year-old, a retired caretaker of the local
technology institute here in the southeastern town of Carlow. "We just seem to
be incapable of governing ourselves."
Nothing
seems to better symbolize Ireland's economic crisis than the re-emergence of
large-scale emigration, a scourge many hoped had been slain for good. It's a
theme that has cast a long shadow over the campaign for this election, which
polls suggest will uproot Fianna Fail, the party that has dominated Irish
politics for 80 years.
The
great recession has triggered yet another wave of Irish emigration. WSJ's Don
Duncan reports on how that is playing out in the national
election.
On
the hustings and on voters' doorsteps, emigration is on everyone's lips. For
many it encapsulates the sense of hopelessness that has descended on Ireland as
the country grapples with one of the worst economic crises in its history.
"We
never thought we'd see this again," says Alan Barrett, an expert in migration at
the Economic and Social Research Institute, a Dublin think tank. "It
brings back a lot of bad memories."
Forced
emigration was long Ireland's curse. A million fled in the decade after the
great potato famine of the mid-19th century, which killed some 800,000 people.
There was a huge exodus a hundred years later, with thousands lured away by a
building boom in the U.K. Another mass migration followed in the
1980s.
The
country's fortunes appeared to change for good in the mid-1990s, when years of
big spending on higher education, low corporate taxes, generous European Union
aid and an influx of foreign investment helped transform Ireland into the
"Celtic Tiger." Between 1995 and 2000, the economy grew nearly 10% a year on
average, and Ireland began to catch up with its richer European
neighbors.
The country's far-flung diaspora started trickling back to feast on the new
opportunities.
However,
by 2008, as Ireland's banking crisis triggered a deep recession and unemployment
soared to 13%, the tide turned again. Ireland's Central Statistics Office
predicts that 100,000 people will emigrate over the next two years, more than
twice the number that left in 2009 and 2010. That comes to about 1,000 per week,
and exceeds the last peak in emigration in 1989 when 44,000 people moved away.
The
overall figure represents just over 2% of Ireland's population of 4.47
million,
which economists say by itself isn't enough to prevent a recovery.
But
there are fears that the more people leave, the greater the tax burden on those
who stay and the bigger the decline in public services like education and health
care.
An
exodus could also reduce demand for housing, depressing already low prices and
deepening the losses faced by Irish banks. Since the government is on the hook
for banks' liabilities, more losses could worsen Ireland's fiscal crisis,
leading to more austerity measures and higher unemployment. Such a "fiscal feedback loop" could
increase the incentive to leave, says John McHale, an economist at the National
University of Ireland, Galway.
And
while demographic data on emigrants is scarce, many of those leaving are
believed to be well-educated professionals—precisely the people Ireland needs to
lead a recovery. "In a modern, knowledge-based economy, dense, diverse cities
full of highly-skilled people are a critical competitive advantage," says Mr.
McHale. "If the most enterprising people leave, you undermine that
advantage."
More
Ireland's
loss is others' gain, and global demand for Irish workers has increased
dramatically. "We've had more inquiries over the last six weeks from companies
targeting Irish people than we've ever had before," says Stephen McLarnon, head
of SGMC Media Group in Dublin, which organizes exhibitions for those wanting to
work abroad. Mr. McLarnon says two-thirds of his current applicants have college
degrees. Booths at SGMC's next
exhibition have been snapped up by federal and state governments in Australia,
New Zealand and Canada.
It's
not just English-speaking countries that the Irish are heading for. After the U.K., the favorite destinations
for Irish people last year were new European Union member states such as Poland
and the Czech Republic, with older EU countries like France and Germany coming
in third, according to figures from Ireland's Central Statistics Office.
Opposition
politicians pin the blame on Fianna Fail. Enda Kenny, leader of Fine Gael, and
the man expected to be Ireland's next prime minister, said in an interview that
fighting unemployment, the main driver of emigration, will be his party's top
priority if it wins the election. The party has pledged to create 20,000 new
jobs a year over the next four years, and invest €7 billion, or $9.5 billion, in
broadband, renewable energy and water infrastructure.
Yet
whoever comes to power, Ireland faces years of austerity as it tries to wrestle
down a massive budget deficit. To secure a €67.5 billion international bailout
last year, the country committed to a four-year spending plan that envisages
savings of €15 billion, or nearly 10% of its annual economic output. Pensions
and benefits will be cut and taxes hiked.
Not
all economists see emigration as a bad thing. Some say it could act as a crucial
safety valve to help restore equilibrium to labor markets. And in a globalized
world, moving abroad for work isn't necessarily a permanent loss for the
homeland. Workers could gain experience and skills that will give them an
advantage in the job market if they return home.
"It's
terrible that it has to happen, but it's probably preferable to go abroad in
search of work than to stay unemployed here," says ESRI's Dr. Barrett. "At a
minimum it keeps their skills active, and it takes the strain off the social
welfare budget."
Mr.
Lynch's story encapsulates the history of Ireland, with its ebb and flow of
migration and return. His father moved to London in 1924 from the hardscrabble
western county of Roscommon in search of work. It was a difficult time, with job
ads routinely featuring the phrase, "No Irish Need Apply." He flourished
nonetheless, running a string of pubs in London.
But
he always felt homesick, and the family moved back to Dublin in the early 1950s,
when Martin was five. They managed pubs there, but never attained the quality of
life they'd enjoyed in Britain. "My parents always regretted coming back," Mr.
Lynch says.
In
the 1950s, the main pattern of migration was in the other direction. In the
decade after 1945, some 320,000 people left Ireland, most of them for the U.K.,
then in the grip of a post-war labor shortage, and for the U.S. The Irish
countryside was littered with abandoned houses, and parishes struggled to muster
full football teams.
Mr.
Lynch remembers the "American wakes" of the time, all-night parties fueled with
dancing and potcheen, a local moonshine, that marked the departure of young men
for the U.S. "It was just like a wake, because you knew you'd never see them
again," he says.
In
1966, Mr. Lynch emulated his father, moving to England to serve in the British
army. But he returned after less than a year when his parents fell ill. Over the
next 14 years he worked in sales at various Irish oil and gas companies. In the
recession of the 1980s he lost his job, and spent much of the next eight years
unemployed.
It
was a tough decade for the whole country, and many emigrated. Mr. Lynch recalls
seeing tearful reunions at Dublin Airport as smartly-dressed sons and daughters
came back home for the Christmas holidays. "I remember thinking—I hope to God my
kids don't end up leaving like that," he says.
A
quarter century later, Mr. Lynch's children are doing just
that.
Last
year, his eldest son, Eoin, 29, met and fell in love with a German woman, took
two years' leave of absence from his job at an insurance company and moved to
Stuttgart. The college graduate is now studying German there in the hope of
becoming a teacher. He says he was glad to get out when he
did.
"There
was a lot of negativity," he says. "People didn't have lots of money to spend on
life insurance and pensions." Germany, in contrast, "is absolutely
booming."
Another
son, Damien, 28, studied aeronautical engineering at Limerick University but
couldn't find work in Ireland. He landed a job last year with a British
engineering firm in the northern English town of Derby.
View
Full Image
Jean
Curran for The wall Street Journal
Clare
Lynch plans to emigrate to the U.K.
Neither
Eoin nor Damien say they had qualms about quitting Ireland. But their sister,
Clare, who is 24, is more conflicted.
A
nurse, she recently completed postgraduate training in pediatrics. But since the
course ended last October, she's been unable to find a full-time job, partly due
to a hiring freeze imposed by Ireland's state-run health service.
She
has a temporary job with an agency, working at a center for children with
learning disabilities in Cork. It's a 60-mile commute every day from her home in
Limerick. She doesn't know from one week until the next whether she'll be kept
on.
"When
I started, people said nurses and teachers would have jobs for life," she says.
But by the time her studies were drawing to an end, that had changed. Clare
recalls her dean of studies telling her at her graduation ceremony, "'I hope we
won't lose you to England, but I'm pretty sure we will.'"
That
prediction has now come true. Ms. Lynch says she has made the "painful" decision
to try her luck in the U.K., where demand for nurses runs high. She spent New
Year's with her brother Eoin in Germany, and "realized that we were all going to
be living in different countries," she says. "It's
heart-breaking."
For
Mr. Lynch, Carlow symbolizes Ireland's downturn. A town of 18,000 in the
country's southeast, it was once a magnet for foreign companies. But investment
has dribbled away. A big sugar factory closed in 2005, taking 350 jobs with it,
and a German engineering firm shut down its car component plant in 2007. Two
years later, Procter & Gamble Co.'s Braun unit, which had once employed more
than 2,400 staff in the town, closed an electrical appliance factory. Carlow's
quaint high street—once nicknamed the Golden Mile—is pockmarked with boarded-up
shops.
"Our
economic miracles are always of such short duration," says Mr. Lynch. "We just
can't seem to have a sustainable economy."
At
the Seven Oaks hotel in Carlow, the talk around the bar is of
leaving.
Declan
Gordon, a tattooed mechanic who repairs wind turbines, says most of his friends
are packing their bags. Some are bound for the U.K., he says, where the 2012
London Olympics has spurred demand for construction workers. The membership of
his local Gaelic Football club has dwindled from 30 to 15 in less than a year as
teammates have drifted away.
"It's
not like the U.S., where you can move to another state if the work dries up," he
says. "This place is so small, you have to leave."
In a
major decision issued last week, William Chandler of Delaware's Court of
Chancery ruled that corporate boards may use a "poison pill"—a device designed
to block shareholders from considering a takeover bid—for as long a period of
time as the board deems warranted. Because Delaware law governs most U.S.
publicly traded firms, the decision is important—and it represents a setback for
investors and capital markets.
The
ruling grew out of the epic battle between takeover target Airgas and bidder Air
Products. Air Products made a takeover bid for Airgas in 2010, increased it
several times, and kept it open until last week's decision. Airgas's directors
argued that defeating the premium offer would prove, in the long run, to be in
shareholders' interests. As the Chancery Court stressed, however, the directors
based their opinion solely on information publicly available to shareholders.
Why should shareholders, who have powerful incentives to get it right, not be
permitted to make their own choice between selling and staying independent?
Chancellor
Chandler stated that he would have preferred to let shareholders make the choice
at this stage, as they "know what they need to know . . . to make an informed
decision." But he felt that denying shareholders' right to choose was required
by previous Delaware cases, which recognized directors' right to block offers
out of concern that shareholders would accept them "in ignorance or a mistaken
belief" concerning the value of remaining independent.
Yet
the empirical evidence indicates that when directors use their power to block
offers, it often proves detrimental to shareholder interests. A research project
I am carrying out with colleagues John Coates and Guhan Subramanian has found
that boards that defeated premium offers failed on average, even in the long
run, to produce returns for their shareholders that made remaining independent
worthwhile.
Moreover,
the power of boards to block bids weakens the disciplinary force of the market
for corporate control. A substantial body of empirical research indicates that
boards' increased insulation from such discipline is associated with lower firm
value and worse corporate performance and decision-making.
Despite
the Delaware court's decision, investors still have recourse—because a poison
pill is powerful only as long as the directors supporting it remain in place.
Airgas's
directors were able to use a poison pill for more than a year because Airgas's
board is "classified." As such, only one-third of directors come up for election
in each annual meeting, so replacing a board majority requires waiting through
two annual meetings.
If, by
contrast, a company's shareholders could replace a majority of its board more
quickly, the board's power to block a takeover bid would be correspondingly
weakened.
Support
for changing corporate governance arrangements to allow for board
declassification is expressed in the proxy voting guidelines of many investment
managers, including American Funds, BlackRock, Fidelity and Vanguard. Indeed,
shareholder proposals in favor of board declassification have received average
support exceeding 65% of votes cast in each of the last five years. This makes
sense given the evidence (documented in a 2005 article I co-authored with Alma
Cohen, and confirmed by subsequent research) that board classification is
associated with lower firm valuation.
In
response, public companies have been agreeing to declassify, thus committing not
to block an offer favored by shareholders for too long. The number of S&P
500 companies with classified boards declined to 164 in 2009, from 300 in 2000.
Still, there's a great deal of room for improvement: Among the 3,000 public
companies with takeover defenses tracked by FactSet, about half still have
classified boards.
While
incumbents have for now won the right to use poison pills indefinitely, pressure
by shareholders could substantially limit their toxicity. That would produce
considerable benefits for investors and for our capital markets.
Mr.
Bebchuk is professor of law, economics and finance at Harvard Law School and
director of its corporate governance program. He has assisted institutional
investors in negotiating board declassification at publicly traded firms.
Earlier
this week, in a Wall Street Journal interview about investing in Russia, Russian
Deputy Prime Minister Igor Sechin surprised me. He cited my experience in Russia
as an example of the strength of the Russian investment climate. Mr. Sechin
argued that, based on the "economic efficiency" of my investments in Russia, I
should be "a happy man." While Mr. Sechin is correct that my investors realized
significant returns on their investments in Russian equities, I would hope that
no one ever has to endure the nightmare that my colleagues and I suffered in
Russia after achieving this success.
I
founded Hermitage Capital in 1996 and built up the firm to become the single
largest investor in the Russian stock market. We fought corruption and pushed
for transparency at a number of the companies we invested in. Not everyone
appreciated our efforts. In November 2005, the Russian government suddenly
revoked my visa and declared me a threat to "national
security."
Until
this point, Hermitage had been widely acknowledged as one of the biggest success
stories of Russia's post-Soviet capital markets. Unfortunately, this success
proved ephemeral once my firm was targeted by corrupt government
officials. In
his interview, Mr. Sechin said that "nobody touched" my investors. This is true.
We were able to move
all of my clients' money out of the country before senior Russian officials
working in league with private criminals expropriated Hermitage's investment
holding companies. Amazingly, these officials then
embezzled—from the Russian state itself—$230 million in taxes that Hermitage had
paid the prior year.
My
Russian business was destroyed through state action, but
this story is not about business or money.
It is
about the human cost of corruption, and specifically the tragedy of Sergei
Magnitsky, an outside lawyer working for Hermitage in Moscow. Sergei discovered
the $230 million tax-refund fraud perpetrated by senior officials from within
the Russian government. Instead of looking the other way, Sergei testified
against these officials to the Russian State Investigative Committee. Soon
thereafter he was arrested by the officials he named and thrown into pre trial
detention. Over the next year, these officials systematically tortured him in an
attempt to get him to withdraw his testimony. He was denied sleep, food and
clean water. He was placed in freezing cells with no window panes in the depths
of the Moscow winter. He was kept in cells in which sewage regularly flooded the
floor. Eventually he became critically ill and needed urgent medical care, which
was then repeatedly denied. Ultimately, Sergei's will was stronger than his
body and he died in state custody, alone on the floor of an isolation cell, at
the age of 37, leaving a wife and two
children.
View
Full Image
Corbis
This
is the reality behind the "attractive investment climate" that senior Russian
officials like Mr. Sechin are attempting to portray: an innocent man, falsely
arrested, isolated from his family for an entire year and tortured to death for
exposing state corruption. One year later, on the first anniversary of Sergei
Magnitsky's death, the Interior Ministry bestowed state honors on the cadre of
officers who had prosecuted him. The risk of losing one's business in
Russia today is real. But it is not the greatest risk investors face. Should
they, like Sergei, find themselves in the crosshairs of corrupt bureaucrats
working in league with criminals, investors in Russia risk losing their
lives.
Given
the scale of corruption in Russia and the growing list of investor horror
stories, I understand why Mr. Sechin is eager to redeem Russia's image in the
eyes of the world. He joins the efforts of his colleague, First Deputy Prime
Minister Igor Shuvalov, who arranged last month for a small panel of
high-profile western CEOs at Davos to offer soothing words about the security of
their investments in Russia.
The
challenge these men face is that the world knows only too well that words alone
mean nothing. The way to show that Russia is safe for investors is not to offer
CEO testimonials. If Messrs. Sechin and Shuvalov really want to claim that
Russia's investment climate is improving, the first thing they should do is to
prosecute the officials who arrested, tortured and killed Sergei Magnitsky and
perpetrated the crime that Sergei exposed, the largest tax fraud in Russian
history. The actions taken and roles played by Lt. Col. Artem Kuznetsov, Lt.
Col. Oleg Silchenko, Major Pavel Karpov and Col. Natalia Vinogradova—whose
signatures and orders surface throughout Magnitsky's ordeal and who continue to
enjoy the power and authority of the Interior Ministry—deserve especially close
attention.
Bringing
the responsible individuals to justice would be a first step to show that the
current Russian government is genuinely working to be on the right side of
history. The Magnitsky case has become a lightning rod for public opinion
because it is such a clear example of right versus wrong, and because it paints
in the starkest terms the very real human cost of investing in Russia
today.
Messrs.
Sechin and Shuvalov may regret the public attention the case continues to
receive around the world, but its high profile also presents them with an
opportunity. Prosecuting the people who killed Sergei Magnitsky would be
hundreds of times more credible than any hollow words in demonstrating that
Russia is finally taking real steps to protect investors and respect the rule of
law.
Mr.
Browder is founder and CEO of Hermitage Capital Management.
On
Capitol Hill last week, federal banking regulators suggested that the government
may soon reach a comprehensive settlement with banks on foreclosure procedures
and servicing. In theory such a settlement could unlock housing markets and
boost the economy. But recent statements by Comptroller of the Currency John
Walsh and FDIC Chair Sheila Bair suggest that they remain focused on using the
settlement to extend, rather than end, ongoing foreclosure delays.
Meanwhile,
states including New Jersey and Hawaii are considering imposing their own
moratoriums on foreclosure that, if they conflict with federal policy, may lead
to protracted litigation. This approach is the wrong medicine for our ailing
economy.
For
borrowers, delaying foreclosure only provides false hope. Today, a borrower
faces a foreclosure sale only after failing to make a payment for more than a
year. There is no reason to believe a brief additional time-out will allow such
borrowers to become current. To the contrary, data from the Mortgage Brokers
Association indicate that loans reaching the foreclosure stage almost never
avoid default, and that borrowers who become 90 days delinquent cure their
default only about 1% of the time.
Similarly,
recent research done for the National Bureau of Economic Research demonstrates
that loan-modification programs have mixed effectiveness. Data suggest that many
delinquent borrowers have the means to afford their mortgage payments, but are
so deeply "under water" on their mortgages that they are simply no longer
willing to pay. Others have insufficient income to afford any reasonable
mortgage payment.
View
Full Image
Getty
Images
Loan
modification programs cannot help borrowers without means, and extending them to
borrowers who can already afford their current mortgage payments will only
create further incentives for "strategic" defaults by those who can afford their
payments but would like to lower them. Federal government data from the Home
Affordable Modification Program suggest that as many as a third of borrowers
tentatively approved for temporary modifications do not complete their
three-month "trial periods" (and thus do not obtain modifications).
For
those who do obtain modifications, roughly half become delinquent again within
six months. Thus, while modification efforts are laudable, they are not the
solution.
The
unfortunate reality is that efforts to lengthen the foreclosure process will not
substantially alter borrower outcomes. They will only extend a painful time for
borrowers and the economy. During that time, uncertainty will prevent borrowers
from moving on with their lives, including starting to pay rent and make
purchases that would inject money into the economy.
For
neighborhoods, every day without foreclosures means another day of deteriorating
home values. A recent study of the Cleveland area published in Urban Affairs
Review found that neighborhood home values are largely unaffected by
foreclosures that take less than a year. But foreclosures that take longer than
a year have a negative impact on home values as the effects of neglect and
vandalism mount.
For
homebuilders, further delays in foreclosures are a signal to delay hiring and
new construction. Academic research over the past 20 years has proven that
residential construction picks up when home values increase. While stalling
foreclosure could have a small positive effect on the value of some existing
homes, it will not stimulate activity by builders who understand that the
temporary reduction in supply is building a large backlog of homes that will hit
the market just as new construction is completed. There will be no building boom
until the current market is stabilized, and there will be no stability while
foreclosure is deferred.
For
banks, further delays in the foreclosure process create uncertainty in their
balance sheets, potentially blocking channels of credit and undermining lending.
Creditors, like borrowers, are hesitant to make new commitments until there is a
resolution of the significant economic issues facing them.
One of
the root causes of the economic crisis was a deterioration of underwriting
standards: We stopped focusing on whether people could afford the homes they
were buying. Continuing to delay foreclosures reflects the same kind of wishful
thinking. California's 90-day moratorium in 2009 did not improve the state's
economic performance, and moratoriums in other states would only prove again
that a delay can't turn an unaffordable mortgage into an affordable one.
Kicking
the foreclosure problem down the road creates uncertainty that discourages
investment—and delays our desperately needed economic recovery.
Mr.
Mason is professor of banking at Louisiana State University and a senior fellow
at the University of Pennsylvania's Wharton School.
Until
the middle of 2010, things couldn't have been going better for India. The
economy had navigated the global crisis largely unscathed, and the last few
quarters had seen growth clocking 9%. Foreigners voted in India's favor with
their pocketbooks, as capital poured in from all directions.
But
now the tables have turned. India is seething under the threat of
runaway inflation—year-on-year wholesale prices are rising above 8%. Factory
output is slowing, with the monthly index of industrial production for December
falling to a lukewarm annual rise of 1.6%. So far in 2011, foreign equity
investors have pulled out $2 billion.
This
sudden change in the macroeconomic situation sets the stage for New Delhi's
annual budget statement next Monday. This one marks 20 years of economic
reform, a cause of celebration. But, more pressing for policy
makers, it marks an opportunity for introspection. The place to start would be
examining the effect of, and quickly withdrawing, the massive fiscal and
monetary stimulus injected after Lehman Brothers collapsed in September
2008.
View
Full Image
Associated
Press
Consider
the size and impact of this stimulus. The fiscal side, pumped in starting
December 2008, comprised cuts in indirect taxes as well as increases in
spending. Though not as large as China's, the three tranches of fiscal
stimulus—the last one was announced in February 2009—came in at 1.75 trillion
rupees ($40 billion). Allocations for welfare schemes such as the rural
employment guarantee scheme went up later in 2009.
On the
monetary side, the Reserve Bank of India cut interest rates six times from
October 2008 to April 2009. But
the RBI tightened slowly, not raising its policy rates until March of last year.
Real interest rates for
companies that borrow for durations of one or two years were negative most of
last year and may have only begun to turn
positive.
All of
this artificially buoyed demand. India's post-crisis boom in, say, consumer
goods sales owes itself to the stimulus. The economy in the past decade has
often seen aggregate demand fast outpacing aggregate supply, but this gap rose
very sharply in the last two years.
This,
of course, translated into the classic case of inflation—too much money, too few
goods, especially as the stimulus continued even after the economy bounced back
to 9% growth rates. It also meant that the boom would be unsustainable because
it was an artificial and sudden bump buoyed by government
spending.
Meanwhile, India's traditional driver of growth
has been missing in action. Since corporate investment was unshackled 20 years
ago, it has been responsible for revving up the business cycle and sustaining
output growth. But neither spending, temporary cuts in taxes nor liquidity
support helped revive investment starting 2009.
Investor
confidence—at least among those who invest in long-term industrial projects—has
seen a dramatic decline since the panic of 2008. At first, investors were
spooked by the prospects of a double-dip recession in 2009. When this passed,
India-specific concerns became prominent. Regulatory uncertainties, especially
in sectors that needed environmental clearances, surfaced; large corruption
scandals came to light. And now in the face of persistently high inflation,
questions about the ability of policy makers to maintain macroeconomic stability
have emerged.
To
restore confidence all these concerns need to be addressed. This will be a
long-term exercise. But a show of strength by the government that it can stay
ahead of the curve and keep the broader economy stable is urgently needed. India
needs to sacrifice a little now or it will lose a lot later. The best way to
calm inflationary expectations would be to lower aggregate demand—which would
imply that India has to sacrifice short-term growth. Though a good chunk of the
exercise to decrease demand has to come from tighter monetary policy, Finance
Minister Pranab Mukherjee's budget speech is a chance to portray fiscal
soundness to this end.
One
way the government will indicate its fiscal tightening is via its fiscal
deficit. The central
government's deficit hit 6.8% of GDP in 2009. This figure ostensibly came down
in 2010, but has to go down further. Mr. Mukherjee himself has
promised so. The catch is that the government will massage this statistic. Over
the past year, New Delhi has reaped a windfall by selling public assets: It
divested 400 billion rupees worth of stakes in state-owned enterprises when the
stock market was hot and sold off telecom spectrum worth 1.4% of GDP. Mr.
Mukherjee will use this one-time gain in revenue to argue that public finances
are under control by touting a deficit of 5%. But excluding the spectrum sale,
the fiscal deficit barely declined over the past two years to 6.7%.
Investors
should look at spending. In 2010, the central government's
expenditure was at 15.5 % of GDP, with the biggest components being interest
payments and subsidies. The latter, which makes up 5.5% of GDP, surely needs
trimming. New Delhi currently subsidizes oil products,
fertilizers for farmers and food. The big addition to the subsidy regime—the
right to food act that the Congress Party has floated—will probably not be
budgeted as yet, but is expected to cost 150 billion
rupees.
The
government also needs to rationalize tax collection. New Delhi has been putting
off the implementation of the unified goods and services tax, which simplifies
indirect taxation and widens the tax base to increase revenue. The budget should
give assurances of the new tax's rollout. Mr. Mukherjee is expected to partially
eliminate temporary cuts to indirect taxes that had featured in the fiscal
stimulus. If the government is interested in tightening, it should fully
withdraw all these cuts as a prelude to launching the GST and also widen the
base of the central government service tax in anticipation of the GST.
These
measures will not be sufficient tightening on their own, but they will make the
RBI's job much easier. At the same time, New Delhi must aim to boost aggregate
supply for the longer run via reforms. One important area to reform,
particularly in light of anxiety over food prices, is
agriculture.
Allowing foreign direct investment in multi-brand retail—letting the likes of
Walmart in—could be critical to raising productivity. But just as important are
new laws for land holdings to help create transparent land markets.
Such
reforms will increase opportunities and incentives for corporate investment.
Like the budget 20 years ago, Mr. Mukerjee has the chance to get back on the
reform path.
Mr.
Aziz is India chief economist at JP Morgan.
Dollar's
Fall Rocks Far-Flung Families
MABINI,
the Philippines—The world's currencies are gyrating, but the strains are being
felt beyond financial capitals and corporate boardrooms. Millions of families in
developing countries rely on relatives sending dollars, euros and other weakened
currencies from abroad to prop up spending at home.
Lorena
Baquillos's husband, Jimmy, is one of nearly 10 million Filipinos working around
the world. She's managed to open a small grocery here on the money Jimmy sends
home as a merchant seaman, but his dollar-based pay is translating into fewer
pesos at home than it did a few years ago.
"I used to get 43,000 pesos every two
months, but now that's down to 33,000," says Ms. Baquillos, 37, who uses her
husband's earnings to feed and school their three
children.
For
years, the Philippines has encouraged its citizens to seek out work in other
countries to keep the home economy afloat. Former First Lady Imelda Marcos used
to serenade overseas Filipino workers while on visits to the Middle East in the
1980s.
Today,
funds channeled home, or remittances, account for more than 10% of the
Philippines' economic output, making it one of the most remittance-dependent
countries in the world.
Many
of these workers are in the U.S. or Britain or Italy, where currencies are
struggling to recover from the global financial crisis. There are hundreds of
thousands of Filipinos in places such as Saudi Arabia and Hong Kong, where
currencies are closely linked to the ailing greenback.
Now,
that lifeline is weakening as the dollar continues to languish. The Philippine peso has leapt 15% since
the worst of the global financial crisis in 2008, to 43.41 pesos to the dollar.
That outpaced a 13% gain in remittances to the country, in dollar terms, in the
same period. This means fewer pesos for the families of overseas workers and a
pressing need for the Philippines to rethink its remittance
habit.
The
pressure to adapt is acute in the town of Mabini, a two hours' drive south of
Manila. Ms. Baquillos was manning the counter of her grocery store on a recent
afternoon, hoisting sacks of rice onto her counter and counseling her customers
in money matters. She urged one regular to start saving at least a fifth of her
income.
Ms.
Baquillos is tightening the purse strings and putting the savings back into a
tiny mini-mart she runs across from the Western Union office in Mabini's town
plaza.
It's
an approach many here say needs to become widespread. "We are seeing a
fundamental shift in the global economy," Philippines Finance Minister and the
country's economic point-man Cesar Purisima said in a recent interview.
"We
have to be honest about the consequences of that and educate people about what's
going on."
The
government, which was sworn in eight months ago, has started providing
incentives for more outsourcing businesses to set up shop on the islands. The
Philippines recently overtook India as the world's biggest supplier of
voice-based call-center services.
Mr.
Purisima and his colleagues also are trying to show their belief in the
long-term value of the peso by issuing government bonds in that currency rather
than in the dollar, as the country has long done.
There's
much to be done, though, and little time to do it. Some economists expect the
peso's gains against the U.S. dollar to accelerate this year, pushing the
currency up faster than currencies such as Thailand's baht or Malaysia's
ringgit, which have already hit multi-year highs.
French
bank Credit Agricole S.A. forecasts the peso will appreciate 5.6% over the
course of the year, and some analysts reckon it could break 40 pesos to the
dollar. As recently as 2005, one dollar could bring 56
pesos.
View
Full Image
Agence
France-Presse/Getty Images
A
woman exchanging Philippine pesos for dollars at a money changer's stall in
Manila.
Families
depending on remittances in the Philippines are feeling the pinch, especially
with inflation from rising food prices further crimping their spending power.
Adding to the problem, the appreciating peso is pushing up the cost of
Philippine exports compared with exports from competitors such as China, which
has prevented its yuan from rising as quickly as currencies in Southeast Asia or
Latin America.
In
towns across the archipelago, local efforts are underway to help people find new
ways to make money in their own backyards.
In
Mabini, for example, store owner Ms. Baquillos and other remittance recipients
have banded together to put on a musical comedy show about financial management
and starting small businesses.
Featuring
the misadventures of an overseas worker, the show focuses on family and
responsibility, says Ms. Baquillos, and also on how hard it is to work thousands
of miles from home, not knowing how much your paycheck will be worth from one
week to the next.
"I'm
so conscious now of what things cost, and think all the time about how all that
money spent on fast food and the latest phones could have been used to buy a
case of beer or a sack of rice for the store," says Ms. Baquillos. "We can't
just rely on remittances any more."
The
challenge for the Philippines is to prepare for a world in which the dollar is
less desirable.
"People
should try to become more entrepreneurial," says Mr. Purisima, the finance
minister. "In the future, if we are to sustain growth, we need to find ways to
help people do more here because we can't rely on remittances for
ever."
It
won't be easy. Unemployment is
widespread at 6.9%, and under-employment—defined as people who work only
part-time or with minimal incomes—is measured locally at 18%. Large numbers
of Filipinos are still leaving in search of better prospects elsewhere because
of the dearth of opportunities in a country where the average per capita income
is around $1,790 a year.
Each
day, hundreds of seafarers throng around Rizal Park in central Manila hoping to
find work from the recruitment agents who fleetingly pass through the
area.
"The
dollar situation is bad, but for us there's no real alternative. We'll just have
to cut our expenses where we can," says Mathias Abangan, a 35-year-old chef
looking for work on a cruise ship.
Breaking
the entrenched remittance culture is another obstacle. In some towns such as
Mabini, nearly a fifth of the adults work abroad, and the main street is dotted
with pawn shops, recruitment agencies and travel agencies.
The
fear that there may be a greater dollar shock to come is a powerful motivator.
Non-governmental organizations have enlisted activists like Ms. Baquillos in
Mabini and others to spread the word about sound financial planning and how to
build their small businesses instead of relying on a shrinking pot of
remittances.
Atikha,
one of these NGOs, offers job counseling and holds workshops on financial
planning and entrepreneurship. Based in San Pablo, a 90-minute drive south of
Manila, it was established by returning migrant workers and local religious
leaders in 1995 amid worries about the impact of workers' long absences on their
families.
For
years, Atikha worked solely in the towns of San Pablo and nearby Mabini. Now, as
the dollar and other remittance currencies slide against the peso, demand for
the group's programs is spreading.
Atikha
has established savings clubs for the children of migrant workers, and partnered
with local banks and the Philippines' Department of Education to work with
teachers who can help kids open their own bank accounts. Local companies such as
Globe Telecom Inc., a telecommunications firm, and the Philippine central bank
have lent support to dozens of other programs.
"We
teach [participants] the language they need to have discussions about their
household finances, which can be a very emotional subject," says Mai
Dizon-Anonuevo, Atikha's executive director.
In
some cases, Filipinos working overseas spend their paychecks on presents for
their extended family back home, or else are asked to hand out cash to distant
cousins or other family members. This can cause deep-seated
tensions.
"We
teach them how to say 'no,' which is very important in this culture, where
extended families can quickly deplete the bread winner's earnings. It's almost
like an intervention," Ms. Anonuevo says.
There
are some early success stories. Lilian Brul, a native of San Pablo, says
Atikha's financial literacy programs transformed her life. In 2005, her husband,
who works for a telephone company in Saudi Arabia, suffered a heart attack.
In
its wake, Ms. Brul, now 48 years old, decided that she couldn't sit by and wait
for remittances to continue rolling in. She started her own business raising
fish in the lakes around San Pablo.
"The
heart attack was a real eye-opener," says Ms. Brul, a busy woman with long black
hair who spends much of her free time cooking at the local Roman Catholic
seminary. She began with 35,000 pesos—around $636 at the time—which she used to
buy two large cages set in one of the seven lakes surrounding the
city.
Ms.
Brul expanded the business after attending one of Atikha's workshops and now
owns 16 fish cages, each of which can hold three to four tons of tilapia. She
also employs four fishermen and four farmers on new lots of land which she
leased last year.
"We
don't have to worry so much about the exchange-rate fluctuations anymore," she
says. "And I've told my husband he can come home any time he likes to retire,
and he says he'll do that next year when he turns 50."
—Josephine
Cuneta contributed to this article.
Write
to James
Hookway at james.hookway@wsj.com
Is American
manufacturing dead? You might think so reading most of the nation's editorial
pages or watching the endless laments in the news that "nothing is made in
America anymore," and that our manufacturing jobs have vanished to China, Mexico
and South Korea.
Yet the empirical
evidence tells a different story—of a thriving and growing U.S. manufacturing
sector, and a country that remains by far the world's largest manufacturer.
This is a
particularly sensitive topic in my hometown of Flint, Mich., where auto-plant
closings have meant lost jobs and difficult transitions for the displaced. But
while it's true that the U.S. has lost more than seven million manufacturing
jobs since the late 1970s, our manufacturing output has continued to expand.
International data
compiled by the United Nations on global output from 1970-2009 show this success
story. Excluding recession-related decreases in 2001 and 2008-09, America's
manufacturing output has continued to increase since 1970. In every year since 2004, manufacturing
output has exceeded $2 trillion (in constant 2005 dollars), twice the output
produced in America's factories in the early 1970s. Taken on its own, U.S.
manufacturing would rank today as the sixth largest economy in the world, just
behind France and ahead of the United Kingdom, Italy and Brazil.
In 2009, the most recent full year for which
international data are available, our manufacturing output was $2.155 trillion
(including mining and utilities). That's more than 45% higher than China's, the
country we're supposedly losing ground to. Despite recent gains in China and
elsewhere, the U.S. still produced more than 20% of global manufacturing
output in 2009.
The truth is that
America still makes a lot of stuff, and we're making more of it than ever
before. We're merely able to do it with a fraction of the workers needed in the
past.
Consider the
incredible, increasing productivity of America's manufacturing workers: The
average U.S. factory worker is responsible today for more than $180,000 of
annual manufacturing output, triple the $60,000 in 1972.
View Full Image
Getty
Images
These increases are a direct result of capital
investments in productivity-enhancing technology, which last year helped boost
output to record levels in industries like computers and semiconductors, medical
equipment and supplies, pharmaceuticals and medicine, and oil and natural-gas
equipment.
Critics view the production of more with less as a net
negative—fewer auto plant jobs mean fewer paychecks, they reason. Yet
technological improvement is one of the main ingredients of economic growth. It
means increasing wages and a higher standard of living for workers and
consumers. Displaced workers learn new skill sets, and a new generation of
workers finds its skills are put to more productive
use.
Our world-class
agriculture sector provides a great model for how to think about the evolution
of U.S. manufacturing. The U.S. produces more agricultural output today—with
only 2.6% of our work force involved in farming—than we did 100 years ago, when
farming jobs represented almost 40% of the labor force. Likewise, we're able to
produce twice as much manufacturing output today as in the 1970s, with about
seven million fewer workers. That means yesterday's farmhands and plant workers
can become today's computer engineers, medical doctors and financial managers.
I don't deny that
the transition to this new economy can be a rough one for displaced workers. But
turning back the clock to a less efficient economy is not the answer. Instead,
let's retrain our work force to participate in this dynamic new economy—an
economy that still supports America's status as the world's leading
manufacturer.
Mr. Perry, a professor of economics at the
University of Michigan, Flint, is also a visiting scholar at the American
Enterprise Institute.
President Obama says he wants corporate tax
reform but hasn't proposed how to do it. Maybe he should take a look at the
states, where as many as 10 new Governors are moving ahead to reform and reduce
business taxes. The motive is to attract more businesses and create more jobs,
while avoiding the fate of California and New York.
Take Iowa, which has the highest state
corporate rate at 12%. Add that to the federal rate of 35%, and the Tax
Foundation says the Hawkeye State may have the highest levy in the developed
world. Governor Terry Branstad, back for a second stint in Des Moines after 12
years, wants to cut the top corporate rate in half to 6% because "we just can't
compete with this high tax rate anymore." Mr. Branstad has been sending letters
trying to recruit Illinois businesses, where the small business tax rose by 67%
and the corporate rate by 30% to 9.5% in January.
Iowa's corporate tax suffers from the same
defects that hobble the federal system. It imposes an onerous rate on those
companies that get stuck paying it, but the legislature has carved out so many
credits and loopholes for politically favored firms that the tax doesn't raise
much revenue. So even though Iowa has the highest statutory rate, it ranks 36th
in per capita collections. It's all pain for little gain.
Michigan has led the nation in job losses
during this past decade, while former Governor Jennifer Granholm sought to
attract businesses with special tax favors. New Republican Governor Rick Snyder
and the GOP legislature are trying a different strategy and moving forward on a
business tax makeover.
Their plan would replace an unpopular gross
receipts tax that forces many small firms to pay inflated tax bills even when
they don't record a profit. It would also eliminate big industry exemptions,
such as the Hollywood movie maker's credit, and instead install a flat 6%
corporate profits tax. That's still too high for our liking and for competitive
purposes, but at least it would level the playing field across businesses and
save them about $1.5 billion each year.
Florida's Rick Scott is pursuing arguably the
most ambitious plan. He promised voters he'd abolish the state's $2 billion a
year corporate tax over seven years, and his first budget gets that started.
"Once we eliminate the corporate tax, and, remember, we don't have a state
income tax, there will be no reason for businesses not to come to Florida," he
says. South Carolina's Nikki Haley also campaigned on eliminating her state's
$200 million a year corporate tax.
The message from these states is similar: In a
global economy you can't attract businesses by extracting an undue share of
their profits. Bringing rates down is especially important for competitiveness
given that five states—Nevada, South Dakota, Texas, Washington and Wyoming—have
no corporate income tax.
Our preference, which is supported by most of
the economic evidence, is that cutting personal and small business income tax
rates should be the highest tax priority for states. But corporate tax systems
are complicated and onerous, while only generating between 5% and 8% of state
revenues.
Workers also bear the cost of excessive
corporate taxes. A 2009 study by the Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City
examined three decades of data on business taxes and worker pay checks. The
study found that "corporate taxes reduce wages and that the magnitude of the
negative relationship between the taxes and the wages has increased over the
past 30 years." Businesses in high tax states invest less, the study found, and
this leads to lower productivity and eventually lower average pay for workers.
These Governors can only do so much because the
biggest hurdle to new investment is the federal tax of 35% that is the second
highest in the world and far above the international average. The President's
own tax commission concluded that this tax sends jobs abroad. What is Mr.
Obama's Treasury Department waiting for?
Our country seems mired deeply in the silly
season when it comes to the leading economic question of the day: how to tame
the federal budget deficit. That's a shame, because fixing the long-run deficit
is a difficult issue that requires serious thought and a modicum of political
goodwill, both of which are in short supply right now.
The
silliness comes in at least four parts. The first is the debate over raising the
national debt ceiling, which flies in the face of the laws of arithmetic. The
increase in the debt each year is simply the difference between total
expenditures and total receipts, both of which come from the annual budget. If
Congress wants a smaller national debt, it must either spend less or tax more.
Like King Canute, it cannot just command the tides.
Democrats may prefer more tax increases and
fewer spending cuts, while Republicans prefer the reverse. That's fine.
Differing budgetary priorities should be the stuff of political debate. But
neither party can just command the national debt to stop growing.
Some people see
the debt ceiling as a way to force spending cuts that Congress would otherwise
refuse to make. Maybe. But it's a clumsy and risky way that, among other things,
could endanger the credit-worthiness of the United States government if our
inability to float new debt made it impossible to raise needed cash. And for
what purpose? To accomplish something that Congress has the power to do anyway?
The
second element of silliness is the belief that the American public stands
solidly behind rapid and large budget cuts. Sure, and they also want better
weather.
In
fact, recent opinion polls show what they have always shown: The public wants
smaller deficits, lower taxes and less spending in the abstract. But when it
comes to specifics, it finds few spending cuts that it likes. (No, Virginia, we can't balance the budget by cutting
foreign aid.) The right way to read the polling numbers is that they show a
public that is deeply unhappy about large budget deficits, but just as unhappy
about anything that would make a serious dent in the deficit. They much prefer
King Canute's approach.
The necessity to
choose among various spending cuts and tax increases brings me to the third
element of silliness—the one that seems to afflict only Republicans. How many
times have you heard Speaker of the House John Boehner (and others) refer to
"job-killing government spending"? That phrase has become an official GOP
mantra, on a par with "death taxes" and "death panels"—and it's just about as
truthful.
Getty
Images
A
legitimate case can indeed be made that the government spends too much, or that
its spending priorities are wrong, or that some particular government program is
just plain stupid. That's all fine; such arguments should be what budgetary
politics are all about. But even if you dislike some particular piece of
government spending, how exactly does it kill jobs? (The taxes raised to pay the
bills may kill jobs, but we are talking about deficit spending here.) If the
government either hires people itself or purchases things from private
companies, doesn't that create jobs?
Back in the 1930s, an exasperated John Maynard
Keynes quipped that, if the British government refused to spend money on
anything sensible, it could at least bury cash around the country and invite
people to dig it up. If a ridiculous policy like that would create jobs—as it
would have—then surely even lame-brained government spending will create jobs,
too.
This is not a defense of lame-brained programs; the
government should be a smart steward of the public's money. My point is simply
that, when there is so much unused capacity and so many unemployed people hungry
for work, "job-killing government spending" is oxymoronic. Virtually any type of
spending, public or private, will create jobs.
The final element of silliness is the only one that
requires some subtlety of thought and is at least debatable. It's the popular
notion that we need deficit reduction urgently, right now, even though the
unemployment rate is still 9%.
Please don't get me wrong. The federal budget deficit is on an
irresponsibly unsustainable path. We need to both restrain spending and
raise more revenue—and by large amounts. But not right this minute, because
doing either would shrink the economy. Despite recent increases, Treasury
borrowing rates remain low. There is no evidence that investors are fleeing the
dollar. Our economy is still in desperate need of more demand. Each of these
facts argues for waiting.
Let me correct that. It's the actual spending
cuts and/or tax increases that can wait until our economy is stronger—not their
enactment. A smart Congress would legislate future spending cuts and tax
increases right now, but delay their start. That would show seriousness of
purpose and reassure the bond market without damaging the nascent
recovery.
But instead,
Congress is tied up in knots over some $60 billion in immediate spending cuts.
That number, while draconian in the short run (only half the fiscal year is
left), is chump change in the long run. And while Congress is consuming itself
in partisan acrimony over the $60 billion, it is doing essentially nothing about
the multitrillion dollar long-run deficit—which, as everyone should know by now,
hinges on The Big Four: Social Security, medical care, defense and
taxes.
As I said, it's the silly
season.
Mr. Blinder, a professor of economics and
public affairs at Princeton University and vice chairman of the Promontory
Interfinancial Network, is a former vice chairman of the Federal Reserve.
Much of the criticism leveled at Hungary's government
for its misguided economic policies is entirely warranted. Independent institutions like the constitutional
court, state audit office, and fiscal council entrusted with the oversight of
fiscal policy have been neutered. High distortionary taxes have been imposed on
large (mostly foreign) corporations. Private pension funds have been fused,
practically without recourse, into the traditional pay-as-you-go system while
costly social entitlements remain unreformed. The government's next plan is to
weaken central bank independence. No
wonder Prime Minister Viktor Orbán has been compared to Hugo Chávez and Cristina
Fernandez de Kirchner.
Although similar to the pattern of governance in
Venezuela and Argentina, the roots of the fitful policies and
institution-bashing in Hungary are quite different. In Latin America, populism
is largely the upshot of severe poverty and income inequality, compounded by the
failure of the political class to cope with these conditions. By contrast,
Hungary is burdened by a peculiar historical legacy. Following the repression of the 1956 revolution, the
Kádár regime sought legitimacy by introducing an array of widely available
social benefits, such as sick pay, early retirement, disability pensions, family
allowances, and price subsidies. By using foreign credits to cater to a budding
consumer society, the Communists wanted to soften the appearance of the
totalitarian regime. In the West, Hungary was hailed as the merriest barrack in
the East bloc. "Goulash communism" became a benign version of Soviet
dictatorship.
After the fall of the Iron Curtain, the first freely
elected government was followed by the rise of the Socialist party propelled by
promises to preserve the inherited welfare state. The
emerging political elite, across the spectrum, learned quickly that elections
are won by promoting continued dependence on government handouts. The only
significant distinguishing characteristic between the major political strands
was that while the left appealed to Socialist nostalgia, the right attracted
those who for decades had to live with suppressed national aspirations.
However, both sides unabashedly elevated political
clientelism to an art form. As governments succeeded each other, they
competed in enhancing welfare entitlements. But whereas in Latin America
populist leaders tend to come from humble origins, a large number of Hungarian
politicians, regardless of their party affiliation, are offsprings of the old
nomenklatura, with no first-hand experience in the favelas.
View Full Image
Corbis
Hungary's goulash populism peaked during the Socialist
government of Ferenc Gyurcsány, which indulged in the costliest spending spree,
resulting in record deficits. Under the cover of its European Union membership,
and the attendant moral hazard, Hungary became the most indebted new member
state—with public debt climbing to 80% of GDP from 50% in 2001. By late 2008,
shaken by the effects of the financial crisis, Hungary became the first EU
member compelled to apply for an IMF-EU rescue package.
Against this
backdrop, and despite pledges to end bad practices and to promote transparency
in public finances, Mr. Orbán remains trapped in the past. In its first nine
months, his government has failed to adopt a single measure to correct Hungary's
sizable structural fiscal deficit.
The
nationalization of pension funds might be helpful for a symptomatic relief of
the near-term budgetary gap as the funds' current revenues and assets could be
used for added spending. But the long-term fiscal outlook has worsened as the
government is saddled with the obligation of paying out much higher defined
benefits from the traditional system than would be the case for the funded
system.
Hungary's public debt problem is further aggravated by
one of the most rapidly aging populations worldwide. A relatively low private saving propensity and the
lowest (after Malta) labor force participation ratio in the EU—not surprising in
light of the adverse incentives of the welfare system—undermine economic growth
prospects. The country remains vulnerable to the gyrations of financial markets,
as reflected in its risk premium, the highest on non-euro sovereign paper in the
Union. But, unlike Argentina and
Venezuela, Hungary cannot count on oil or other key commodity exports to avert
default.
The solution lies in a major policy shift toward
structural reforms that can help restore the country's debt sustainability.
Deficit-reducing measures that provide incentives to work, save and invest—such
as targeting welfare benefits and tightening the eligibility for public
pensions—would pave the way to a higher growth path. In recent weeks, with the due date for a credible EU
convergence program fast approaching, Mr. Orbán has expressed some awareness
that such a shift is necessary. Given his rhetorical skills, intellectual
capacity, and command over a two-thirds legislative majority, the prime minister
has the means to break with goulash populism. If former president Lula da Silva was
capable of overcoming much deeper populist instincts to successfully lead Brazil
through the recent financial turbulence, it should be far easier for Mr. Orbán
to kick the habit.
In 1989, speaking
in Budapest's Heroes Square, Mr. Orbán fearlessly demanded free elections and
the withdrawal of Soviet troops. If only today he mustered a fraction of that
courage exhibited 22 years ago to push through reforms, Hungary's economic
future would be secure.
Mr. Kopits is former chairman of the Fiscal
Council of Hungary and a former member of the Monetary Council of the National
Bank of Hungary.
China's
Secret Weakness
03.14.11, 6:00
PM ET
With
China's rapidly expanding economy and growing power at sea and in the air,
some commentators have
taken the view that it's not a question of whether but how soon China will
replace the U.S. as the world's leading
superpower.
This
is nonsense. So long as America retains its freedom and thus its unique powers
of innovation, it will continue to lead. Besides, China's elite is too scared to
follow in the path of freedom because to do so would risk unity, threatening
disintegration and a return to the terrible days of warlords and civil war, as
in the 1920s.
Moreover,
China has secret weaknesses. Its most serious: gambling and drug
addiction.
China's new prosperity is already producing a rapid expansion of the country's
international gambling class, not to mention an appreciable increase in the
number of drug addicts.
Though
India was known as the "Mother of Opium" and during the 18th century produced
large quantities of it, nearly all of India's opium was exported to foreign
markets rather than consumed at home. The Chinese love of opium seems to have
originated on a large scale with its 18th-century population explosion, when
China grew from about 150 million in 1700 to 450 million in 1850. By that time
China had become the world's largest consumer of
opium.
This
was highly convenient for the West. Although the West bought large quantities of
silk and tea from China, the Chinese spurned Western goods, regarding foreign
imports as immoral. As
the authorities did everything in their power to restrict imports, China ran
huge trade surpluses with the West. But then Western governments and
trading firms discovered the Chinese appetite for opium and began to export it
in large quantities through Canton. By the 1830s China's export surplus had
turned into a growing deficit.
Alarmed
by the loss of silver and thespread of addiction, especially among the ruling
class, the imperial court in Peking sought to ban opium and prevent Western
ships from bringing it in. The West--in the name of free trade--responded with
naval force. Thus began the Opi-umWars, which were fought mainly by Britain,
to keep China's ports open.
Some
experts believe that general prosperity in a society is always and inevitably
accompanied by a comparable increase in drug-taking and cite the U.S. as an
example. Certainly, since China entered the world market and its living
standards began to rise swiftly, its consumption of addictive drugs has risen
alarmingly. Australian
researcher Susan Trevaskes, who has just published a book on Chinese
crime prevention, Policing Serious Crime in China (Routledge, $125),
estimates that 40% of the heroin produced in Afghanistan and Pakistan and a
similar percentage of the drugs coming from Laos and Burma now go to China.
Trevaskes also reveals that China itself manufactures "precursor chemicals" for
ecstasy and other substances, for export and domestic
use.
Drug
use on a large scale attracts organized crime and corruption. Under opium's
economic impact government corruption in China became more oppressive, which
eventually led to peasant revolts, followed by the government's savage attempts
at suppressing them by burning villages. The catchphrase describing this policy:
"strengthening the walls and clearing the countryside." The imperial authorities
then created "strategic villages" and forced peasants to live in
them.
Since
the 1980s the Chinese government has conducted similar campaigns, dubbed "Strike
Hard," to put down organized crime and corruption. During the last quarter of
the 20th century an enormous number of "criminals" were executed. Trevaskes puts
the figure at between 2,500 and 15,000 a year and calculates that the total
number may have been as high as 250,000.
Such
ferocious campaigns to put down crime ended in failure and were abandoned,
especially since it seems they often led to the spread of corruption--at all
levels of officialdom.
If, as
seems likely, the expansion of the Chinese economy and the rise in living
standards lead to further increases in the use of heroin and other drugs, how
will Chinese authorities deal with the concurrent rise in organized
crime?
The
Chinese are learning that prosperity comes at a price. The Communistauthorities
ruling China today have immensely more powerful and repressive machinery at
their disposal than had the 19th-century imperialist bureaucracy. However,
experience has shown that mere repression does not work.
Meanwhile,
more and more Chinese have more and more disposable income--and a significant
proportion of it is going to drugs.
Paul
Johnson,
eminent British historian and author; Lee Kuan Yew, minister mentor of
Singapore; Amity Shlaes, senior fellow in economic history at the Council
on Foreign Relations; and David Malpass, global economist, president of
Encima Global LLC, rotate in writing this column. To see past Current Events
columns, visit our Web site at www.forbes.com/currentevents.
Feb
25, 2011
12:45 PM
By
Luca Di Leo
A
report being conducted for the world’s Group of 20 leading economies points to
supply not keeping up with demand as the main factor behind price increases in
wheat, sugar, cotton, metals, oil and other commodities.
The
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development’s study–which is being put
together ahead of the next G-20 meeting of top finance officials in April in
Washington– may lead to increased efforts to boost commodities production around
the world. It could
also help reduce criticism of the U.S. Federal Reserve’s easy-money policies,
which some have blamed for stoking global
inflation.
French
President Nicholas Sarkozy, who heads the G-20, recently warned that rising
commodity prices were a threat to the world economy. Finance ministers and
central bankers meeting in Paris a week ago said they’d look into the underlying
drivers of the price increases and consider possible
actions.
“It’s
very hard to distinguish between financial and structural factors behind the
price increases, but it looks like demand and supply are playing the predominant
role,” Pier Carlo Padoan, chief economist and deputy-secretary general at the
OECD, said in an interview.
A
drought and fire in Russia last summer, coupled with export restrictions imposed
by the government there, helped bring about soaring wheat prices. Meanwhile, bad
harvests in the U.S., Europe, Australia and Argentina have contributed to
soaring agricultural commodity prices on international
markets.
There
have been few investments in agriculture over the past few years and
productivity has been stagnant, the OECD report is expected to
highlight. At
the same time, demand for food has been growing in China and India, the world’s
two most populous countries, as their economies continue to grow at a rapid
pace.
A
similar supply and demand argument can be made for oil prices, Padoan said. Oil
prices have recently surged above $100 a barrel amid concerns that the recent
turmoil in the oil-rich North African and Middle Eastern countries could hit
production. The price of Brent oil, considered the best benchmark, is close to
$110 a barrel, 15% higher than at the start of the year.
Fed
Chairman Ben Bernanke has been making a similar case about commodity prices,
following strong criticism that the U.S. central bank’s pumping of dollars has
sent floods of cash into China and other developing economies, driving up prices
for food and energy. The Fed chief puts the blame on strong growth in developing
economies and their inadequate response, including China’s reluctance to let its
currency rise.
At the
last meeting of G-20 world leaders last November, which took place just a week
after the Fed announced it would inject $600 billion into the economy to buy
government bonds, U.S. President Barack Obama was challenged to defend the
policy from foreign accusations that the U.S. was stoking inflation. The
criticism overshadowed Obama’s priority for the summit: greater pressure on
China to revalue its currency. Before G-20 leaders convene again in November,
the spotlight could be back on China.
Feb
26, 2011
5:00 AM
By
Mark Whitehouse
10.34% —
Gasoline as a share of retail sales
Could
rising oil prices derail the U.S. recovery? We’re more resilient to high energy
prices than we used to be, but it’s certainly a danger.
The
price of oil broke through $100 a barrel this week, and U.S. gas prices neared
$3.25 a gallon, as turmoil in the Middle East bred concerns about supply. Those
rising prices are already taking a bigger bite out of U.S. consumers’ budgets.
In January, sales at
gas stations accounted for 10.34% of all retail sales, according
to the Commerce
Department. That’s the highest level since
October 2008.
To be
sure, we have a way to go to reach the peak of July 2008, when gasoline prices
exceeded $4.15 a gallon and gas-station sales accounted for 12.47% of retail
sales. Some
economists see reason to believe we’re less likely to experience a similar spike
this time around. For one, oil inventories are significantly
higher than they were in 2008, providing more of a buffer in the
event of any disruptions in supply from the Middle East.
Beyond
that, with the help of
more-efficient cars and appliances, US consumers have gotten better at handling
higher energy costs. Last time gas prices were this high, consumers were
spending a larger share of their budgets on fuel. When gasoline prices rose to
$3.25 a gallon in March 2008, gas-station sales accounted for 11.55% of all
retail sales – significantly more than they do now.
Still,
a lot depends on psychology, and U.S. consumers’ mood remains fragile. Given the
weakness of the recovery and the limited resources available to stimulate the
economy, it wouldn’t take much to get us in trouble.
:
The Inequality That
Matters
http://www.the-american-interest.com/article-bd.cfm?piece=907
From
the January -
February 2011 issue:
The Inequality That
Matters
Does
growing wealth and income inequality in the United States presage the downfall
of the American republic? Will we evolve into a new Gilded Age plutocracy,
irrevocably split between the competing interests of rich and poor? Or is
growing inequality a mere bump in the road, a statistical blip along the path to
greater wealth for virtually every American? Or is income inequality partially
desirable, reflecting the greater productivity of society’s stars?
There
is plenty of speculation on these possibilities, but a lot of it has been aimed
at elevating one political agenda over another rather than elevating our
understanding. As a result, there’s more confusion about this issue than
just about any other in contemporary American political
discourse. The reality is that most of the
worries about income inequality are bogus, but some are probably better grounded
and even more serious than even many of their heralds
realize. If our economic churn is bound to throw off
political sparks, whether alarums about plutocracy or something else, we owe it
to ourselves to seek out an accurate picture of what is really going on.
Let’s start with the
subset of worries about inequality that are significantly overblown.
In
terms of immediate political stability, there is less to the income inequality
issue than meets the eye. Most
analyses of income inequality neglect two major points. First, the inequality of
personal well-being is sharply down over
the past hundred years and perhaps over the past twenty years as
well. Bill
Gates is much, much richer than I am, yet it is not obvious that he is much
happier if, indeed, he is happier at all. I have access to penicillin, air
travel, good cheap food, the Internet and virtually all of the technical
innovations that Gates does. Like the vast majority of Americans, I have access
to some important new pharmaceuticals, such as statins to protect against heart
disease. To be sure, Gates receives the very best care from the world’s top
doctors, but our health outcomes are in the same ballpark. I don’t have a
private jet or take luxury vacations, and—I think it is fair to say—my house is
much smaller than his. I can’t meet with the world’s elite on demand. Still, by
broad historical standards, what I share with Bill Gates is far more significant
than what I don’t share with him.
Compare
these circumstances to those of 1911, a century ago. Even
in the wealthier countries, the average person had little formal education,
worked six days a week or more, often at hard physical labor, never took
vacations, and could not access most of the world’s culture. The living
standards of Carnegie and Rockefeller towered above those of typical Americans,
not just in terms of money but also in terms of comfort. Most people today may
not articulate this truth to themselves in so many words, but they sense it
keenly enough. So when average people read about or see income inequality, they
don’t feel the moral outrage that radiates from the more passionate egalitarian
quarters of society. Instead, they think their lives are pretty good and that
they either earned through hard work or lucked into a healthy share of the
American dream. (The persistently unemployed, of course, are a different matter,
and I will return to them later.) It is pretty easy to convince a lot
of Americans that unemployment and poverty are social problems because discrete
examples of both are visible on the evening news, or maybe even in or at the
periphery of one’s own life. It’s much harder to get those same people worked up
about generalized measures of inequality.
This
is why, for example, large numbers of Americans oppose the idea of an estate tax
even though the current form of the tax, slated to return in 2011, is very
unlikely to affect them or their estates. In narrowly self-interested terms,
that view may be irrational, but most Americans are unwilling to
frame national issues in terms of rich versus poor.
There’s a great deal of
hostility toward various government bailouts, but the idea of “undeserving”
recipients is the key factor in those feelings. Resentment
against Wall Street gamesters hasn’t spilled over much into resentment against
the wealthy more generally. The bailout for General Motors’ labor unions wasn’t
so popular either—again, obviously not because of any bias against the wealthy
but because a basic sense of fairness was violated. As of November 2010,
congressional Democrats are of a mixed mind as to whether the Bush tax cuts
should expire for those whose annual income exceeds $250,000; that is in large
part because their constituents bear no animus toward
rich people, only toward undeservedly rich people.
A
neglected observation, too, is that envy is usually
local. At least in the United States, most
economic resentment is not directed toward billionaires or high-roller
financiers—not even corrupt ones. It’s directed at the guy down the hall who got
a bigger raise. It’s directed at the husband of your wife’s sister, because the
brand of beer he stocks costs $3 a case more than yours, and so
on. That’s another reason why a lot of people aren’t so
bothered by income or wealth inequality at the macro level. Most of us don’t
compare ourselves to billionaires. Gore Vidal put it honestly: “Whenever
a friend succeeds, a little something in me dies.”
Occasionally
the cynic in me wonders why so many relatively well-off intellectuals lead the
egalitarian charge against the privileges of the wealthy.
One group has the status currency of money and the other has the status currency
of intellect, so might they be competing for overall social regard?
The high status of the
wealthy in America, or for that matter the high status of celebrities, seems to
bother our intellectual class most. That class composes a very
small group, however, so the upshot is that growing income inequality won’t
necessarily have major political implications at the macro level.
What
Matters, What Doesn’t
All
that said, income inequality does matter—for both politics and the economy. To
see how, we must
distinguish between inequality itself and what causes it.
But first let’s review the trends in more detail.
The
numbers are clear: Income inequality has been rising in
the United States, especially at the very top. The data show a big difference
between two quite separate issues, namely income growth at the very top of the
distribution and greater inequality throughout the distribution. The first trend
is much more pronounced than the second, although the two are often confused.
When
it comes to the first trend, the share of pre-tax income earned by
the richest 1 percent of earners has increased from about 8 percent in 1974 to
more than 18 percent in 2007. Furthermore, the richest 0.01 percent (the 15,000
or so richest families) had a share of less than 1 percent in 1974 but more than
6 percent of national income in 2007. As noted, those figures are from pre-tax
income, so don’t look to the George W. Bush tax cuts to explain the pattern.
Furthermore, these gains have been sustained and have evolved over many years,
rather than coming in one or two small bursts between 1974 and
today.1
These
numbers have been challenged on the grounds that, since various tax reforms have
kicked in, individuals now receive their incomes in different and harder to
measure ways, namely through corporate forms, stock options and fringe benefits.
Caution is in order, but the overall trend seems robust. Similar broad patterns
are indicated by different sources, such as studies of executive compensation.
Anecdotal observation suggests extreme and unprecedented returns earned by
investment bankers, fired CEOs, J.K. Rowling and Tiger Woods.
At the
same time, wage
growth for the median earner has slowed since 1973. But that
slower wage growth has afflicted large numbers of Americans, and it is
conceptually distinct from the higher relative share of top income earners. For
instance, if you
take the 1979–2005 period, the average incomes of the bottom fifth of households
increased only 6 percent while the incomes of the middle quintile rose by 21
percent. That’s a widening of the spread of incomes, but
it’s not so drastic compared to the explosive gains at the very top.
The
broader change in income distribution, the one occurring beneath the very top
earners, can be deconstructed in a manner that makes nearly all of it look
harmless. For instance, there is usually greater inequality of income among both
older people and the more highly educated, if only because there is more time
and more room for fortunes to vary. Since America is becoming both older
and more highly educated, our measured income inequality will increase pretty
much by demographic fiat. Economist Thomas Lemieux at the University of British
Columbia estimates that these demographic effects explain three-quarters of the
observed rise in income inequality for men, and even more for women.2
Attacking
the problem from a different angle, other economists are challenging
whether there is much growth in inequality at all below the super-rich. For
instance, real incomes are measured using a common price index, yet poorer
people are more likely to shop at discount outlets like Wal-Mart, which have
seen big price drops over the past twenty
years.3 Once we take this behavior into
account, it is unclear whether the real income gaps between the poor and middle
class have been widening much at all. Robert J. Gordon, an economist from
Northwestern University who is hardly known as a right-wing apologist, wrote in
a recent paper that “there was no increase of inequality after 1993 in the
bottom 99 percent of the population”, and that whatever overall change there was
“can be entirely explained by the behavior of income in the top 1
percent.”4
And so
we come again to the gains of the top earners, clearly the big story told by the
data. It’s worth
noting that over this same period of time, inequality of work hours increased
too. The top earners worked a lot more and
most other Americans worked somewhat less. That’s another reason why high
earners don’t occasion more resentment: Many people understand how hard they
have to work to get there. It also seems that most of the
income gains of the top earners were related to performance pay—bonuses, in
other words—and not wildly out-of-whack yearly salaries.5
It is
also the case that any society with a lot of “threshold earners” is likely to
experience growing income inequality. A threshold earner is someone who seeks to
earn a certain amount of money and no more. If
wages go up, that person will respond by seeking less work or by working less
hard or less often. That person simply wants to “get by” in terms of absolute
earning power in order to experience other gains in the form of leisure—whether
spending time with friends and family, walking in the woods and so
on. Luck aside, that
person’s income will never rise much above the threshold.
It’s
not obvious what causes the percentage of threshold earners to rise or fall, but
it seems reasonable to suppose that the more single-occupancy households there
are, the more threshold earners there will be, since a major incentive for
earning money is to use it to take care of other people with whom one lives. For
a variety of reasons, single-occupancy households in the United States are at an
all-time high. There
are also a growing number of late odyssey years graduate students who try to
cover their own expenses but otherwise devote their time to study. If the
percentage of threshold earners rises for whatever reasons, however, the
aggregate gap between them and the more financially ambitious will widen.
There is nothing
morally or practically wrong with an increase in inequality from a source such
as that.
The
funny thing is this: For years, many cultural critics in and of the United
States have been telling us that Americans should behave more like threshold
earners. We
should be less harried, more interested in nurturing friendships, and more
interested in the non-commercial sphere of life. That may well be good advice.
Many studies suggest that above a certain level more money brings only marginal
increments of happiness. What isn’t so widely advertised is that those same critics have basically
been telling us, without realizing it, that we should be acting in such a manner
as to increase measured income inequality. Not only is high inequality an
inevitable concomitant of human diversity, but growing income inequality may be,
too, if lots of us take the kind of advice that will make us happier.
Lonely
at the Top?
Why is
the top 1 percent doing so well?
The
use of micro-data now makes it possible to trace some high earners by income and
thus construct a partial picture of what is going on among the upper echelons of
the distribution. Steven N. Kaplan and Joshua Rauh have
recently provided a detailed estimation of particular American
incomes.6 Their data do not comprise the entire
U.S. population, but from partial financial records they find a very strong role
for the financial sector in driving the trend toward income concentration at the
top. For instance, for 2004, nonfinancial executives of publicly traded
companies accounted for less than 6 percent of the top 0.01 percent income
bracket. In that same year, the top 25 hedge fund managers combined appear to
have earned more than all of the CEOs from the entire S&P
500. The number of Wall Street investors earning more than $100
million a year was nine times higher than the public company executives earning
that amount. The authors also relate that they shared their estimates with a
former U.S. Secretary of the Treasury, one who also has a Wall Street
background. He thought their estimates of earnings in the financial sector were,
if anything, understated.
Many
of the other high earners are also connected to finance. After Wall Street, Kaplan and Rauh
identify the legal sector as a contributor to the growing spread in earnings at
the top. Yet many high-earning lawyers are doing financial
deals, so a lot of the income generated through legal activity is rooted in
finance. Other lawyers are defending corporations against lawsuits, filing
lawsuits or helping corporations deal with complex regulations. The returns to
these activities are an artifact of the growing complexity of the law and
government growth rather than a tale of markets per se. Finance
aside, there isn’t
much of a story of market failure here, even if we don’t find
the results aesthetically appealing.
When
it comes to professional athletes and celebrities, there isn’t much of a mystery
as to what has happened. Tiger Woods earns much more, even adjusting for
inflation, than Arnold Palmer ever did. J.K. Rowling, the first billionaire
author, earns much more than did Charles Dickens. These high incomes come, on
balance, from the greater reach of modern communications and marketing.
Kids
all over the world read about Harry Potter. There is more purchasing power to
spend on children’s books and, indeed, on culture and celebrities more
generally. For
high-earning celebrities, hardly anyone finds these earnings so morally
objectionable as to suggest that they be politically actionable.
Cultural critics can complain that good schoolteachers earn too little, and they
may be right, but that does not make celebrities into political targets. They’re
too popular. It’s also
pretty clear that most of them work hard to earn their money, by persuading fans
to buy or otherwise support their product. Most of these individuals do not come
from elite or extremely privileged backgrounds, either. They
worked their way to the top, and even if Rowling is not an author for the ages,
her books tapped into the spirit of their time in a special way. We may or may
not wish to tax the wealthy, including wealthy celebrities, at higher rates,
but there is no need to
“cure” the structural causes of higher celebrity incomes.
If we
are looking for objectionable problems in the top 1 percent of income earners,
much of it boils down to finance and activities related to financial markets.
And to be sure, the high incomes in finance should give us all pause.
The
first factor driving high returns is sometimes called by practitioners “going
short on volatility.” Sometimes it is called “negative skewness.” In plain
English, this means that some investors opt for a strategy of betting against
big, unexpected moves in market prices. Most of the time investors will do well
by this strategy, since big, unexpected moves are outliers by definition.
Traders will earn
above-average returns in good times. In bad times they won’t suffer fully when
catastrophic returns come in, as sooner or later is bound to happen, because the
downside of these bets is partly socialized onto the Treasury, the Federal
Reserve and, of course, the taxpayers and the unemployed.
To
understand how this strategy works, consider an example from sports betting. The
NBA’s Washington Wizards are a perennially hapless team that rarely gets beyond
the first round of the playoffs, if they make the playoffs at all. This year the
odds of the Wizards winning the NBA title will likely clock in at longer than a
hundred to one. I could, as a gambling strategy, bet against the Wizards and
other low-quality teams each year. Most years I would earn a decent profit, and
it would feel like I was earning money for virtually nothing. The Los Angeles
Lakers or Boston Celtics or some other quality team would win the title again
and I would collect some surplus from my bets. For many years I would earn
excess returns relative to the market as a whole.
Yet
such bets are not wise over the long run. Every now and then a surprise team
does win the title and in those years I would lose a huge amount of money. Even
the Washington Wizards (under their previous name, the Capital Bullets) won the
title in 1977–78 despite compiling a so-so 44–38 record during the regular
season, by marching through the playoffs in spectacular fashion. So if you bet against unlikely
events, most of the time you will look smart and have the money to validate the
appearance. Periodically, however, you will look very bad. Does that kind of
pattern sound familiar? It happens in finance, too. Betting
against a big decline in home prices is analogous to betting against the
Wizards. Every now and then such a bet will blow up in your face, though in most
years that trading activity will generate above-average profits and big bonuses
for the traders and CEOs.
To
this mix we can add the fact that many money managers are investing other
people’s money. If
you plan to stay with an investment bank for ten years or less, most of the
people playing this investing strategy will make out very well most of the time.
Everyone’s time horizon is a bit limited and you will bring in some nice years
of extra returns and reap nice bonuses. And let’s say the whole thing does blow
up in your face? What’s the worst that can happen? Your bosses fire you, but you
will still have millions in the bank and that MBA from Harvard or Wharton.
For the people actually
investing the money, there’s barely any downside risk other than having to quit
the party early. Furthermore, if everyone else made more or less
the same mistake (very surprising major events, such as a busted housing market,
affect virtually everybody), you’re hardly disgraced. You might even get rehired
at another investment bank, or maybe a hedge fund, within months or even weeks.
Moreover, smart shareholders will acquiesce to
or even encourage these gambles. They gain on the upside, while the downside,
past the point of bankruptcy, is borne by the firm’s creditors. And will the
bondholders object? Well, they might have a difficult time monitoring the
internal trading operations of financial institutions. Of course, the firm’s
trading book cannot be open to competitors, and that means it cannot be open to
bondholders (or even most shareholders) either. So what, exactly, will they have
in hand to object to?
Perhaps
more important, government bailouts minimize the damage to creditors on the
downside.
Neither the Treasury
nor the Fed allowed creditors to take any losses from the collapse of the
major banks during the financial crisis. The U.S. government
guaranteed these loans, either explicitly or implicitly.
Guaranteeing
the debt also encourages equity holders to take more risk. While current
bailouts have not in general maintained equity values, and while share prices
have often fallen to near zero following the bust of a major bank, the bailouts
still give the bank a lifeline. Instead of the bank being destroyed, sometimes
those equity prices do climb back out of the hole. This is true of the major
surviving banks in the United States, and even AIG is paying back its
bailout. For better
or worse, we’re handing out free options on recovery, and that encourages banks
to take more risk in the first place.
In
short, there is an unholy dynamic of short-term trading and investing, backed up
by bailouts and risk reduction from the government and the Federal
Reserve.
This is not
good. “Going short on volatility” is a dangerous strategy
from a social point of view. For one thing, in so-called normal times, the
finance sector attracts a big chunk of the smartest, most hard-working and most
talented individuals. That represents a huge human capital opportunity cost to
society and the economy at large. But more immediate and more important, it
means that banks take far too many risks and go way out on a limb, often in
correlated fashion. When their bets turn sour, as they did in 2007–09, everyone
else pays the price.
And
it’s not just the taxpayer cost of the bailout that stings. The financial
disruption ends up throwing a lot of people out of work down the economic food
chain, often for long periods.
Furthermore, the Federal Reserve System has recapitalized major U.S. banks by
paying interest on bank reserves and by keeping an unusually high interest rate
spread, which allows banks to borrow short from Treasury at near-zero rates and
invest in other higher-yielding assets and earn back lots of money rather
quickly. In essence,
we’re allowing banks to earn their way back by arbitraging interest rate spreads
against the U.S. government. This is rarely called a bailout and
it doesn’t count as a normal budget item, but it is a bailout nonetheless. This
type of implicit bailout brings high social costs by slowing down economic
recovery (the interest rate spreads require tight monetary policy) and by
redistributing income from the Treasury to the major banks.
The
more one studies financial theory, the more one realizes how many different ways
there are to construct a “going short on volatility” investment position. To an
outsider, even to seasoned bank regulators, the net position of a bank or hedge
fund may well be impossible to discern. It’s not easy to unpack a balance sheet
with hundreds of billions of dollars on it and with numerous hedged, offsetting,
leveraged, or off-balance-sheet positions. Those who pack it usually know what’s
inside, but not always. In some cases, traders may not even know they are going
short on volatility. They just do what they have seen others do. Their peers who
try such strategies very often have Jaguars and homes in the Hamptons. What’s
not to like?
The
upshot of all this for our purposes is that the “going short on volatility”
strategy increases income inequality. In
normal years the financial sector is flush with cash and high earnings. In
implosion years a lot of the losses are borne by other sectors of society. In
other words, financial crisis begets income inequality. Despite being conceptually distinct
phenomena, the political economy of income inequality is, in part, the political
economy of finance. Simon Johnson tabulates the numbers nicely:
From
1973 to 1985, the financial sector never earned more than 16 percent of domestic
corporate profits. In 1986, that figure reached 19 percent. In the 1990s, it
oscillated between 21 percent and 30 percent, higher than it had ever been in
the postwar period. This decade, it reached 41 percent. Pay rose just as
dramatically. From 1948 to 1982, average compensation in the financial sector
ranged between 99 percent and 108 percent of the average for all domestic
private industries. From 1983, it shot upward, reaching 181 percent in
2007.7
If
you’re wondering, right before the Great Depression of the 1930s, bank profits
and finance-related earnings were also especially high.8
There’s
a second reason why the financial sector abets income inequality: the “moving
first” issue. Let’s say that some news hits the market and that traders
interpret this news at different speeds. One trader figures out what the news
means in a second, while the other traders require five seconds. Still other
traders require an entire day or maybe even a month to figure things out. The
early traders earn the extra money. They buy the proper assets early, at the
lower prices, and reap most of the gains when the other, later traders pile on.
Similarly, if you buy into a successful tech company in the early stages, you
are “moving first” in a very effective manner, and you will capture most of the
gains if that company hits it big.
The
moving-first phenomenon sums to a “winner-take-all”
market. Only
some relatively small number of traders, sometimes just one trader, can be
first. Those who are first will make far more than those who are fourth or
fifth. This difference will persist, even if those who are fourth come pretty
close to competing with those who are first. In this context, first is first and
it doesn’t matter much whether those who come in fourth pile on a month, a
minute or a fraction of a second later. Those who bought (or sold, as the case
may be) first have captured and locked in most of the available gains. Since
gains are concentrated among the early winners, and the closeness of the
runner-ups doesn’t so much matter for income distribution, asset-market trading
thus encourages the ongoing concentration of wealth. Many investors make lots of
mistakes and lose their money, but each year brings a new bunch of projects that
can turn the early investors and traders into very wealthy individuals.
These
two features of the problem—“going short on volatility” and “getting there
first”—are related. Let’s say that Goldman Sachs regularly secures a lot of the
best and quickest trades, whether because of its quality analysis, inside
connections or high-frequency trading apparatus (it has all three). It builds up
a treasure chest of profits and continues to hire very sharp traders and to
receive valuable information. Those profits allow it to make “short on
volatility” bets faster than anyone else, because if it messes up, it still has
a large enough buffer to pad losses. This increases the odds that Goldman will
repeatedly pull in spectacular profits.
Still,
every now and then Goldman will go bust, or would go bust if not for government
bailouts. But the odds are in any given year that it won’t because of the
advantages it and other big banks have. It’s as if the major banks have tapped a
hole in the social till and they are drinking from it with a straw. In any given
year, this practice may seem tolerable—didn’t the bank earn the money fair and
square by a series of fairly normal looking trades? Yet over time this situation
will corrode productivity, because what the banks do bears almost no resemblance
to a process of getting capital into the hands of those who can make most
efficient use of it. And it leads to periodic financial explosions. That, in
short, is the real problem of income inequality we face today. It’s what
causes the
inequality at the very top of the earning pyramid that has dangerous
implications for the economy as a whole.
A
Fix That Fits?
A
key
lesson to take from all of this is that simply railing against income inequality
doesn’t get us very far. We have to find a way to prevent or limit major banks
from repeatedly going short on volatility at social expense. No one has figured
out how to do that yet.
It
remains to be seen whether the new financial regulation bill signed into law
this past summer will help. The bill does have positive features. First, it
forces banks to put up more of their own capital, and thus shareholders will
have more skin in the game, inducing them to curtail their risky investments.
Second, it also limits the trading activities of banks, although to a currently
undetermined extent (many key decisions were kicked into the hands of future
regulators). Third, the new “resolution authority” allows financial regulators
to impose selective losses, for instance, to punish bondholders if they wish.
We’ll
see if these reforms constrain excess risk-taking in the long run. There are
reasons for skepticism. Most of all, the required capital
cushions simply aren’t that high, so a big enough bet against unexpected
outcomes still will yield more financial upside than downside.
Furthermore, high
capital reserve requirements insulate bank managers from the pressures of both
shareholders and bondholders. That could encourage risk-taking and
make the underlying problem worse. Autonomous managers often push for
risk-taking rather than constrain it.
What
about controlling bank risk-taking directly with tight government oversight?
That is not practical.
There are more ways for banks to take risks than even knowledgeable regulators
can possibly control; it just isn’t that easy to oversee a
balance sheet with hundreds of billions of dollars on it, especially when
short-term positions are wound down before quarterly inspections. It’s also not
clear how well regulators can identify risky assets. Some of the worst excesses of the
financial crisis were grounded in mortgage-backed assets—a very traditional
function of banks—not exotic derivatives trading strategies. Virtually any asset
position can be used to bet long odds, one way or another. It is naive to think
that underpaid, undertrained regulators can keep up with financial traders,
especially when the latter stand to earn billions by circumventing the intent of
regulations while remaining within the letter of the law.
It’s a
familiar story, repeated many times in the past. If one recalls the Basel I
capital agreements for banks, the view was that we would make banks safer by
inducing them to hold a lot of AAA-rated mortgage-backed assets. How well did
that work out? So, with no disrespect to the regulators or the sponsors of the
recent bill, it is hardly clear that enhanced regulation will solve the basic
problem.
For
the time being, we
need to accept the possibility that the financial sector has learned how to game
the American (and UK-based) system of state capitalism.
It’s no longer
obvious that the system is stable at a macro level, and extreme income
inequality at the top has been one result of that imbalance. Income inequality
is a symptom, however, rather than a cause of the real
problem. The root cause of income inequality,
viewed in the most general terms, is extreme human ingenuity, albeit of a
perverse kind. That is why it is so hard to control.
Another
root cause of growing inequality is that the modern world, by so limiting our
downside risk, makes extreme risk-taking all too comfortable and easy.
More risk-taking will
mean more inequality, sooner or later, because winners always emerge from
risk-taking. Yet bankers who take bad risks
(provided those risks are legal) simply do not end up with bad outcomes in any
absolute sense. They still have millions in the bank, lots of human capital and
plenty of social status. We’re not going to bring back torture, trial by
ordeal or debtors’ prisons, nor should we. Yet the threat of impoverishment and
disgrace no longer looms the way it once did, so we no longer can constrain
excess financial risk-taking. It’s too soft and cushy a world.
That’s
an underappreciated way to think about our modern, wealthy economy: Smart people
have greater reach than ever before, and nothing really can go so wrong for
them. As a broad-based portrait of the new world, that sounds pretty good, and
usually it is. Just keep in mind that every now and then those smart people will
be making—collectively—some pretty big mistakes.
How
about a world with no bailouts? Why don’t we simply eliminate the safety net for
clueless or unlucky risk-takers so that losses equal gains overall? That’s a
good idea in principle, but it is hard to put into practice. Once a financial
crisis arrives, politicians will seek to limit the damage, and that means they
will bail out major financial institutions. Had we not passed TARP and related
policies, the United States probably would have faced unemployment rates of 25
percent of higher, as in the Great Depression. The political consequences would not
have been pretty. Bank bailouts may sound quite interventionist, and indeed
they are, but in relative terms they probably were the most libertarian policy
we had on tap. It meant big one-time expenses, but, for the most part, it kept
government out of the real economy (the General Motors bailout aside).
So what
will happen next? One worry is that banks are currently undercapitalized and
will seek out or create a new bubble within the next few years, again pursuing
the upside risk without so much equity to lose. A second perspective is that
banks are sufficiently chastened for the time being but that economic turmoil in
Europe and China has not yet played itself out, so perhaps we still have seen
only the early stages of what will prove to be an even bigger international
financial crisis. Adherents of this view often analogize 2009–10 to 1929–32,
when many people thought that negative economic shocks had stopped and recovery
was underway. In 2006, banks were gambling on the housing market, and maybe
today they are, as the result of earlier decisions, gambling on China and Europe
staying in one economic piece.
A
third view is perhaps most likely. We probably don’t have any solution to the
hazards created by our financial sector, not because plutocrats are preventing
our political system from adopting appropriate remedies, but because we don’t
know what those remedies are. Yet
neither is another crisis immediately upon us. The underlying dynamic favors
excess risk-taking, but banks at the current moment fear the scrutiny of
regulators and the public and so are playing it fairly safe. They are sitting on
money rather than lending it out. The biggest risk today is how few parties will take
risks, and, in part, the caution of banks is driving our current protracted
economic slowdown. According to this view, the long run will bring another
financial crisis once moods pick up and external scrutiny weakens, but that day
of reckoning is still some ways off.
Is the
overall picture a shame? Yes. Is it distorting resource distribution and
productivity in the meantime? Yes. Will it again bring our economy to its knees?
Probably. Maybe that’s simply the price of modern society. Income inequality
will likely continue to rise and we will search in vain for the appropriate
political remedies for our underlying problems.
[ ]
[search]
When President Obama announced a two-year stay
of execution for taxpayers on Dec. 7, he made it clear that he intends to spend
those two years campaigning for higher marginal tax rates on dividends, capital
gains and salaries for couples earning more than $250,000. "I don't see how the
Republicans win that argument," said the president.
Despite the deficit commission's call for tax
reform with fewer tax credits and lower marginal tax rates, the left wing of the
Democratic Party remains passionate about making the U.S. tax system more and
more progressive. They claim this is all about payback—that raising the highest
tax rates is the fair thing to do because top income groups supposedly received
huge windfalls from the Bush tax cuts. As the headline of a Robert Creamer
column in the Huffington Post put it: "The Crowd that Had the Party Should Pick
up the Tab."
Arguments for these retaliatory tax penalties
invariably begin with estimates by economists Thomas Piketty of the Paris School
of Economics and Emmanuel Saez of U.C. Berkeley that the wealthiest 1% of U.S.
households now take home more than 20% of all household
income.
View Full Image
Images.com/Corbis
This estimate suffers two obvious and fatal
flaws. The first is that the "more than 20%" figure does not refer to "take
home" income at all. It refers to income before taxes (including capital gains)
as a share of income before transfers. Such figures tell us nothing about
whether the top percentile pays too much or too little in income
taxes.
In The Journal of Economic Perspectives (Winter
2007), Messrs. Piketty and Saez estimated that "the upper 1% of the income
distribution earned 19.6% of total income before tax [in 2004], and paid 41% of
the individual federal income tax." No other major country is so dependent on so
few taxpayers.
A 2008 study of 24 leading economies by the
Organization of Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) concludes that,
"Taxation is most progressively distributed in the United States, probably
reflecting the greater role played there by refundable tax credits, such as the
Earned Income Tax Credit and the Child Tax Credit. . . . Taxes tend to be least
progressive in the Nordic countries (notably, Sweden), France and Switzerland."
The OECD study—titled "Growing Unequal?"—also
found that the ratio of taxes paid to income received by the top 10% was by far
the highest in the U.S., at 1.35, compared to 1.1 for France, 1.07 for Germany,
1.01 for Japan and 1.0 for Sweden (i.e., the top decile's share of Swedish taxes
is the same as their share of income).
A second fatal flaw is that the large share of
income reported by the upper 1% is largely a consequence of lower tax rates. In
a 2010 paper on top incomes co-authored with Anthony Atkinson of Nuffield
College, Messrs. Piketty and Saez note that "higher top marginal tax rates can
reduce top reported earnings." They say "all studies" agree that higher "top
marginal tax rates do seem to negatively affect top income
shares."
What appears to be an increase in top incomes
reported on individual tax returns is often just a predictable taxpayer reaction
to lower tax rates. That should be readily apparent from the nearby table, which
uses data from Messrs. Piketty and Saez to break down the real incomes of the
top 1% by source (excluding interest income and rent).
The first column ("salaries") shows average
labor income among the top 1% reported on W2 forms—from salaries, bonuses and
exercised stock options. A Dec. 13 New York Times article, citing Messrs.
Piketty and Saez, claims, "A big reason for the huge gains at the top is the
outsize pay of executives, bankers and traders." On the contrary, the table
shows that average real pay among the top 1% was no higher at the 2007 peak than
it had been in 1999.
In a January 2008 New York Times article,
Austan Goolsbee (now chairman of the President's Council of Economic Advisers)
claimed that "average real salaries (subtracting inflation) for the top 1% of
earners . . . have been growing rapidly regardless of what happened to tax
rates." On the contrary, the top 1% did report higher salaries after the
mid-2003 reduction in top tax rates, but not by enough to offset losses of the
previous three years. By examining the sources of income Mr. Goolsbee chose to
ignore—dividends, capital gains and business income—a powerful taxpayer response
to changing tax rates becomes quite clear.
The second column,
for example, shows real capital gains reported in taxable accounts. President
Obama proposes raising the capital gains tax to 20% on top incomes after the
two-year reprieve is over. Yet the chart shows that the top 1% reported fewer
capital gains in the tech-stock euphoria of 1999-2000 (when the tax rate was
20%) than during the middling market of 2006-2007. It is doubtful so many gains
would have been reported in 2006-2007 if the tax rate had been 20%. Lower tax
rates on capital gains increase the frequency of asset sales and thus result in
more taxable capital gains on tax returns.
The third column shows a near tripling of
average dividend income from 2002 to 2007. That can only be explained as a
behavioral response to the sharp reduction in top tax rates on dividends, to 15%
from 38.6%. Raising the dividend tax to 20% could easily yield no additional
revenue if it resulted in high-income investors holding fewer dividend- paying
stocks and more corporations using stock buybacks rather than dividends to
reward stockholders.
The last column of the table shows average
business income reported on the top 1% of individual tax returns by subchapter S
corporations, partnerships, proprietorships and many limited liability
companies. After the individual tax rate was brought down to the level of the
corporate tax rate in 2003, business income reported on individual tax returns
became quite large. For the Obama team to argue that higher taxes on individual
incomes would have little impact on business denies these facts.
If individual tax
rates were once again pushed above corporate rates, some firms, farms and
professionals would switch to reporting income on corporate tax forms to shelter
retained earnings. As with dividends and capital gains, this is another reason
that estimated revenues from higher tax rates are
unbelievable.
The Piketty and
Saez estimates are irrelevant to questions about income distribution because
they exclude taxes and transfers. What those figures do show, however, is that
if tax rates on high incomes, capital gains and dividends were increased in
2013, the top 1%'s reported share of before-tax income would indeed go way down.
That would be partly because of reduced effort, investment and entrepreneurship.
Yet simpler ways of reducing reported income can leave the after-tax income
about the same (switching from dividend-paying stocks to tax-exempt bonds, or
holding stocks for years).
Once higher tax rates cause the top 1% to
report less income, then top taxpayers would likely pay a much smaller share of
taxes, just as they do in, say, France or Sweden. That would be an ironic
consequence of listening to economists and journalists who form strong opinions
about tax policy on the basis of an essentially irrelevant statistic about what
the top 1%'s share might be if there were not taxes or transfers.
Mr. Reynolds is a senior fellow at the Cato
Institute and the author of "Income and Wealth" (Greenwood Press 2006).
How ironic that
Wisconsin has become ground zero for the battle between taxpayers and public-
employee labor unions. Wisconsin was
the first state to allow collective bargaining for government workers (in 1959),
following a tradition where it was the first to introduce a personal income tax
(in 1911, before the introduction of the current form of individual income tax
in 1913 by the federal government).
Labor unions like to portray collective
bargaining as a basic civil liberty, akin to the freedoms of speech, press,
assembly and religion. For a teachers union, collective bargaining means that suppliers
of teacher services to all public school systems in a state—or even across
states—can collude with regard to acceptable wages, benefits and working
conditions. An analogy for business would be for all providers of airline
transportation to assemble to fix ticket prices, capacity and so on. From this
perspective, collective bargaining on a broad scale is more similar to an
antitrust violation than to a civil liberty.
In
fact, labor unions were subject to U.S. antitrust laws in the Sherman Antitrust
Act of 1890, which was first applied in 1894 to the American Railway Union.
However, organized labor managed to obtain exemption from federal antitrust laws
in subsequent legislation, notably the Clayton Antitrust Act of 1914 and the
National Labor Relations Act of 1935.
Remarkably, labor unions are not only immune from
antitrust laws but can also negotiate a "union shop," which requires nonunion
employees to join the union or pay nearly equivalent dues. Somehow, despite many attempts, organized labor has lacked the political
power to repeal the key portion of the 1947 Taft Hartley Act that allowed states
to pass right-to-work laws, which now prohibit the union shop in 22
states. From the standpoint of civil liberties, the individual right to
work—without being forced to join a union or pay dues—has a much better claim
than collective bargaining. (Not to mention that "right to work" has a much more
pleasant, liberal sound than "collective bargaining.") The push for
right-to-work laws, which haven't been enacted anywhere but Oklahoma over the
last 20 years, seems about to take off.
View Full Image
Associated Press
The current pushback against labor-union power stems
from the collision between overly generous benefits for public employees—
notably for pensions and health care—and the fiscal crises of state and local
governments. Teachers and other public-employee unions went too far in
convincing weak or complicit state and local governments to agree to
obligations, particularly defined-benefit pension plans, that created excessive
burdens on taxpayers.
In recognition of this fiscal reality, even the
unions and their Democratic allies in Wisconsin have agreed to Gov. Scott
Walker's proposed cutbacks of benefits, as long as he drops the restrictions on
collective bargaining. The problem is that this "compromise" leaves intact the
structure of strong public-employee unions that helped to create the
unsustainable fiscal situation; after all, the next governor may have less
fiscal discipline. A long-run solution requires a change in structure, for
example, by restricting collective bargaining for public employees and, to go
further, by introducing a right-to-work law.
There
is evidence that right-to-work laws—or, more broadly, the pro-business policies
offered by right-to-work states—matter for economic growth. In research
published in 2000, economist Thomas Holmes of the University of Minnesota
compared counties close to the border between states with and without
right-to-work laws (thereby holding constant an array of factors related to
geography and climate). He found that the cumulative growth of employment in
manufacturing (the traditional area of union strength prior to the rise of
public-employee unions) in the right-to-work states was 26 percentage points
greater than that in the non-right-to-work states.
Beyond Wisconsin, a key issue is which states
are likely to be the next political battlegrounds on labor issues. In fact, one
can interpret the extreme reactions by union demonstrators and absent Democratic
legislators in Wisconsin not so much as attempts to influence that state—which
may be a lost cause—but rather to deter politicians in other states from taking
similar actions. This strategy may be working in Michigan, where Gov. Rick
Snyder recently asserted that he would not "pick fights" with labor unions.
In general, the most likely arenas are states
in which the governor and both houses of the state legislature are Republican
(often because of the 2010 elections), and in which substantial rights for
collective bargaining by public employees currently exist. This group includes Indiana, which has
recently been as active as Wisconsin on labor issues; ironically, Indiana
enacted a right-to-work law in 1957 but repealed it in 1965. Otherwise, my
tentative list includes Michigan, Pennsylvania, Maine, Florida, Tennessee,
Nebraska (with a nominally nonpartisan legislature), Kansas, Idaho, North Dakota
and South Dakota.
The national fiscal crisis and recession that
began in 2008 had many ill effects, including the ongoing crises of pension and
health-care obligations in many states. But at least one positive consequence is
that the required return to fiscal discipline has caused reexamination of the
growth in economic and political power of public-employee unions. Hopefully,
embattled politicians like Gov. Walker in Wisconsin will maintain their resolve
and achieve a more sensible long-term structure for the taxpayers in their
states.
Mr. Barro is a professor of economics at
Harvard and a senior fellow at Stanford University's Hoover
Institution.
Predictions that the financial crisis would cause unrest
in Ireland have been proved wrong. On Friday, more than two million Irish voted
in peaceful elections, choosing upheaval at the ballot box, not on the
street.
The outgoing Fianna Fáil party was punished for
overseeing Ireland's economic decline. It is set to lose more than two-thirds of
its seats, according to near-complete results Sunday.
Voters chose political stability by making Fine Gael the
largest party. The center-right party campaigned to cut payroll taxes in order
to stimulate jobs, to reduce certain value-added tax (VAT) rates and the air
travel tax, and to sell state assets. It also promised not to raise income taxes
or the 12.5% rate for corporations. Most of the next €9 billion of fiscal
correction will come from spending cuts, not tax
hikes.
Some
Fine Gael policies will be diluted, as the party will likely be forced into a
coalition with the runner-up Labour Party. But the new government can be expected to stick to the
constraints of the European Union-International Monetary Fund austerity package
while trying to reduce 14% unemployment.
Both parties
pledged to renegotiate the interest rate on EU loans to reduce the burden on
Irish taxpayers. The average interest rate of 5.8% for seven years is seen as
contributing to Ireland's costly debt problem.
It hasn't escaped Irish attention that Iceland
renegotiated its deal with the U.K. and the Netherlands, cutting its interest
rate to 3.2% from 5.5%. The Irish have also noticed that the interest rates for
the EU balance-of-payments support for Latvia and Romania are around 2.5% to
3%.
View Full Image
Associated Press
Irish
government debt is already about 100% of GDP (€160 billion) and will rise to
about 120% of GDP in 2014, before possibly stabilizing. Many fear it won't. The government bailout of
Ireland's banks alone could rise to 36% of debt this year, according to Goodbody
Stockbrokers. Irish banks remain reliant on emergency funding from the European
Central Bank (ECB) and the Irish Central Bank.
Nobody can say what the final costs of the
banks' bailout will be. The Irish people are wondering why they should make
whole the remaining €21 billion of private bank debt that is not guaranteed by
the state. Why should Irish taxpayers have to suffer for bad lending decisions
made elsewhere in Europe?
The
simple answer is that the ECB, Germany and other governments insist that
national taxpayers bear these costs. When and how this became ECB policy is
unclear. It seems to have been implicitly in place even before the 2008 Irish
bank guarantee.
According to
outgoing Finance Minister Brian Lenihan, last November the Irish government
wanted creditors to share some of the costs. The ECB refused. But there is near
consensus in Ireland, if not in the EU, that some form of debt restructuring
will be necessary. What form would best support growth, business and jobs is not
clear yet. Some senior bank debt, for example, is owned by Irish institutions,
including pension funds.
The
bottom line is that while each percentage point reduction of the interest rate
on the EU loans could ease the cost to Ireland by 0.4% of GDP, every 10% haircut
on the unguaranteed, unsecured bank debt would equal 1.3% of GDP, according to
Goodbody. That 3-to-1 ratio makes haircuts look
tantalizing.
Does this mean Ireland is heading for imminent
insolvency before the March 24 EU summit? Not quite. Monday morning markets don't matter for
Ireland. New bank stress tests will be completed only after the summit.
But political
pressure will drive the next government to seek lower interest rates. The wider euro zone is also under
pressure to find a coherent response to the overall European debt problem.
In
these circumstances, it would be madness for Dublin to bargain away its
corporate tax policy. Suggestions that Ireland exchange a one percentage point
increase in the corporation tax rate for a one percentage point reduction in the
EU interest rate are misguided. Hiking the corporate tax rate would break
the promise made to the thousands of international investors who own €172
billion of foreign direct investment in Ireland, the equivalent of 107% of the
country's GDP.
It makes no sense to protect sovereign debt investors by
burning direct investors. That would be
tantamount to a default in the eyes of foreign investors. That's why the new
Irish government will neither default on its sovereign debt nor its corporate
tax promises.
Fortunately, Ireland still has a real economy
that is increasing its competitiveness and exports. Agribusiness,
medical-devices, pharma and international services are all vibrant. Hotel prices
are now the cheapest in Western Europe. There is hope.
Mr. O'Connor, a business consultant based
in London, is a former adviser to the Irish government.
Ireland's main opposition party, Fine Gael, won
a clear victory in Friday's election, setting Dublin on course for a showdown
with the European Union over the terms of its €67.5 billion ($92.83 billion)
international bailout.
The center-right Fine Gael, which campaigned on
a promise to renegotiate key points of the rescue package, is expected to start
negotiations with the smaller center-left Labour Party on forming a new
government. With 154 seats decided in the 166-seat Dáil, or lower house of
parliament, by Sunday evening, Fine Gael had 70, followed by Labour with 36 and
the incumbent Fianna Fáil with 18. The left-wing Sinn Fein picked up 13 and
Independents took 13.
Enda Kenny, the Fine Gael leader widely
expected to become prime minister, said Saturday that the bailout was "a bad
deal for Ireland and a bad deal for Europe" and added: "We are not going to cry
the poor mouth, other than to say the reality of this challenge is too
much."
Mr. Kenny will launch his renegotiation fight
on Friday at a meeting in Helsinki of the European People's Party, which is made
up of leaders from Europe's right-leaning Christian Democratic parties who vote
together in the European Parliament. He will continue it at a meeting of the
European Council in Brussels the following week.
Peter Muhly/Agence France-Presse/Getty
Images
See key dates in Ireland's economic
crisis.
Fine Gael rode to power on voter anger at
Ireland's economic crash and the country's huge debts, while the right-leaning
Fianna Fáil bore the full force of voters' wrath, punished for failing to rein
in Ireland's banks as they indulged in reckless real-estate
lending.
Fine Gael officials said that once in
power,they would seek to reduce the 6% the EU charges for emergency loans, and
some even spoke of forcing the Irish banks' bondholders to take losses on some
of their holdings.
"There is a strong feeling in Ireland that
Irish taxpayers can't cope with the burden of bailing out the entire banking
system on their own," said Kevin Rafter, lecturer in politics at Dublin City
University. "The consensus is that it requires a broader solution at the
European level, and more burden-sharing."
That sets the stage for a confrontation with
European officials. In Brussels and at the European Central Bank's Frankfurt
headquarters, officials have fiercely opposed any talk of imposing so-called
haircuts on bank bondholders. Their concern is that such a move would erode
investor confidence across the euro zone, potentially causing the Continent's
banking crisis to flare up again. Also, rescheduling the banking system's debts
would leave German and French banks, which are big holders of Irish banks'
bonds, with substantial losses.
One of the new government's early tasks will be
to decide how much to invest in recapitalizing the banking system. Under the
terms of the bailout, the Irish government was set to inject up to €10 billion
into Bank
of Ireland, Allied Irish Banks and EBS Building Society by the end of
February. But Mr. Kenny has said that should be postponed until the results of
stress tests on the banks, to be completed by the end of March, are known.
Meanwhile, Fine Gael itself is somewhat split
on the issue of changing the terms of the bailout. Some in the party see the
threat of imposing a haircut on bondholders merely as a stick for winning
concessions from Europe on the interest rate. But some newly elected Fine Gael
lawmakers are determined to make sure bondholders and other lenders are
punished.
Peter Mathews, a former bank analyst who won a
seat in parliament in Friday's election, said he will push for lenders to
Ireland's troubled banks to bear more pain. That includes not only the
institutional investors that have bought bonds issued by the banks, but also the
ECB, which has made tens of billions of euros in emergency loans to the sector.
Mr. Mathews believes the ECB deserves to share in the suffering, since he says
it didn't do more to rein in the Irish banks' excesses during the boom years.
"There will have to be a restructuring
resolution sooner rather than later," he said Sunday, shortly before celebrating
with his family. The ECB is "not going to be pleased, naturally," the Fine Gael
lawmaker added. "But they were complicit in the whole thing. They failed to
exercise their overarching supervisory responsibilities within the euro
zone."
—Eamonn Quinn
contributed to this
article.
Write to Guy Chazan at guy.chazan@wsj.com, David Enrich at david.enrich@wsj.com and Paul Hannon at
paul.hannon@dowjones.com
The hunt for Hosni Mubarak's ill-gotten wealth
is underway, with banks and governments cooperating to return what belongs to
the people of Egypt. However, it may be too late to recover most of what Mr.
Mubarak and his cronies stole, and in many other cases it may be impossible to
prevent such losses as they are happening. There is one place, though, where it is
both indisputable that the authoritarian rulers are looting the country's wealth
and possible to do something about it right now:
Burma.
The
military junta has been diverting profits from the lucrative energy sector for
nearly two decades. Natural gas sales to Thailand alone have generated billions
of dollars, accounting for roughly 35% of annual export earnings. But instead of
generating prosperity and hope for Burmese, this wealth has largely disappeared
into the generals' pockets.
Part of the problem is that very little of the
gas revenue ever officially enters Burma. A well-documented dual accounting method
ensures most of the profit, paid to the military in U.S. dollars, remains
outside of the country's national budget. In some cases it is located in
shadowy offshore bank accounts held in trust by entities designed to avoid
international sanctions.
So what can the international community do? The
U.S. could fully implement existing financial sanctions that were designed to
target the generals' offshore bank accounts. Section 5(c) of the JADE Act of
2008 already authorizes the Treasury Department to prohibit Burmese individuals
and foreign banks from accessing the U.S. financial system if they hold cash or
facilitate transactions for the Burmese regime.
Restricted access to the U.S. financial system
is a risk foreign banks will not take lightly. This should have little adverse
impact on Burma's general population, since they are already largely isolated
from the global financial system, but it will make it more difficult for the
generals to hide public money.
While the full weight of the U.S. legislation
has never been applied, recent reports from Singapore suggest some banks in the
island state have started refusing accounts held by politically exposed persons
from Burma. This shows that bankers are very aware of the risk of tougher
sanctions, and that such sanctions might be very
effective.
Working with Egypt
and other transitioning countries to recover lost or stolen assets is a step in
the right direction, but it's not enough. A military junta should not be allowed
to openly loot a country's resources with the help of the international
financial system. Cutting the generals off from the tools they need to launder
their stolen money is a sound measure that can change their behavior and help
the people of Burma recover what is rightfully theirs.
Mr. Smith is a senior consultant with EarthRights International, which represented Burmese plaintiffs in Doe v. Unocal Corporation.
*************R18
This Web Page Created with PageBreeze Free HTML Editor